CARRIER Package Units(both Units Combined) Manual L0907191

User Manual: CARRIER CARRIER Package Units(both units combined) Manual CARRIER Package Units(both units combined) Owner's Manual, CARRIER Package Units(both units combined) installation guides

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 106 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Irn

Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service and

Troubleshooting Instructions

®

to the Expertg

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS ......................... 2

GENERAL ......................................... 3

BASIC CONTROL USAGE ........................... 3

ComfortLink ,_ Control .............................. 3

Scrolling Marquee .................................. 3

Accessory Navigator Display .......................... 3

Operation ......................................... 3

System Pilot _ Device ............................... 4

CCN Tables and Display ............................. 4

Conventions Used in This Manual ...................... 5

START-UP ......................................... 5

Unit Preparation .................................... 5

Compressor Mounting ............................... 5

Refrigerant Service Ports ............................. 5

Crankcase Heater(s) ................................. 5

Compressor Rotation ................................ 5

Power Supply ..................................... 6

Internal Wiring ..................................... 6

Evaporator Fan .................................... 6

Condenser Fans and Motors ........................... 6

Return-Air Filters .................................. 6

Outdoor-Air Inlet Screens ............................ 6

Accessory Installation ............................... 7

Orifice Change (48PD Only) .......................... 7

Gas Heat (48PD Only) ............................... 7

CONTROLS QUICK SET-UP ......................... 7

Control Set Point and Configuration Log ................ 7

Standard Unit Control ............................... 7

CCN Communication ............................... 8

Accessories ....................................... 8

Programming Operating Schedules .................... 10

SERVICE TEST .................................... 10

Independent Outputs ............................... 10

Fan Test ......................................... 10

Cooling Test ..................................... 11

Heating Test ...................................... 11

THIRD PARTY CONTROL .......................... 11

Remote Occupancy ................................ 11

Fire Shutdown .................................... 11

Alarm Output ..................................... 11

Economizer Monitoring ............................. 11

Economizer Damper Control ......................... 11

CONTROLS OPERATION ........................... 11

Display Configuration .............................. 11

Modes .......................................... 12

Unit Configuration ................................. 12

General Operating Sequence ......................... 13

Occupancy Determination ........................... 13

Compressor Operation .............................. 14

Indoor Fan Operation ............................... 14

Outdoor Fan Operation ............................. 15

Economizer Operation .............................. 15

Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) ............................ 16

Cooling Modes ................................... 17

Heating Modes .................................... 20

Temperature Compensated Start ....................... 22

Carrier Comfort Network (CCN)® Configuration ......... 23

Demand Limit .................................... 23

Alarm Handling ................................... 24

TROUBLESHOOTING .............................. 24

Complete Unit Stoppage ............................ 24

Restart Procedure .................................. 24

Control Module Conmmnication ...................... 24

Communication Failures ............................ 25

Alarms and Alerts ................................. 25

Cooling Troubleshooting ............................ 30

Digital Scroll Controller (DSC) Troubleshooting .......... 31

Economizer Troubleshooting ......................... 33

Heating Troubleshooting ............................ 34

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Troubleshooting ........ 34

Phase Loss Protection .............................. 34

Thermistor Troubleshooting ......................... 37

Transducer Troubleshooting ......................... 38

Forcing Inputs and Outputs .......................... 38

MAJOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS .................... 42

General ......................................... 42

Main Base Board (MBB) ............................ 47

Economizer Control Board (ECB) ..................... 49

Modulation Board (AUX1) .......................... 51

Digital Scroll Control Board (DSC) .................... 52

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) ...................... 53

Integrated Gas Control (IGC) Board ................... 54

Low Voltage Terminal Strip (TBI) ..................... 55

Scrolling Marquee Display .......................... 56

Accessory Navigator TM Display ....................... 56

Carrier Comfort Network (CCN)® Interface ............. 56

Field-Installed Accessories .......................... 56

SERVICE ......................................... 59

Cleaning ........................................ 60

Lubrication ...................................... 62

Evaporator Fan Service and Replacement ............... 62

Evaporator Fan Performance Adjustment ............... 62

Evaporator Fan Belt Tension Adjustment ............... 63

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Replacement ........... 63

Condenser-Fan Adjustment .......................... 63

Verify Sensor Performance .......................... 64

Economizer Operation During Power Failure ............ 64

Evacuation ....................................... 64

Refrigerant Charge ................................. 64

Gas Valve Adjustment (48PD Units Only) ............... 65

High Altitude (48PD Units Only) ..................... 66

Main Burners (48PD Units Only) ..................... 66

Filter Drier ....................................... 66

Protective Devices ................................. 66

Relief Devices .................................... 67

Compressor Sound Shield ........................... 67

Control Circuit, 24-V .............................. 67

Replacement Parts ................................. 67

Diagnostic LEDs .................................. 67

APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND

CCN TABLES ..................................... 68

APPENDIX B - STARTUP DATA ..................... 81

APPENDIX C - ADDITIONAL STARTUP DATA ......... 91

APPENDIX D - ADDITIONAL STARTUP DATA ....... 100

UNIT START-UP CHECKLIST ...................... 105

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

Installation and servicing of air-conditioning equipment can be

hazardous due to system pressure and electrical components. Only

trained and qualified service personnel should install, repair, or

service air-conditioning equipment. Untrained personnel can

perform the basic maintenance functions of replacing filters.

Trained service personnel should perform all other operations.

When working on air-conditioning equipment, observe precautions

in the literature, tags and labels attached to the unit, and other

safety precautions that may apply. Follow all safety codes. Wear

safety glasses and work gloves. Use quenching cloth for unbrazing

operations. Have fire extinguishers available for all brazing

operations.

Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves.

Have fire extinguisher available. Read these instructions

thoroughly and follow all warnings or cautions attached to the unit.

Consult local building codes and National Electrical Code (NEC)

for special requirements.

Recognize safety information. This is the safety-alert symbol /_.

When you see this symbol on the unit and in instructions or

manuals, be alert to the potential for personal iniury.

Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING, and

CAUTION. These words are used with the safety-alert symbol.

DANGER identifies the most serious hazards which will result in

severe personal iniury or death. WARNING signifies a hazard

which could result in personal iniury or death. CAUTION is used

to identify unsafe practices which may result in minor personal

iniury or product and property damage. NOTE is used to highlight

suggestions which will result in enhanced installation, reliability, or

operation.

ELECTRICALSHOCK HAZARD

Failure to follow this warning could cause personal

iniury or death.

Before performing service or maintenance operations

on unit, turn off main power switch to unit and install

lockout tag. Ensure electrical service to rooftop unit

agrees with voltage and amperage listed on the unit

rating plate.

UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD

Failure to follow this caution may cause equipment

damage.

This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control

system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out

components or to bypass or otherwise depart from

recommended procedures. Any short-to-ground of the

control board or accompanying wiring may destroy the

electronic modules or electrical components.

FIRE, EXPLOSION HAZARD

Failure to follow this warning could result in personal

iniury, death and/or property damage.

Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service, or

maintenance can cause property damage, personal

iniury, or loss of life. Refer to the User's Information

Manual provided with this unit for more details.

Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors

and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance.

What to do if you smell gas:

1. DO NOT try to light any appliance.

2. DO NOT touch any electrical switch, or use any

phone in your building.

3.IMMEDIATELY call your gas supplier from a

neighbor's phone. Follow the gas supplier's

instructions.

4. If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire

department.

GENERAL

This publication contains Start-Up, Controls, Operation, Service,

and Troubleshooting information for the 48/50PD rooftop units.

(See Table 1.) These units are equipped with ComfortLink "_

controls version I.X or higher and use Puron ® refrigerant. The

specific base unit installation instructions and/or wiring label

diagram may also be required in conjunction with this book as a

guide to a specific unit on the roof. All the units in Table 1 are

Displacement Ventilation or Single Zone Variable Airflow units

that provide stand-alone or network operation.

Table 1 -- Rooftop Units

MODEL

48/50PD

SIZE

05

06

NOMINAL TONS

4

5

BASIC CONTROL USAGE

ComfortLink Control

The ComfortLink control is a comprehensive unit-management

system. The control system is easy to access, configure, diagnose

and troubleshoot.

The ComfortLink control is fully communicating and cable-ready

for connection to the Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) building

management system. The control provides high-speed

communications for remote monitoring via the Internet. Multiple

units can be linked together (and to other ComfortLink control

equipped units) using a 3-wire communication bus.

The ComfortLink control system is easy to access through the use

of a unit-mounted display module. There is no need to bring a

separate computer to this unit for start-up. Access to control menus

is simplified by the ability to quickly select from 11 menus. A

scrolling readout provides detailed explanations of control

information. Only four, large, easy-to-use buttons are required to

maneuver through the entire controls menu. The display readout is

designed to be visible even in bright sunlight.

For added service flexibility, an accessory hand-held

Navigator TM module is also available. This portable device has an

extended communication cable that can be plugged into the unit's

communication network at the main control box. The Navigator

display provides the same menu structure, control access and

display data as is available at the unit-mounted Scrolling Marquee

display.

O AlarmStNus

0 Configuralion

OT[me Clock

8o:=.......

Fig. 1-Scrolling Marquee

C06320

Scrolling Marquee

This device is the keypad interface used to access the control

information, read sensor values, and test the unit. The Scrolling

Marquee is located in the main control box and is standard on all

units. The Scrolling Marquee display is a 4-key, 4-character,

16-segment LED (light-emitting diode) display module. The

display also contains an Alarm Status LED. (See Fig. 1.)

The display is easy to operate using 4 buttons and a group of 11

LEDs that indicate the following menu structures:

• Run Status

• Service Test

• Temperatures

• Pressures

• Set points

• Inputs

• Outputs

• Configuration

• Timeclock

• Operating Modes

• Alarms

Through the Scrolling Marquee, the user can access all of the

inputs and outputs to check on their values and status, configure

operating parameters plus evaluate the current decision status for

operating modes. The control also includes an alarm history which

can be accessed from the display. In addition, through the Scrolling 1

Marquee, the user can access a built-in test routine that can be used

at start-up commissioning and to diagnose operational problems

with the unit.

Accessory Navigator Display

The accessory hand-held Navigator display can be used with the

48/50PD units. (See Fig. 2.) The Navigator display operates the

same way as the Scrolling Marquee device. The Navigator display

is plugged into the LEN (local equipment network) port on either

TBI or the J3 port on the ECB (economizer control board).

Fig. 2 - Accessory Navigator Display

C06321

Operation

All units are shipped from the factory with the Scrolling Marquee

display, which is located in the main control box. (See Fig. 1.) In

addition, the ComfortLink control also supports the use of the

handheld Navigator display.

Both displays provide the user with an interface to the

ComfortLink control system. The displays have up and down

arrow keys, an ESCAPE key and an ENTER key. These keys are

used to navigate through the different levels of the display

structure. The Navigator display and the Scrolling Marquee operate

in the same manner, except that the Navigator display has multiple

lines of display and the Scrolling Marquee has a single line. All

further discussions and examples in this document will be based on

the Scrolling Marquee display. See Table 2 for the menu structure.

The four keys are used to navigate through the display

structure, which is organized in a tiered mode structure. If the

buttons have not been used for a period, the display will default to

the AUTO VIEW display category as shown under the RUN

STATUS category. To show the top-level display, press the

ESCAPE key until a blank display is shown. Then use the up and

downarrowkeysto scroll through the top-level categories. These

are listed in Appendix A and will be indicated on the Scrolling

Marquee by the LED next to each mode listed on the face of the

display.

When a specific mode or sub-mode is located, push the ENTER

key to enter the mode. Depending on the mode, there may be

additional tiers. Continue to use the up and down keys and the

ENTER keys until the desired display item is found. At any time,

the user can move back a mode level by pressing the ESCAPE key.

Once an item has been selected the display will flash showing the

item, followed by the item value and then followed by the item

units (if any).

Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are password

protected. The display will flash PASS and WORD when required.

Use the ENTER and arrow keys to enter the four digits of the

password. The default password is 1111.

Pressing the ESCAPE and ENTER keys simultaneously will scroll

an expanded text description across the display indicating the full

meaning of each display point. Pressing the ESCAPE and ENTER

keys when the display is blank (MODE LED level) will return the

display to its default menu of rotating AUTO VIEW display items.

In addition, the password will need to be entered again before

changes can be made.

Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in the

same manner. Locate and display the desired item. If the display is

in rotating auto-view, press the ENTER key to stop the display at

the desired item. Press the ENTER key again so that the item value

flashes. Use the arrow keys to change the value of state of an item

and press the ENTER key to accept it. Press the ESCAPE key and

the item, value or units display will resume. Repeat the process as

required for other items.

There are some points that can be forced from the Scrolling

Marquee or the Navigator. If the user needs to force a variable,

follow the same process as when editing a configuration parameter.

A forced variable, regardless where the force has come from will

be displayed with a blinking "." on a Scrolling Marquee and a

blinking "F' on a Navigator following its value. For example, if

economizer commanded position (EC.CP) is forced, the Navigator

display shows "80F', where the "F' is blinking to signify a force on

the point. The Scrolling Marquee display shows "80." Where the

.... is blinking to signify a force on the point. Remove the force by

selecting the point that is forced with the key ENTER and then

pressing the up and down arrow keys simultaneously.

Depending on the unit model, factory-installed options and

field-installed accessories, some of the items in the various Mode

categories may not apply.

System Pilot TM and Touch Pilot Devices

The System Pilot device (33PILOT-01) and Touch Pilot device

(33CNTPILOT) can be used as CCN communication

user-interfaces. These devices can be put on the CCN bus and

addressed to communicate with any other device on the network.

Unlike the Scrolling Marquee and Navigator, these pilots read the

48/50PD's CCN tables and the units CCN points can be monitored,

forced, or configured.

IMPORTANT: Multiple zoning application is NOT

recommended at this time with the PD products.

Additionally, the System Pilot device can serve as a wall-mounted

temperature sensor for space temperature measurement. The

occupant can use the System Pilot device to change set points. A

security feature is provided to limit access of features for

unauthorized users. See Fig. 3 for System Pilot device details.

CCN Tables and Display

In addition to the unit-mounted Scrolling Marquee display, the

user can also access the same information through the CCN tables

by using the Service tool or other CCN programs/devices. The

variable names used for the CCN tables and the Scrolling Marquee

menus may be different and more items may be displayed in the

CCN tables. Details on the CCN tables are included with the local

display menus in Appendix A. Appendix A is structured towards

the organization of the local display (Scrolling Marquee) menus.

Because of the variety of CCN programs and devices, the CCN

tables, sub-tables, and points are referenced within that

organization.

RUN SERVICE

STATUS TEST

Auto View

of

Run Status

(VIEW)

Software

Version

Numbers

(VERS)

Control

Modes

(MODE)

Cooling

Status

(COOL)

Heating

Status

(HEAT)

Economizer

Status

(ECON)

Component

Run Hours

(HRS)

Component

Starts

(STRT)

Service Test

Mode

(TEST)

Test Independent

Outputs

(INDP)

Test Fans

Test (?ooling

(COOL)

Test Heating

(HEAT)

Table 2 -- Scrolling Marquee Mode and Menu Display Structure

TEMPERATURES

Air

Temperatures

(AIR.T)

Refrigerant

Temperatures

(REF.T)

INPUTS OUTPUTS CONFIGURATIONPRESSURES SETPOINTS

General

Inputs

(GEN.I)

Current

Sensor Inputs

(CS£IN)

Air Quality

Inputs

(AIR.Q)

Fan

Outputs

(FANS)

Cool

Outputs

(CqOL)

Heat

Outputs

(HEAT)

Economize

r

Outputs

(ECgN)

Alarm

Relay

(ALRM)

Display

Configuration

(DISP)

Unit

Configuration

(UNIT)

Cooling

Configuration

(CqOLl

Heating

Configuration

(HEAT)

Economizer

Configuration

(ECpN/

Air Quality

Cfg.

(AI Q

Alarm*Relay

Config.

(ALM.O/

PID

Configuration

(PID)

Sensor

Calibration

(TRIM)

C(_N

Configuration

(CCN/

TIME

CLOCK

Time of Day

(TIME)

Month, Date

Day and

Year

(DATE)

Daylight

Savings

Time

(DST)

Local Time

Schedule

(SCH.L)

I_al

Holiday

Schedules

(HOE.L)

OPERATIN

G

MODES

Control

Modes

(MODE)

Cool Mode

Diagnostic

(COOL)

Heat }vlode

Diagnostic

(HEAT)

Economizer

Diagnostic

(ECON)

Demand

Listing

(DMD.L)

ALARMS

Reset All

Current

Alarms

(R.C_YRR)

Re*set

Alarm

History

(R.HIST)

Currently

Active

Alarms

(CURR)

Alarm

History

(HIST)

/1

NAVIGATE/_

EXIT \

\

Gj--

SCROLL _ PAGE

\ D N

Fig. 3 - System Pilot _User Interface

--MODIFY/

SELECT

(06322

Force Hierarchy

There is a hierarchy in CCN with regards to forcing a point.

Programs and devices write a force at different priority levels. A

higher level (smaller number, 1 being the highest) will override a

lower level force. The Scrolling Marquee uses a Control Force at

level 7. The Navigator writes a Service Force which is level 3.

System Pilots and Touch Pilots write Supervisor Forces at level 4.

Network programs can be set to write different level priority forces.

Generic Status Display Table

The GENERIC points table allows the service/installer the ability

to create a custom table in which up to 20 points from the 5 CCN

categories (Points, Config, Service-Config, Set Point, and

Maintenance) may be collected and displayed.

In the Service-Config table section, there is a table named

"GENERICS." This table contains placeholders for up to 20 CCN

point names and allows the user to decide which points are

displayed in the GENERIC points sub-table under the status

display table. Each one of these placeholders allows the input of an

8-character ASCII string. Using a CCN interface, enter the Edit

mode for the Service-Config table "GENERICS" and enter the

CCN name for each point to be displayed in the custom points

table in the order they will be displayed. When done entering point

names, download the table to the rooftop unit control.

IMPORTANT: The computer system software (ComfortVIEW'_,

Service Tool, etc.) that is used to interact with CCN controls,

always saves a template of items it considers as static (e.g., limits,

units, forcibility, 24-character text strings, and point names) after

the software uploads the tables from a control. Thereafter, the

software is only concerned with run time data like value and

hardware/force status. With this in mind, it is important that any

time a change is made to the Service-Config table "GENERICS"

(which in turn changes the points contained in the GENERIC point

table), that a complete new upload be performed. This requires that

any previous table database be completely removed first. Failure to

do this will not allow the user to display the new points that have

been created and the CCN interface will have a different table

database than the unit control.

Conventions Used in This Manual

The following conventions for discussing configuration points for

the local display (Scrolling Marquee or Navigator T, accessory) will

be used in this manual.

Point names will be written with the Mode name first, then any

submodes, then the point name, each separated by an arrow symbol

(-+). Names will also be shown in bold and italics. As an example,

the Fan Status Switch which is located in the Configuration mode,

and Unit sub-mode would be written as Configuration---,

UNIT-+ FN.S W.

This path name will show the user how to navigate through the

local display to reach the desired configuration. The user would

scroll through the modes and sub-modes using the up and down

keys. The arrow symbol in the path name represents pressing

ENTER to move into the next level of the menu structure.

When a value is included as part of the path name, it will be shown

at the end of the path name after an equals sign. If the value

represents a configuration setting, an explanation will be shown in

parenthesis after the value. As an example,

Configuration-_UNIT-_FN.SW =1(Normal Open).

Pressing the ESCAPE and ENTER keys sinmltaneously will scroll

an expanded text description of the point name across the display.

The expanded description is shown in the local display tables but

will not be shown with the path names in text,

The CCN point names are also referenced in the local display

tables for users configuring the unit with CCN software instead of

the local display, See Appendix A of this manual.

START-UP

IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to start unit, even momentarily,

until all items on the Start-Up Checklist (last page) and the

following steps have been completed.

Unit Preparation

Check that unit has been installed in accordance with these

installation instructions and all applicable codes.

Compressor Mounting

Compressors are internally spring mounted. Do not loosen or

remove compressor holddown bolts.

Refrigerant Service Ports

Each independent refrigerant system has a total of 3Schrader-type

service gauge ports per circuit. One port is located on the suction

line, one on the compressor discharge line, and one on the liquid

line, Be sure that caps on the ports are tight,

Crankcase Heater(s)

Compressor crankcase heater operation varies depending on the

unit size and type. In general for all units, the crankcase heaters are

energized if there is power to the unit, the compressor is not

operating, and the ambient temperature is below 75 °F.

IMPORTANT: Unit power must be on for 24 hours prior to

start-up. Otherwise, damage to compressor may result.

Compressor Rotation

[]NIT DAMAGE HAZARD

Failure to follow this caution may result in unit damage.

Improper wiring will cause compressor stoppage and alarm.

Correct wiring by switching leads as indicated below.

ELECTRICAL

OPTIONS PANEL

\"\

CONTROL BOX

AND

COMPRESSOR

\\\\\\\\\\

INDOOR MOTOR

ACCESS DOOR

f

J

OUTDOOR AIR

SCREEN

(HIDDEN)

\\ \\\

CONDENSER COIL

ACCESS PANEL

/

/

BASEPAN CONNECTIONS

ACCESS PANEL

FILTER ACCESS DOOR

Fig. 4 - Panel and Filter Locations

GAS SECTION

ACCESS

C07002

On 3-phase units, it is important to be certain the compressors are

rotating in the proper direction. To determine whether or not

compressors are rotating in the proper direction, use a

phase-rotation meter on the unit input power to check for

LI-L2-L3 or clockwise rotation or use the Service Test mode to

energize a compressor. If the compressor is rotating in the wrong

direction, the controls will stop the compressor and display alarm

for "Circuit A Failure to Pressurize."

IMPORTANT: Indoor or outdoor fan rotation direction may not

indicate proper input power phase sequence, as some 3-phase units

use single-phase fan motors.

To correct the wrong compressor rotation direction, perform the

following procedure:

1. Turn off power to the unit and lock out the power.

2. Switch any two of the incoming unit power leads.

3. Turn on power to the unit.

4. Verify corrected compressor rotation.

Power Supply

All 208/230-v units are factory wired for 230-v power supply. If

the 208/230-v unit is to be connected to a 208-v power supply, the

transformers (TRAN1 and TRAN2) must be rewired by moving

the wire from the 230-volt connection and moving to the 200-volt

terminal on the primary side of the transformer. Refer to unit label

diagram for additional information.

Internal Wiring

Check all electrical connections in unit control boxes; tighten as

required.

Evaporator Fan

Fan belt and variable pulleys are factory-installed, but may need to

be adjusted for specific applications. Be sure that the fans rotate in

the proper direction. See Appendix C for unit specific fan

performance data. See Appendix D for unit specific air quality

limits, evaporator fan motor specifications, FIOP static pressures,

and fan RPM for various motor pulley settings. Appendix C and D

are based on 100% fan speed (VFD at 60Hz). To alter fan

performance, see Evaporator Fan Performance Adjustment in the

Service section.

The Supply Fan Minimum Speed

(Configuration-+UNIT--,FSd_N) and the Supply Fan Maximum

Speed (Configuration-+UNIT-+FSd_X) can also be used to alter

fan performance. The fan should run at the maximum fan speed

when setting up the application design point. The unit is equipped

with a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD). The VFD's settings

should not be used for adjusting fan performance. Specific VFD

information can be found in Appendix B.

IMPORTANT: When setting up and starting the unit, the heating

minimum CFM requirements must be upheld when changing belts,

pulleys, and configurations. During heating mode, the fan speed is

always set to Supply Fan Maximum Speed (FS.MX).

Condenser Fans and Motors

Condenser fans and motors are factory set. Refer to Condenser-Fan

Adjustment section as required.

Return-Air Filters

Check that correct filters are installed in filter tracks (see Physical

Data table in Installation Instructions). Do not operate unit without

return-air filters.

IMPORTANT: For units with 4-in. filter option, units are shipped

with standard 2-in. filters. To install 4-in. filters, the filter spacers

must be removed.

Outdoor-Air Inlet Screens

Outdoor-air inlet screens must be in place before operating unit.

Accessory Installation

Check to make sure that all accessories including sensors have

been installed and wired as required by the instructions and unit

wiring diagrams.

Orifice Change (48PD Only)

This unit is factory assembled for heating operation using natural

gas at an elevation from sea level to 2000 ft.

Use accessory high altitude kit when installing this unit at an

elevation of 2000 to 7000 ft. For elevations above 7000 ft, refer to

High Altitude section to identify the correct orifice size for the

elevation. Purchase these orifices from your local Carrier dealer.

Follow instructions in accessory Installation Instructions to install

the correct orifices.

Use accessory LP (liquid propane) gas conversion kit when

converting this unit for use with LP fuel usage for elevations up

to 7000 ft. For elevations above 7000 ft, refer to High Altitude

section to identify the correct orifice size for the elevation.

Purchase these orifices from your local Carrier dealer. Follow

instructions in accessory Installation Instructions to install the

correct orifices.

Gas Heat (48PD Only)

Verify gas pressures before turning on heat as follows:

1. Turn off field-supplied manual gas stop, located external to

unit.

2. Connect pressure gauge to supply gas t@, located on

field-supplied manual shutoff valve. (See F ig. 5.)

3. Connect pressure gauge to manifold pressure t@.

4. Turn on field-supplied manual gas stop. Enter Service Test

mode by setting Serrice Test-_TEST to "ON" using the

Scrolling Marquee display. Use the Service Test feature to

set Serriee Test_HEAT_HT.1 to ON (first stage of heat)

using the Scrolling Marquee.

GAS

SUPPLY

UNION

Fig. 5 -Field Gas Piping

C06323

5. After the unit has run for several nfinutes, verify the supply

gas pressure is between 5.5-in. wg to 13.0-in. wg, and the

manifold pressure is 3.50-in. wg on sizes 03-14 and 3.00

on size 16. If manifold pressure must be adjusted, refer to

Gas Valve Adjustment section.

IMPORTANT: Supply gas pressure must not exceed 13.0-in. wg.

6. Set Service Test-+HEAT-+HT.1 to OFF using Scrolling

Marquee,

7. Exit Service Test mode by setting Selwice Test-+TEST to

"OFF" using the Scrolling Marquee,

CONTROLS QUICK SET-UP

The following information will provide a quick guide to setting up

and configuring the 48/50PD series units with ComfortLink T'_

controls. Unit controls are pre-configured at the factory for

factory-installed options. Field-installed accessories will require

configuration at start-up. Service Test is recommended for initial

start-up. Additionally, specific job requirements may require

changes to default configuration values. See the CCN and Display

parameter tables and other sections of these instructions for more

details.

Control Set Point and Configuration Log

During start up, accessory installation, and equipment service set

points and/or configuration changes might have to be made. When

setting set points or changing configuration settings,

documentation is recommended. The Control Log starting on page

106 should be filled out and left with the unit at all times. A copy

should also be provided to the equipment owner.

Standard Unit Control

There are two different applications these units can be applied to,

Displacement Ventilation and Single Zone VAV. For either

application a direct wired space sensor can be used or a

conmmnicating sensor/thermostat can be used. Installation of an

accessory supply air temperature (SAT) sensor in the supply duct is

recommended when using a communication type control. A supply

duct SAT measurement is valid for heating mode display, while the

factory-standard internal SAT is not valid for heating due to its

location upstream of the heating section. When installing the

supply duct SAT, the heating mode display is enabled by setting

Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAT.H to ENBL.

There are several configurations that should be considered for

Displacement Ventilation or Single Zone VAV applications. Table

3 shows these configuration defaults and specific application

settings. These settings typical values and should be adjusted for

each actual specific unit application. Refer to the Operation section

for more detail on these configurations and how they effect the

units operation.

IMPORTANT: Multiple zoning application is not recommended

at this time with the PD product.

Space Temperature Sensor Control--Direct Wired

(T-55, T-56, or T-59)

Wire accessory space temperature sensor(s) to the T-55 terminals

on the field connection terminal board located at the unit control

box. No configuration is required when installing a T-55, T-56, or

T-59. Refer to Field-Installed Accessories section for additional

information.

T-58 Communicating Thermostat

Install the T-58 communicating thermostat. Connect the CCN

communication bus from the T-58 to the CCN terminals on the

field connection terminal board located at the unit control box.

Configure the unit's CCN communication element number, bus

number, and baud rate. Configure the T-58's CCN communication

bus number and baud rate the same as the unit, while the element

number has to be different. Configure the T-58 to send SPT to the

unit's element number. Refer to the Field-Installed Accessories

section for additional information.

Table31 Application Specific Configurations

DISPLACEMENT SINGLE ZONE

ITEM EXPANSION DEFAULT UNITS VENTILATION VAV

SASP Cool Supply Air Setpoint 65 dF 65 55

FS.MX Supply Fan Maximum Speed 100 % 100 100

FS.MN Supply Fan Maximum Speed 20 % 20 70

FS.VM Vent Mode Fan Speed 50 ^ F 50 50

M IN.C M in Corn pressor Capacity 70 % 15 70

FS.CD Fan Speed Control Demand 3 ^F 3 3

SA.MU SASP Maximum Reset Up 10 ^F 3 5

SA.MD SASP Maximum Reset Down -10 ^F -3 -5

MRMX Econ Min at Max Fanspeed 30 % 30 30

PE1 .C Power Exhaust Stage 1 CFM 600 cfm 600 600

IDF.C Indoor Fan Max Speed CFM 1600 (05) cfm 1600 (05) 1600 (05)

2000 (06) 2000 (06) 2000 (06)

System Pilot -Communication Space Sensor

Install the System Pilot and connect the CCN communication bus

from it to the units CCN connection on the low voltage terminal

board. Configure the unit's CCN communication element number,

bus number, and baud rate. Refer to the System Pilot's installation

instructions for configuring it to be used as a space temperature and

attaching it to a unit.

gen III TEMP Monitor - Linkage Communication

Thermostat (33CSTMT-01)

Install the linkage thermostat. Connect the CCN communication

bus from the Stat to the CCN terminals on the field connection

terminal board located at the unit control box. Configure the unit's

CCN communication element number, bus number, and baud rate.

Refer to the Linkage Thermostat's installation instructions for

configuring the Stat and additional information about it.

Space Humidistat Control

The humidistat input is provided on the field connection terminal

board. The Space Humidity Switch configuration,

Configuration--,UNIT--,RH.SW, identifies the normally open or

normally closed status of this input at LOW humidity. Humidistat

1 terminal is the 24 VAC source for dry contact and the Humidistat

2 terminal is the signal input.

Relative Humidity Sensor Control

For units with the economizer option (with the ECB-economizer

control board), the humidity sensor input is provided on the field

connection terminal board. The sensor can be used in addition to

or instead of a humidistat. The RH Sensor on OAQ Input

configuration, Configuration-+UNIT-+RH.S=YES, identifies that

the sensor is being used instead of an OAQ sensor. Terminal 1 is

the 24vdc loop power and Terminal 4 is the 4-20 mA signal input.

Refer to the Field Installed Accessories for more information.

CCN Communication

Configure Configuration--,CCN--,CCN,4 to desired element

number (Default is 1). Configure Configuration-->CCN--> CCN.B

to desired bus number (Default is 0). Configure

Configuration--+CCN--+BAUD to desired code number for baud

rate (Default is 3 = 9600 baud).

Accessories

Below are quick configuration settings for field installed

accessories. If these accessories were installed by the factory, they

will already be configured. See the Field-Installed Accessories

section, third party control, control connection tables, and CCN or

Display parameter tables for any accessories not mentioned below

and any additional information on accessories.

Economizer

If an Economizer accessory was field installed, the unit must be

configured for it by setting Configuration-->ECON-->EC.EN to

YES. The default settings for the other economizer configurations

should be satisfactory. If they need to be changed, additional

information about these configuration settings can be found in the

Economizer section.

Power Exhaust

If a Power Exhaust accessory was field installed, the unit must be

configured for it by setting Configuration-->ECON-->PE,EN to

ENBL. The default settings for the other power exhaust

configurations should be satisfactory. If they need to be changed,

additional information about these configurations can be found in

the Power Exhaust section.

Electric Heat

If an Electric Heat accessory was field installed, the unit must be

configured for it by setting Configuration--,HEAT--,HT.TY to a

value of 2. The number of electric heat stages must be configured

by setting Configuration--,HEAT--,NJtTR per the installed

heater.

Fire Shutdown

If a Fire Shutdown or Smoke Detector accessory was field

installed, the unit must be configured for it by setting

Configuration--,UNIT--,FS.SW to normally open (1) or normally

closed (2) when there is not afire alarm. Normally open (1) is the

preferred configuration.

IMPORTANT: On standard units, the fire shutdown input is the

terminals Fire Shutdown 1 and 2.

Outdoor Enthalpv

If an Outdoor Enthalpy accessory was field installed, the unit must

be configured for it by setting Configuration--,ECON--,EN.SW,

identifies the normally open or normally closed status of this input

when the outdoor enthalpy is low.

IAQ Switch

If an IAQ Switch accessory was field installed, the unit must be

configured for it by setting Configuration--,AIR.Q--,II.CF,

identifies the normally open or normally closed status of this input

when the indoor air quality value is low (good) and also selects the

unit response to this input.

IMPORTANT: An IAQ switch cannot be used if an enthalpy

switch is already on this input.

IAQ Sensor

If an CO 2 Sensor accessory was field installed, the unit must be

configured for it by setting Configuration-+AIR.Q-+IA.CF

selects the unit response to this input. Default conversion to 0 to

2000 ppm.

OAQ Sensor

If an Outdoor Air Quality Sensor accessory was field installed, the

unit must be configured for it by setting Configuration-+AIR.Q

--,OA.CF selects the unit response to this input. Default

conversion to 0 to 2000 ppm.

Fan Status

If a Fan Status accessory was field installed, the unit must be

configured for it by setting Configuration---_UNIT---_FN.SW to

normally open (1) or normally closed (2). Normally open (1) is the

preferred configuration.

IMPORTANT: Fan Status input is not on the ternfinals marked

Fan Status.

Filter Status

If a Filter Status accessory was field installed, the unit must be

configured for it by setting Configuration--_UNIT--_FL.SW to

normally open (1) or normally closed (2). Nom_ally open (1) is the

preferred configuration.

DISPLAY

MENU

TIMECLOCK

SCH.L

SUBr-] r-]SUB

MODE

PER.1

Table 4 -- Setting an Occupied Time Schedule -Weekdays Only for 7:30 to 22:30

KEYPAD ITEM DISPLAY

ENTRY

ENTER

ENTER OCC.1

ENTER 00.00

ENTER 00.00

•07.00

ENTER 07.00

• 07.30

ENTER 07.30

ESCAPE OCC.1 07.30

• UNC.1 00.00

ENTER 00.00

ENTER 00.00

• 22.00

ENTER 22.00

• 22.30

ENTER 22.30

ESCAPE UNC.1 22.30

• MON.1 NO

ENTER NO

• YES

ENTER YES

ESCAPE MON.1 YES

• TUE.1 NO

ENTER NO

• YES

ENTER YES

ESCAPE TUE.1 YES

• WED.1 NO

ENTER NO

• YES

ENTER YES

ESCAPE WED.1 YES

• THU.1 NO

ENTER NO

• YES

ENTER YES

ESCAPE THU.1 YES

• FRI.1 NO

ENTER NO

• YES

ENTER YES

ESCAPE FRI.1 YES

ESCAPE

ESCAPE

ITEM EXPANSION

Local Occupancy Schedule

Period Occupied Time

Period Occupied Time

Period Unoccupied Time

Period Unoccupied Time

Monday In Period

Monday In Period

Tuesday In Period

Tuesday In Period

Wednesday In Period

Wednesday In Period

Thursday In Period

Thursday In Period

Friday In Period

Friday In Period

COMMENT

Scrolling stops

Hours Flash

Select 7

Change accepted, minutes flash

Select 30

Change accepted

Item/Value/Units scrolls again

Scrolling stops

Hours Flash

Select 22

Change accepted, minutes flash

Select 30

Change accepted

Item/Value/Units scrolls again

Scrolling stops

Select YES

Change accepted

Item/Value/Units scrolls again

Scrolling stops

Select YES

Change accepted

Item/Value/Units scrolls again

Scrolling stops

Select YES

Change accepted

Item/Value/Units scrolls again

Scrolling stops

Select YES

Change accepted

Item/Value/Units scrolls again

Scrolling stops

Select YES

Change accepted

Item/Value/Units scrolls again

Programming Operating Schedules

The ComfortLink _ controls will accommodate up to eight

different schedules (Periods 1 through 8), and each schedule is

assigned to the desired days of the week. Each schedule includes

an occupied on and off time. As an example, to set an occupied

schedule for 8 AM to 5 PM for Monday through Friday, the user

would set days Monday through Friday to ON for Period 1. Then

the user would configure the Period 1 Occupied From point to

08:00 and the Period 1 Occupied To point to 17:00. To create a

different weekend schedule, the user would use Period 2 and set

days Saturday and Sunday to ON with the desired Occupied On

and Off times.

IMPORTANT: By default, the time schedule periods are

programmed for 24 hours of occupied operation.

To create a schedule, perform the following procedure:

1. Scroll to the Configuration mode, and select CCN

CONFIGURATION (CCN). Scroll down to the Schedule

Number (Configuration--,CCN--,SCH.O=SCH_. If

password protection has been enabled, the user will be

prompted to enter the password before any new data is

accepted. SCH_ has arange of 0 to 99. The default value

is 1. A value of 0 is always occupied, and the unit will

control to its occupied set points. A value of 1 means the

unit will follow a local schedule, and a value of 65 to 99

means it will follow a CCN schedule. Schedules 2-64 are

not used as the control only supports one internal/local

schedule. If one of the 2-64 schedules is configured, then

the control will force the number back to 1. Make sure the

value is set to 1 to use a local schedule.

2. Enter the Time Clock mode. Scroll down to the LOCAL

TIME SCHEDULE (SCH.L) sub-mode, and press

ENTER. Period 1 (PER.l) will be displayed.

3. Scroll down to the MON.I point. This point indicates if

schedule 1 applies to Monday. Use the ENTER command

to go into Edit mode, and use the Up or Down key to

change the display to YES or NO. Scroll down through the

rest of the days and apply schedule 1 where desired. The

schedule can also be applied to a holiday.

4. Configure the beginning of the occupied time period for

Period 1 (OCC). Press ENTER to go into Edit mode, and

the first two digits of the 00.00 will start flashing. Use the

Up or Down key to display the correct value for hours, in

24-hour (military) time. Press ENTER and hour value is

saved and the minutes digits will start flashing. Use the

same procedure to display and save the desired minutes

value.

5. Configure the unoccupied time for period 1 (UNC). Press

ENTER to go into Edit mode, and the first two digits of the

00.00 will start flashing. Use the Up or Down key to display

the correct value for hours, in 24-hour (military) time. Press

ENTER and hour value is saved and the minutes digits will

start flashing. Use the same procedure to display and save

the desired minutes value.

6. The first schedule is now complete. If a second schedule is

needed, such as for weekends or holidays, scroll down and

repeat the entire procedure for period 2 (PER.2). If

additional schedules are needed, repeat the process for as

many as are needed. Eight schedules are provided. See

Table 4 for an example of setting the schedule.

SERVICE TEST

The Service Test function can be used to verify proper operation of

compressors, heating stages, indoor fan, outdoor fans, power

exhaust fans, economizer, crankcase heaters, and the alarm relay.

Use of Service Test is recommended at initial system start up and

during troubleshooting (See Table 5 for point details).

Service Test mode has the following changes from normal

operation:

• Outdoor air temperature limits for cooling circuits, economizer,

and heating are ignored. Normal compressor time guards and

other staging delays are reduced to 30 seconds or less.

• Circuit alerts are limited to 1 strike (versus 3) before changing to

alarm shut down state.

• The status of ALM.N is ignored so all alerts and alarms are

broadcast on CCN.

• The words "SERVICE TEST" are inserted into every alarm

message.

Service test can only be turned ON/OFF at the unit display. Once

turned ON, other entries may be made with the display or through

CCN. To turn Service Test on, change the value of TEST to ON.

To turn service test off, change the value of TEST to OFF.

IMPORTANT: Service Test mode may be password protected.

Refer to Basic Control Usage section for more information.

Depending on the unit model, factory-installed options, and

field-installed accessories, some of the Service Test functions may

not apply.

Independent Outputs

The independent (INDP) submenu is used to change output status

for the economizer, power exhaust stages, crankcase heaters, and

the alarm relay. These independent outputs can operate

simultaneously with other Service Test modes. All outputs return to

normal operation when Service Test is turned off. When the

economizer is using the factory default Digital Control Type

(Configuration---,ECON---,E.CTL is 1 or 2) then the Economizer

Calibration feature may be used to automatically check and reset

the economizer actuator range of motion. Refer to the economizer

operation section of more details.

IMPORTANT: If a network force is applied to CCN points:

ECONOCMD, PE_I, PE_2, or ALMOUT, their respective test

mode functions will not be usable. Those forces are at a higher

level than test mode; therefore they will still be honored when in

test mode.

Fan Test

The fans (FANS) submenu is used to change output status for the

indoor fan and outdoor fan stages. The VFD power can be turned

on and off via IDF (Supply VFD Power Test). The indoor fan

speed test (F.SPD) runs the fan at the desired speed entered. The

outdoor fan relay test (OFC.I) only tests the relay for switching

between high and low speeds. The actual outdoor fan will not run

unless cool test is on. The cooling (COOL) and heating (HEAT)

service test outputs are reset to OFF for the fans service test.

10

Cooling Test

The cooling (COOL) submenu is used to change output status for

testing the cooling function. The fans (FANS) and heating (HEAT)

service test outputs are reset to OFF for the cooling service test.

The digital scroll controller power test (CTLR) turns on and off the

compressor controller. The compressor capacity test (CPAC) is

used to run the compressor at a desired capacity of 15% to 100%.

If a capacity is chosen between 1 and 14, the capacity will be set to

15%. The outdoor fan will turn on to high speed when the

compressor capacity is 15% or greater. The indoor fan speed will

default to supply fan maximum speed (FS.MX) when the

compressor capacity test is first activated. The cool test fan speed

(F.SPD) is used to change the fan speed while the compressor is

running. All normal cooling alarms and alerts are functional.

IMPORTANT: When charging the unit, both the compressor

capacity test and the cool test fan speed should be set to 100%.

Heating Test

The heating (HEAT) submenu is used to change output status for

the individual heat stages, gas or electric. The fans (FANS) and

cooling (COOL) service test outputs are reset to OFF for the

heating service test. Indoor and outdoor fans are controlled

normally to maintain proper unit operation. The indoor fan speed

will run at the configured max speed FS.MX. All normal heating

alarms and alerts are functional.

Table 5-- Service Test Modes and Submodes Directory

DISPLAY MENU/

SUB-MENU/ EXPANDED NAME VALUES

NAME

SERVICE TEST

TEST Field Service Test Mode On/Off

INDP Test Independent Outputs

ECON Economizer Position Test 0 to 100%

E. CAL Calibrate Economizer On/Off

PE.1 Power Exhaust 1 Test On/Off

PE.2 Power Exhaust 2 Test On/Off

ALRM Alarm Relay Test On/Off

CCH Crankcase Heat Test On/Off

FANS SITPPLY Test Fans

IDF VFD Power Test On/Off

F.SPD Indoor Fan Speed Test 0 to 100%

OFC.1 Outdoor Fan Relay Test On/Off

COOL Test Cooling

CTLR Dig Scroll Ctrl Pwr Test On/Off

CAPC Compressor Capacity Test 0 to 100%

F.SPD Cool Test Fan Speed 0 to 100%

HEAT Test Heating

HT.1 Heat Stage 1 Test On/Off

HT.2 Heat Stage 2 Test On/Off

THIRD PARTY CONTROL

Third party controls may interface with the unit ComfortLink TM

controls through the connections described below. See other

sections of these instructions for more information on the related

unit control and configurations.

Remote Occupancy

The remote occupancy input is provided on the field connection

terminal board (TB1). The Remote Occupancy Switch

configuration, Configuration--,UNIT--,RM.SW, identifies the

normally open or normally closed status of this input when

unoccupied.

• 5 = 24 VAC signal input

• 6 = 24 VAC source for dry contact

Fire Shutdown

The fire shutdown input is provided for unit shutdown in response

to a fire alarm or smoke detector. The Fire Shutdown Switch

configuration, Configuration--,UNIT--,FS.SW, identifies the

normally open or normally closed status of this input when there is

no fire alarm.

Input at field connection terminal board (TBI)

• Fire Shutdown 1 = 24 VAC source for dry contact

• Fire Shutdown 2 = 24 VAC signal input

Alarm Output

The alarm output is provided on the field connection terminal

board (TBI) to indicate a current alarm status. The output will be

24VAC if a current alarm exists.

• C = 24 VAC common

• X = 24 VAC signal output

Economizer Monitoring

On field terminal board (TBI), terminals 8, 9, and 10 can be used

to monitor economizer position from a third party control system.

See economizer operation section for additional information.

In digital mode (E.CTL = 1 or 2), the economizer commanded

position can be read as a 2-10v or 4-20mA signal. TBI-8 and

TBI-9 are used as follows:

• To read a 2-10v signal, disconnect the violet wire on

TBI-J10-8 and place volt meter device across TBI-8 and

TBI-9.

• To read a 4-20mA signal, disconnect the violet wire on

TBI-JI0-8 and the 50092 resister at TBI-J10-6. Place amp

meter device between TBI-8 and TBI-9.

In analog mode (E.CTL =3), the economizer position can be read

as a 2-10v feedback signal across TBI-10 and TB1-9 at any time.

IMPORTANT: The violet wire and 50092 resister must be

connected at the J10 connector as originally wired to operate the

economizer in analog mode.

Economizer Damper Control

For units with the economizer option or accessory and the ECB

control board, the damper position can be directly controlled

through the IAQ sensor input provided on the field connection

terminal board. The IAQ Analog Input configuration,

Configuration--,AIR.Q--,IA.CF will have to set to 3 (Control

Minimum Position). When IA.CF = 3, an external 4 to 20 mA

source is used to move the damper 0% to 100% directly.

Terminal 2 = 4-20mA + signal

Terminal 3 = 4-20mA -common

IMPORTANT: In this mode preset minimum positions

configurations are not valid. The damper position may exceed the

input position to provide economizer cooling and CO2 sensor input

can not be used for DCV control. Refer to the Indoor Air Quality

operation section for more information.

CONTROLS OPERATION

Display Configuration

The Configuration--,DISP submenu is used to configure the local

display settings.

Metric Display (METR)

This variable is used to change the display from English units to

Metric units.

Language Selection (LANG)

This variable is used to change the language of the ComfortLink

display. At this time, only English is available.

11

Password Enable (PROT)

This variable enables or disables the use of a password. The

password is used to restrict use of the control to change

configurations.

Service Password (PSWD)

This variable is the 4-digit numeric password that is required if

enabled.

Test Display LEDs (TEST)

This is used to test the operation of the ComfortLink "_ display.

Modes

The ComfortLink controls operate under a hierarchy of command

structure as defined by four main elements: the System Mode, the

HVAC Mode, the Occupied status, and the Unit Control Type.

The System Mode is the top level that defines three main states of

the control system: Disabled, Enabled, or Test.

The HVAC Mode is the next level that defines four main states of

functional operation: Disabled, Fan Only, Cool, and Heat.

The Occupied status affects set points for cooling and heating in

Space Sensor control mode and operation of the economizer for

indoor air quality ventilation and free cooling.

The general operating mode of the control and the status of some

related operation lockouts are located on the display at two

locations: Run Status--, MODE and Operating Modes'--, MODE.

System Mode (SYS)

In Run Status and Operating Modes, the current system mode is

displayed with expandable text. This is an overall state of the unit.

Three states are: Unit Operation Disabled, Unit Operation Enabled,

or Service Test Enabled.

HVAC Mode (HVAC)

In Run Status and Operating Modes, the current allowed HVAC

mode is displayed with expandable text. This is the mode the unit

decides to run in based on its inputs. There are four main HVAC

modes; cooling has three different expanded texts, These modes

are shown below,

HVAC Expanded Text Brief Description

Mode

Disabled HVAC Operation Unit is in test mode or System mode is

Disabled disabled

Fan Only Ventilation Fan may run for ventilation

(fan-only)

Cooling Cooling Mechanical cooling

Free Cooling Only economizer used for cooling

Unoccupied Free Only economizer use for cooling

Cooling (occupied cooling set point active)

Heating Heating Heating mode

Remote HVAC Mode Disabled (HV.DN)

Allow disabling of HVAC mode. This is only available on a

network connection.

Cool Setpoint in Effect (EFF.C)

This shows the actual setpoint that is being used for control during

cooling mode.

Heat Setpoint in Effect (EFF.H)

This shows the actual setpoint that is being used for control during

heating mode.

Currently Occupied (OCC)

Displays the current state of assumed space occupancy based on

unit configuration and inputs.

Timed Override in Effect (T.OVR)

Displays if the state of occupancy is currently occupied due to an

override.

Linkage Active (LINK)

Displays if Linkage communication is established between the unit

and a Linkage source.

IMPORTANT: The 48/50PD unit only supports the Gen III

TEMP Monitor Thermostat.

Demand Limit in Effect (D.LMT)

Displays if ademand limit has been placed on the unit's capacity.

Circuit OAT Lockout (C.LOC)

Displays if one or more refrigerant circuits operation is prevented

due to outdoor temperature limit lockout.

Heat OAT Lockout (H.LOC)

Displays if heating operation is prevented due to outdoor

temperature limit lockout.

Econo Cool OAT Lockout (E.LOC)

Displays if economizer operation for cooling is prevented due to

outdoor temperature limit lockout.

Unit Configuration

Many configurations that indicate what factory options and/or field

accessories are installed and other common operation variables are

included in Unit Configuration (Configuration--_UNIT).

Configuration will be done at the factory for any factory-installed

option (FIOP).

Start-Up Delay (S.DLY)

This configuration sets the control start-up delay after the power is

interrupted. This can be used to stagger the start-up of multiple

units.

Fan On When Occupied (OC.FN)

A YES value will operate the indoor fan whenever the unit is in the

Occupied mode. A NO value will operate the indoor fan only when

heating or cooling is necessary. The factory default value is YES.

Shut Down on IDF Failure (IDF.F)

This configuration @plies only if a fan switch is installed and

configured. A YES value will enable diagnostic Alert T409 to shut

down the unit when incorrect fan status is sensed. A NO value will

still permit Alert T409 but will not cause unit shutdown. The

factory default value is YES.

Supply Fan Maximum Speed (FS.MX)

This configuration sets the limit for the highest speed the fan can

run out of 100%. This max speed limit @plies to the unit at all

times except for fan test.

Supply Fan Minimum Speed (FS.MN)

This configuration sets the limit for the lowest speed the fan can

run out of 100%. This minimum speed limit applies to the unit

during cooling mode and cooling test.

Vent Mode Fan Speed (FS.VM)

This configuration sets the speed the fan will run during the

ventilation mode. The fan speed does not vary during ventilation

so it will remain at this speed throughout vent mode.

Fan Status Switch (FN.SW)

This configuration identifies if a fan status switch is installed, and

what status (normally open, normally closed) the input is when the

indoor fan is OFF.

Filter Status Switch (FL.SW)

This configuration identifies if a filter status switch is installed, and

what status (normally open, normally closed) the input is when the

filter is CLEAN.

Fire Shutdown Switch (FS.SW)

This configuration identifies if a fire shutdown switch is installed,

and what status (normally open, normally closed) the input is when

the fire or smoke alarm is OFF (no alarm).

Remote Occupancy Switch (RM.SW)

This configuration identifies if aremote occupancy switch is

installed, and what status (normally open, normally closed) the

input is when UNOCCUPIED.

12

RH Sensor On OAQ Input (RH.S)

This configuration identifies if a space relative humidity sensor is

installed on the outdoor air quality (OAQ) input. A YES value

enables SP.RH display, A NO value disables SP, RH display and

use.

Space Humidity Switch (RH.SW)

This configuration identifies if a space relative humidity switch is

installed on the ENTHALPY input, and what status (normally

open, normally closed) the input is when the space humidity is

LOW.

Temperature Compensated Start Cooling Factor

This factor is used in the equation of the Temperature

Compensated Start Time Bias for cooling. A setting of 0 minutes

indicates Temperature Compensated Start in Cooling is not

permitted.

Temperature Compensated Start Heating Factor

This factor is used in the equation of the Temperature

Compensated Start Time Bias for heating. Asetting of 0 minutes

indicates Temperature Compensated Start in Heating is not

permitted.

General Operating Sequence

The PD unit must be connected to a space temperature sensor

T-55, T-56, T58 or T59 and will not operate with a conventional

R, YI, Y2, WI, W2, G, C thermostat. When a T-55, T-56, T58 or

T59 space temperature sensor is connected to the low voltage

terminal board as shown in the Installation Instructions Manual, the

PD unit will try to maintain the Space Temperature

(Temperatures-+AIR.T-+SPT) at one of four set points: The

Occupied Cool Set Point (Setpoints-+OCSP), the Unoccupied

Cool Set Point (Setpoints--,UCSP), Occupied Heat Set Point

(Setpoints--,OHSP), or the Unoccupied Heat Set Point

(S etpoints-+ UHSP).

Occupancy Determination

When the building is in occupied mode, the occupied set points are

active. When the building is in unoccupied mode, the unoccupied

set points are active. The PD control will switch automatically

between cooling and heating to maintain temperature. However, to

minimize unnecessary cool to heat and heat to cool changes, there

is a 10-minute delay after the last stage turns off before the control

will switch modes. The heating and cooling set points are also

separated by a Heat-Cool Set Point Gap (Setpoints-,GAP) that is

user configurable from 2 to 10 degrees F. This parameter prevents

the unit from over cooling the conditioned space to where heating

mode is required or over heating the conditioned space to where

cooling mode is required.

The T55 space temperature sensor senses the temperature in the

conditioned space with no provisions for adjusting the space

temperature set point at the sensor. The T-56 space temperature

sensor senses the temperature in the conditioned space and allows

for adjustment of the space temperature set point by a configurable

number of degrees F higher or a configurable number of degrees F

lower at the space temperature sensor. The T58 space temperature

sensor communicates with the PD unit control board through a

CCN RS-485 +, -, and ground connection. The T59 space

temperature sensor is a T56 sensor with an integrated temperature

display. A jumper wire is not needed between R and WI when

using space temperature sensors T55, T56, T58 or T59.

The building's occupancy is affected by a number of different

factors. When the unit is operating with a space temperature sensor

(T-55, T-56, T-58 or T-59), occupancy affects the unit set points

and the operation of the economizer. The factors affecting

occupancy are listed below from highest to lowest priority.

Level 1 Priority

The CCN point OCCUPIED is forced via an external device such

as a ComfortID _ controller: when OCCUPIED is forced to YES,

the unit is considered occupied, when OCCUPIED is forced to

NO, the unit is considered unoccupied. If OCCUPIED is not being

forced, proceed to the level 2 priority.

Level 2 Priority

Remote Occupancy Switch should be configured to either

Normally Open or Normally Closed when the user would like to

control the occupancy with an external switch. This switch is

field-supplied (24v, single pole, single throw [SPST]). There are

three possible configurations for the remote occupancy switch:

1. (Configuration---_UNIT---_RM.SW =0) No Switch

2. (Configuration-+UNIT-+RM.SW = 1) Normally Open

Switch

3. (Configuration-+UNIT-+RM.SW = 2) Normally Closed

Switch

If the switch is configured to No Switch (0), the switch input value

will be ignored and software will proceed to level 3 priority. For

each type of switch, the appropriate configuration and states are

listed in the table below.

TYPE OF SWITCH

Occupied when

Closed or

Unoccupied when

Open

SWITCH

CONFIGURATION

Normal Open (1)

Occupied when Open Normal Closed (2)

Unoccupied when

Closed Normal Closed (2)

STATE OF

SWITCH AND

STATE OF

OCCUPANCY

Open and

Unoccupied

Closed and

Occupied

Open and

Occupied

Closed and

Occupied

IMPORTANT: To perform remote occupancy, an Economizer

Control Board must be installed in the unit.

Level 3 Priority

The following occupancy options are determined by the state of

Occupancy Schedule Number

(Configuration---,CCN---,SCH.O---,SCH_ and the Global

Schedule Broadcast (Configuration-+CCN-+BROD-+B.GS).

1. (Configuration---,CCN---,SCH.O---,SCH_ =O) The unit is

always considered occupied and the programmed schedule

is ignored. This is the factory default.

2. (Configuration-+CCN-+SCH.O-+SCH.N =1-64) Follow

the local programmed schedule. Schedules I to 64 are local

within the controller. The 48/50PD unit can only store one

local schedule and therefore changing this number only

changes the title of the schedule table.

3. (Configuration--,CCN-+SCH.O-+SCH.N =65-99)

Follow the global programmed schedule. If the 48/50PD

unit is configured as a Global Schedule Broadcaster

(Configuration---,CCN---,ROD---,B.GS =YES), the unit

will follow the unit's programmed schedule and broadcast

the schedule so that other devices programmed to follow

this schedule number can receive the schedule. If the

48/50PD unit is not programmed as a Global Schedule

Broadcaster

(Configuration--,CCN--,BROD--,B.GS =NO), the unit

will receive broadcasted schedules from the unit

programmed to broadcast this schedule number. While

using the programmed schedule, occupancy can be

temporarily switched from unoccupied to occupied by

pressing the override button for approximately 3 seconds on

the T-55, T-56, T-58 or T-59 space temperature sensor.

Override will only occur if SPT Override Enabled

13

(Configuration--+CCN--+SCH.O--+OV.SP) is set to YES.

The length of the override period is detemfined by the

Timed Override Hours setting

(Con figuration--+CCN--+ SCH.O--+O V>EX).

Compressor Operation

The 48/50 PD units use a Copeland Digital Scroll Compressor that

can vary the refrigerant capacity between 100 and 15%. This is

accomplished by a mechanism in the compressor that separates the

two scroll spirals which stops the pumping of the refrigerant gas.

This mechanism is operated by the differential pressure between

the suction and discharge of the compressor. The pressure to

operate the unloading mechanism is controlled by a small solenoid

situated in a refrigerant line between the top of the compressor and

the suction line. When the solenoid is energized the compressor is

unloaded. The solenoid coil is controlled by the Copeland Digital

Scroll Controller (DSC) that operates on a 1 to 5V signal from the

ComfortLink Auxiliary Board (AUXI) and converts this into a

Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) signal to the solenoid valve. The

pulse width modulated signal is an on and off signal that repeats

every 15 seconds with the off time portion of the 15 seconds

representing the % loading of the compressor.

The Compressor Capacity (Outputs--+COOL--+CAPC) can be

monitored on the ComfortLink Scrolling Marquee Display. The

Compressor Capacity value is detemfined by a Proportional,

Integral, Derivative (PID) algorithm that controls the Supply Air

Temperature (Temperatures--+AIR.T--+SAT) to the Supply Air

Control Point (Run Status--+COOL--+SA.CP).

The Compressor Minimum Capacity

(Configuration---,COOL---,MIN.C) is configured at the factory to

70%. This is the minimum compressor capacity that gives the

highest SEER rating for a 48 series unit with the highest gas heat

option and no economizer per AHRI standard 210/240. Since the

AHRI rating standard does not account for energy savings that can

be realized by displacement ventilation air distribution system and

extending economizer cooling operation at higher supply air

temperature set points, a complete energy analysis should be

conducted before changing the Compressor Minimum Capacity

(Configuration---,COOL---,MIN.C) setting to detemfine the energy

savings at a lower Compressor Minimum Capacity

(Configuration--,COOL--,MIN.C) setting.

Indoor Fan Operation

The indoor fan is controlled by the Indoor Fan VFD Power Relay

(Outputs_FANS_IDF) on the MBB (main base board) control,

which then operates the indoor fan contactor (IFC). On the

48/50PD units the Indoor Fan VFD Power Relay

(Outputs---,FANS---,IDF) is always on so that power is supplied to

the VFD electronic boards. This prevents the formation of

condensation on the VFD electronic boards and provides power to

the remote VFD display so that error codes and VFD configuration

parameters can be verified.

The 48/50PD unit controls require an accurate supply duct CFM at

the unit design point where the indoor fan will run at the Supply

Fan Maxinmm Speed (Configuration-_UNIT--,FS_X). The

Supply Fan Maximum Speed (Configuration--_UNIT--_FS_X)

is used for operation of the economizer and power exhaust. The

supply duct CFM is configured by the Indoor Fan Max Speed

CFM (Configuration-_ECON-_IDF.C). Default values for

Indoor Fan Max Speed CFM (Configuration-_ECON-_IDF.C)

are at 400 CFM per ton or 1600 CFM for the 05 size and 2000

CFM for the 06 size. It is preferred to use the supply duct CFM

from an air balance report to configure the Indoor Fan Max Speed

CFM (Configuration--+ECON--+IDF.C). If an air balance report

is not available then use the fan tables supplied in this book to

deternfine Fan Max Speed CFM

(Configuration---,ECON---,IDF.C). When using the fan tables to

deternfine Fan Max Speed CFM

(Configuration---,ECON---,IDF.C) set Economizer Position Test

(Service Test--+INDP--+ECON) to 0 (Econonfizer Damper Closed)

and Indoor Fan Speed Test (Service Tes---,FANS---,F.SPD) equal to

(Configuration---,UNIT---,FS.MX). Measure the supply to return

duct static pressure difference and indoor fan RPM. Make

correction to static pressure for all options installed in the unit per

the accessory pressure drop table. Deternfine Indoor Fan Max

Speed CFM (Configuration---,ECON---,IDF.C) on the fan table

where the corrected static pressure and RPM cross.

The supply fan speed range is configured by the Supply Fan

Maximum Speed (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_X) and the

Supply Fan Minimum Speed (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS.MN).

These configuration values are in units of % speed referenced to a

2 to 10VDC signal to the VFD AI1 input with 2VDC representing

0% speed and 10VDC representing 100% speed or 0 to 60HZ

VFD frequency output to the motor.

The Supply Fan Minimum Speed

(Configuration---,UNIT---,FS.MN) can be user configured

between 10 and 70%. The Supply Fan Minimum Speed default

value is 70%, this provides the greatest energy efficiency rating for

a unit without an economizer in a mixed air type duct application.

The Supply Fan Maximum Speed

(Configuration---,UNIT---,FS.MX) can be configured between 80

and 100%. The Supply Fan Maximum Speed default value is

100%. Set the indoor fan pulley to the application design point

CFM for heating and cooling at 100% fan speed so that the CFM is

not lower than the minimum CFM allowed in the product data. If

the exact CFM can not be set by the half turn pulley settings then

adjust the Supply Fan Maximum Speed

(Configuration---_UNIT---_FS_X) to fine tune the CFM to the

application requirements, The Supply Fan Maxinmm Speed

(Configuration---_UNIT--_FS_X) RPM nmst now produce

supply CFM that is not lower that the nfinimum CFM allowed in

the product data for heating and cooling,

The indoor fan may operate during cooling with compressors

mode, free cooling with outdoor air mode, heating mode, or for

ventilation with outdoor air mode,

The indoor fan operation can be affected by the following:

• Fan On When Occupied (Configuration--+UNIT--+OC.FN)

• IAQ Analog Fan Config (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+IA.FN)

• IAQ Switch Fan Config (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+ILFN)

• Fan Status Switch (Configuration---,UNIT---,FN.SW)

When the unit is in occupied or unoccupied cooling mode the

supply fan will modulate to maintain the space temperature sensor

set point between the configured Supply Fan Maximum Speed

(Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_X) and the Supply Fan Minimum

Speed (Configuration--+UNIT--+FS.MN).

When the 40PD or 50 PD unit is in occupied or unoccupied

heating mode (gas heat or electric heat mode) the indoor fan will

operate at the Supply Fan Maximum Speed

(Configuration--_UNIT--_FS_X) setting.

For 48PD gas heating units, the IGC control fan output is also

monitored by the MBB control. This can result in additional

modifications of fan delays or other operation due to safety

functions of the IGC control.

When the PD unit is in free cooling mode the indoor fan will

modulate to maintain The Occupied Cool Set Point

(Setpoints-,OCSP), the Unoccupied Cool Set Point

(Setpoints---,UCSP), Occupied Heat Set Point

(Setpoints---,OHSP), or the Unoccupied Heat Set Point

(S etpoints---, UHSP) .

When the PD unit is in ventilation mode and Fan On When

Occupied (Configuration---,UNIT---,OC.FN) the indoor fan will

operate at the Vent Mode Fan Speed

(Configuration---,UNIT---,FS.VM). Vent Mode Fan Speed

(Configuration---,UNIT---,FS.VM) factory default is 50% and can

be user configured between 40 and 100%.

14

Outdoor Fan Operation

The 48/50 PD units use a multi-speed outdoor fan motor to control

the head pressure within an acceptable range at low outdoor

ambient temperatures. On the 48 and 50 PD-05 and 06 size units

the outdoor fan contactor is powered on the load side of the

compressor contactor so the outdoor fans will run only when the

compressor contactor is energized. When the outdoor fan

contactor is not energized the outdoor fan runs at high speed.

When the outdoor fan contactor is energized the outdoor fan runs

at low speed.

The outdoor fan speed is controlled by a system three of fan levels

set up in the control software. Table 6 shows the three levels and

fan speeds for each level. The fan levels are deternfined by

Outdoor Air Temperature (Temperatures-,AIR.T-,OAT) but can

be overridden by Condenser Pressure A (Pressures-+SCP,4)

inputs to the Main Base Board.

FAN

LEVEL

FAN

SPEED

OFF

LOW

HIGH

CONDITIONS TO TRANSITION TO NEXT

LOWER LEVEL

N/A

1. Compressor Contactor is OFF

1. Outside Air Temperature Control -- Fan

Lev2 Off Temperature 45 F or below (Confi-

guration--,COOL--,OFC--,2.OFF < =45F)*

2. Condenser Pressure A Override -- Fan

Lev2 Min Pressure 200 psig or below (Config-

uration--,COOL--,OFC--,2.MNP< = 200 psig)*

CONDITIONS TO TRANSITION TO NEXT

HIGHER LEVEL

1. Compressor Contactor is ON

(on initial start up outdoor fan runs at Level 2 for

10 seconds before moving to correct level based

on outside air temperature or Condenser Pres-

sure A)

1. Outside Air Temperature Control -- Fan

Lev2 On Temperature 55 F or above (Configu-

ration--,COO L--,O FC--,2.ON > =55F)*

2. Condenser Pressure A Override -- Fan

Levl Max Pressure 450 psig or above (Config-

uration--,COOL--,OFC--,1 .MXP> = 450 psig)*

N/A

Table 6 -- Fan Level Control of Outdoor Fan

*Configuration parameters 1.MXE 2.MNE 2.ON and 2.OFF factory default configuration should not be changed. The default configurations have been qualified over a wide

range of conditions and are provided in case a field replacement of the control board occurs and the settings need to be checked or manually configured.\

Economizer Operation

If an econonfizer is installed, then Econonfizer Installed

(Configuration--_UNIT--_EC.EN) should be set to YES. The

economizer is controlled by the Econo Commanded Position

(Outputs-,ECON-,EC.CP) on the Economizer Control Board

(ECB). Feed back from the econonfizer actuator is output on

configuration parameter Econo Actual Position

(Outputs-+ E CON-+ EC_4P) .

Economizer Actuator Communication

The econonfizer actuator used with the 48/50PD units is a

Multi-Function Technology (MFT) actuator. This allows the

ComfortLink system to communicate with the actuator through a

feedback signal. The configuration Econonfizer Control Type

(Configuration-+ECON-+E.CTL) deternfines the conmmnication

method, either digital or analog, used to communicate between the

Economizer Control Board and the economizer actuator.

The power to the unit must be cycled after the Economizer Control

Type (Configuration --+ECON--+E.CTL) configuration parameter

is changed.

E.CTL = 1 or 2 (Digital/Position or Digital/Command)

When Econonfizer Control Type

(Configuration-+ECON-+E.CTL) is set to 1, the Econonfizer

Control Board will communicate with the economizer actuator

using the digital protocol, from Econonfizer Control Board plug

J7-1 to actuator pin 5. The commanded position and the actuators

actual position are communicated back and forth between the

actuator and the Economizer Control Board. When the Economizer

Control Board and actuator first initiate communication, a Control

Angle Econonfizer Control Type (Operating Modes'---,

ECON--+C_4NG) is provided to the Econonfizer Control Board

and defines the actuator's range of motion. The control angle must

be greater than the Min Actuator Ctrl Angle

(Configuration-+ECON-+M_4NG). During this digital control,

the Economizer Control Board analog 4 to 20 mA output will

represent the actuator's actual position when E.CTL = 1 or

commanded position when E.CTL = 2. Because the wiring has a

built-in 500-ohm resistor, the 4 to 20mA signal is converted to a 2

to 10VDC signal that is accessible via a field connected ternfinal

board TB-8 and TB-9. However, before this signal can be read

remotely, the violet wire that connects the actuator to field

connection ternfinal board TB-J10-8 must be removed or cut.

E.CTL =3 (Analog Control)

When E.CTL is set to 3, the Econonfizer Control Board will NOT

conmmnicate with the economizer actuator directly with the 4 to

20mA analog signal wired to TB-8 and TB-9 along with the

500-ohm resistor producing a 2 to 10VDC signal for the actuator.

While in this mode, the actuator's built-in 2 to 10VDC feedback

signal s accessible via TB-9 and TB-10 any time because it is not

used by the Econonfizer Control Board.

Free Cooling

The econonfizer will be allowed to help with cooling if the

Outdoor Air Temperature (Temperatures--,AIR.T--,OAT) is less

than the configured Econo Cool Hi Temp Linfit

(Configuration-+ECON-+EH.LO) and greater than the

configured Econo Cool Lo Temp Linfit

(Configuration-+ECON-+EL.LO). If an enthalpy sensor is

installed, the outdoor temperature must be below the Econo Cool

Hi Temp Linfit (Configuration--+ECON--+EHJ_O) and the

Outdoor Enthalpy Switch (Inputs-+GENd-+ENTH) must be

LOW.

Unoccupied Free Cooling

The unoccupied free cooling algorithm attempts to maintain the

building space half way between the Occupied Cool Set Point

(Setpoints-,OCSP) and Occupied Heat Set Point

(Setpoints-,OHSP) using only the econonfizer when the

conditions in the building and the outdoors are suitable., during

UNoccupied periods if the air in the building and the outdoor air

are suitable. Three different configurations define this algorithm:

1. Unoccupied Free Cooling

(Configuration-+ECON-+ UEFC)

15

a.(Configuration--,ECON--,UEFC =O) - Disabled

When UEFC =0, unoccupied free cooling is disabled.

Cooling will only occur if the space exceeds the

unoccupied setpoints.

b. (Configuration--_ECON--_UEFC =1) -Unoccupied

When UEFC is set to 1, unoccupied free cooling can

occur throughout the entire unoccupied period. The

space temperature nmst be higher then the nfid-point

between the occupied cooling and heating set points.

c. (Configuration--_ECON--_UEFC =2) -Preoccupancy

When UEFC is set to 2, unoccupied free cooling can

only occur when the time until the next occupied period

is less than the Free Cool PreOcc Time (FC.TM) in

nfinutes.

2. Free Cool PreOcc Time

(C onfiguratio n--_ E CON--_ F C. TM)

FC.TM is the configuration that determines how many

minutes before occupancy that free cooling can occur when

set for Preoccupancy (UEFC =2).

3. l.Free Cool Low Temp Linfit

(Configuration---,ECON---,FC.LO)

Unoccupied free cooling cannot occur if the Outdoor Air

Temperature (Temperature---, AIR.T--, OAT) is less than

FCJLO.

Power Exhaust

To enable power exhaust set Power Exhaust Installed

(Configuration--_ECON--_PE_N) to YES. On the 48/50PD-05

and 06 size units both power exhaust fans are wired together and

are controlled by the configuration Power Exhaust Stagel CFM

(Configuration-_ECON-_PE1.C). When the Indoor Fan Max

Speed CFM (Configuration-_ECON-_IDF.C) is set to the correct

supply duct CFM (either by fan tables or air balance report) the

control will calculate the outside air CFM based on outside air

damper position and Commanded Fan Speed

(Outputs-,FANS-,F.SPD) to turn on the power exhaust when the

calculated outside air CFM reaches Power Exhaust Stage1 CFM

(Configuration--,ECON--,PE1.C). The power exhaust will turn

off when the calculated outside air CFM falls below Power

Exhaust Stagel CFM (Configuration--+ECON--+PE1.C). The

Power Exhaust Stage2 CFM (Configuration--+ECON--+PE2.C) is

not currently used on the 48/50PD-05 and 06 units.

Indoor Air Quality (IAQ)

The ComfortLink TM control has the capability for several

methods of demand ventilation control. Indoor air quality is

typically measured using a CO2 sensor whose measurements are

displayed in parts per million (ppm). Outdoor air quality may be

measured with a CO2 sensor for indoor-outdoor differential

demand ventilation control, or with other sensor types for the

outdoor air lockout function. The factory-installed indoor air

quality CO2 sensor is mounted in the return section. A

field-installed indoor air quality CO2 sensor may be mounted in

the return or directly in the occupied space, per job requirements.

The indoor air quality modes of operation can be affected by the

IAQ Analog Input Config (Configuration---, AIR.Q---, IA.CF),

IAQ Switch Input Config (Configuration---, AIR.Q---, IA.CF),

OAQ Analog Input Config (Configuration---, AIR.Q---, OA.CF)

and other related fan and limit configurations as described below.

IAQ (Analog Input)

The ComfortLink TM control is configured for indoor air quality

sensors which provide 4 to 20 mA signal for 0 to 2000 ppm CO2.

If the sensor being used has adifferent range, the ppm display

range must be reconfigured by entering new values for the IAQ

Sensor Value at 4mA (Configuration--_AIR.Q--_L4M) and IAQ

Sensor Value at 20mA (Configuration--_AIR.Q--_L2OM).

IA.CF = 0 (No IAQ)

IA.CF =0signifies that there is no IAQ sensor installed. The

damper will operate at the Econ Min at Max Fan Speed

(Configuration--+ECON--+MP.MX) when the fan is at Supply Fan

Maximum Speed (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_X) and the

damper position will vary at other fan speeds as described in the

Cooling Mode with Economizer section below when the space is

occupied and the indoor fan is on.

IA.CF = 1 (DCV)

When IA.CF = 1 the IAQ algorithm is set for Demand Control

Ventilation (DCV). During DCV, the damper modulates between

two user configurations depending upon the relationship between

the Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) and the Outdoor Air Quality (OAQ).

The lower of these two positions is referred to as the Econo Min

IAQ Position (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+AQ.MN) while the higher

is referred to as the Econ Min at Max Fan Speed

(Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X). The Econo Min IAQ

Position (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+AQ.MN) should be set to an

economizer position that brings in enough fresh air to remove

contaminates and CO2 generated by sources other than people.

The Econ Min at Max Fan Speed

(Configuration--+ECON---,MP.MX) should be set to an

economizer position that brings in fresh air to remove contaminates

and CO2 generated by all sources including people when the

indoor fan is operating at the Supply Fan Maximum Speed

(Configuration--+UNIT--+FS.MX). The Econ Min at Max Fan

Speed (Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X) value is the design

value for n_axinmm occupancy.

The ComfortLink TM control will begin to open the damper from

the Econo Min IAQ Position (Configuration---,AIR.Q---,AQd_N)

position when the IAQ level begins to exceed the Outdoor Air

Quality (OAQ) level by a configuraMe amount. This amount is

referred to as AQ Differential Low

(Configuration--+AIR.Q--+AQD_L). When the differential

between IAQ and OAQ reaches AQ Differential High

(Configuration--+AIR.Q--+AQDJI), the economizer position will

be at the Econ Min at Max Fan Speed

(Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X) when the indoor fan speed is

at Supply Fan Maximum Speed

(Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_X). When the IAQ/OAQ

differential is between AQ Differential Low

(Configuration--+AIR.Q--+A QD.L)

(Con figuration--+AIR.Q--+A QD JI) ,

damper between Econ Min

(Configuration--+ECON--+MP.MX)

(Configuration--+AIR.Q--+A Q.MN)

in Figure 3. At other fan speeds

and AQ Differential High

the control will modulate the

at Max Fan Speed

and Econo Min IAQ Position

in a linear manner as shown

the econonfizer damper will

operate in the shaded area between the two econonfizer position

curves but at the actual fan speed as indicated by Commanded Fan

Speed (Outputs-,FANS-,F.SPD).

IA.CF = 2 (Override IAQ)

When IA.CF = 2, the IAQ algorithm maintains the damper at Econ

Min at Max Fan Speed (Configuration--,ECON--,MP.MX) when

the indoor fan speed is at Supply Fan Maximum Speed

(Configuration--,UNIT--,FS.MX) or in the shaded area of Figure

3 when the indoor fan speed is at the Commanded Fan Speed

(Outputs-,FANS-,F.SPD) until the override condition triggers.

The override triggers when the IAQ/OAQ differential is greater

than AQ Differential High (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+AQD.H).

The IAQ Override Position (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+OVRaP).

The economizer damper will return to the Econ Min at Max Fan

Speed (Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X) or MP.MX curve at

other fan speeds when the IAQ/OAQ differential is less than the

AQ Differential Low (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+AQD.L).

The override algorithm will operate whenever the building is

occupied and the indoor fan is operating or whenever the IAQ

algorithm has caused the indoor fan to operate. The IAQ Analog

Fan Config (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+IA.FN) determines whether

or not the IAQ algorithm can turn on the indoor fan.

If the indoor fan is not operating, the economizer position will be

zero. If the override is not active and the building is unoccupied,

the economizer position will be zero. The damper position may

16

exceed Econ Min at Max Fan Speed

(Configuration--_ECON--_MP_X) or IAQ Override Position

(Configuration--,AIR.Q--,OVRdP) to provide econonfizer

cooling.

IA.CF =3 (Control Minimum Position)

When IA.CF =3, an external 4 to 20 mA source is used to set the

minimum position. The 4mA signal corresponds to 0% and the 20

mA signal corresponds to 100%. In this mode, configuration such

as Econ Min at Max Fan Speed

(Configuration--,ECON--,MP.MX), Econo Min IAQ Position

(Configuration--,AIR.Q--,AQ.MN) and the econonfizer nfininmm

position and DCV minimum position curves in figure 3 are not

used.

If the indoor fan is not operating, the econonfizer position will be

zero. The damper position may exceed the econonfizer minimum

position to provide econonfizer cooling.

IAQ (Switch Input)

Indoor air quality can also be measured using a switch input. For

the purpose of specifying the type of switch input, low CO2 levels

are considered normal. The IAQ switch input is defined by the

IAQ Switch Input Config (Configuration-,AIR.Q-,ILCF).

Enthalpy and IAQ are controlled by the same switch input and

therefore cannot be used simultaneously.

II.CF = 0 (NO IAQ)

The II.CF =0, configuration signifies that there is no IAQ switch

input. The damper will operate at the Econ Min at Max Fan Speed

(Configuration_ECON_MP.MX) and corresponding damper

position curve based on indoor fan speed when the space is

occupied and the indoor fan is on.

II.CF = 1 (DCV Normally Open)

II.CF = 2 (DCV Normally Closed)

The Demand Control Ventilation (DCV) allows the econonfizer

minimum position to be decreased when there is no IAQ problem.

If IAQ is low, the econonfizer minimum position is Econo Min

IAQ Position (Configuration--_AIR.Q--_AQ_N) when the indoor

fan is operating at Supply Fan Maximum Speed

(Configuration-*UNIT-*FS.MX). If IAQ is high, the

economizer minimum position is Econ Min at Max Fan Speed

(Configuration--*ECON--*MP_X) when the indoor fan is

operating at Supply Fan Maximum Speed

(Configuration--_ UNIT--_FS_X).

II.CF =3(Override Normally Open)

II.CF =4 (Override Normally Closed)

The damper override function permits absolute positioning of the

economizer damper for ventilation purposes. The override is

active when IAQ is high and inactive when IAQ is low. The

override position is configured by the IAQ Override Position

(Con figuration---,AIR.Q---,O VR dP).

Outdoor Air Quality (Analog Input)

The ComfortLink TM control is configured for outdoor air quality

sensors which provide a 4 to 20 mA signal corresponding to 0 to

2000 ppm CO2. If a field supplied sensor has a different range, the

ppm display range nmst be reconfigured by entering new values

for the OAQ Sensor Value at 4mA

(Configuration--,AIR.Q--,O.4M) and OAQ Sensor Value at

20mA (Configuration--,AIR.Q--,O.2OM).

OA.CF = 0 (NO OAQ)

This signifies that there is no outdoor air sensor installed. The

default value of OAQ is 400 ppm CO2.

OA.CF =1 (DCV)

The outdoor air quality sensor analog input is the value of OAQ.

OA.CF = 2 (OAQ Lockout)

The outdoor air quality analog input is only used to lock out the

outdoor ventilation. The econonfizer commanded position is set to

0% when the CO2 ppm exceeds the OAQ lockout value

configured for the OAQ Lockout Limit

(Configuration---,AIR.Q---,AQJL). The default value for OAQ

Lockout Linfit (Configuration---,AIR.Q---,OAQ_L) is 600 ppm

CO2.

Fan Enable (Analog IAQ Sensor)

The DCV algorithm will operate whenever the building is

occupied and the indoor fan is operating or whenever the IAQ

algorithm has caused the indoor fan to operate. The IAQ Analog

Fan Config (Configuration---,AIR.Q---,IA.FN) deternfines

whether or not the IAQ algorithm can turn on the indoor fan. If the

indoor fan is not operating, the econonfizer position will be zero.

The damper position may exceed Econ Min at Max Fan Speed

(Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X) and corresponding damper

position curve to provide econonfizer cooling.

IA.FN = 0(Never)

When IA.FN =0, the IAQ algorithm can never turn on the fan.

IA.FN = 1 (Occupied)

When IA.FN =1, the IAQ algorithm will turn on the indoor fan

whenever the building is occupied and IAQ/OAQ differential is

greater than the Fan On AQ Differential

(Configuration---,AIR.Q---,DF.ON). The indoor fan will turn off

when the IAQ/OAQ differential is less than the Fan Off AQ

Differential (Configuration---,AIR.Q---,DF.OF).

IA.FN = 2 (Always)

The indoor fan operation for IA.FN =2, is the same as the

operation when IA.FN =1, except the algorithm is not linfited to

the occupied periods only. The fan can be triggered on when the

space is occupied or unoccupied.

Fan Enable (Analog Switch Input)

The DCV algorithm will operate whenever the building is

occupied and the indoor fan is operating or whenever the IAQ

algorithm has caused the indoor fan to operate. The IAQ Switch

Fan Config (Configuration---,AIR.Q---,II.FN) deternfines whether

or not the IAQ algorithm can turn on the indoor fan. If the indoor

fan is not operating, the econonfizer position will be zero. The

damper position may exceed Econ Min at Max Fan Speed

(Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X) and corresponding damper

position curve to provide econonfizer cooling.

II.FN = 0(Never)

When II.FN =0, the IAQ algorithm can never turn on the fan.

II.FN = 1 (Occupied)

When II.FN =1, the IAQ algorithm will turn on the indoor fan

whenever the building is occupied and IAQ is high. The indoor

fan will turn off when the IAQ returns to normal.

II.FN = 2 (Always)

The indoor fan operation for II.FN =2, is the same as the operation

when IA.FN =1, except the algorithm is not linfited to the

occupied periods only. The fan can be triggered on when the space

is occupied or unoccupied.

Cooling Modes

Cooling Mode Using Space Temperature Sensor T55,

T56, T58 or T59

In cooling mode the PD control will maintain the Occupied Cool

Set Point (Setpoint--_OCSP) or the Unoccupied Cool Set Point

(Setpoints---,UCSP) by modulating the indoor fan speed to supply

more or less airflow to the conditioned space at the Supply Air

Temperature (Temperatures---,AIR.T---,SAT).

Cooling Supply Air Set Point

The Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint---,SASP)can be

configured between 45F and 75F. The compressor modulates to

maintain a Supply Air Temperature

(Temperatures--+AIR.T--+SAT)at the Cool Supply Air Set Point

(S etpoint---, SA SP) .

Cooling Speed Demand Window

When the temperature in the conditioned space is higher than the

Occupied Cool Set Point (Setpoints---,OCSP) plus the Fan Speed

Control Demand (Configuration---,COOL?FS.CD) configuration

17

variableorUnoccupiedCoolSetPoint(Setpoints--->UCSP) plus

the Fan Speed Control Demand

(Configuration--->COOL--->FS.CD) configuration variable the

indoor fan will run at 100%. When the temperature in the

conditioned space is between the Occupied Cool Set Point

(Setpoints--->OCSP) and Occupied Cool Set Point

(Setpoints--->OCSP) plus the Fan Speed Control Demand

(Configuration--->COOL--->FS.CD) configuration variable the

indoor fan modulates to satisfy the Occupied Cool Set Point

(Setpoints-,OCSP) or Unoccupied Cool Set Point

(Setpoints-,UCSP). When the temperature in the conditioned

space falls to 0.5F below the Occupied Cool Set Point

(Setpoints-,OCSP) or Unoccupied Cool Set Point

(Setpoints-,UCSP) for 5 nfinutes the controls will run unit in

ventilation mode. See ventilation mode sequence of operation

Tern )e ra_ure

ocsp + FSCD X

C_oling _peed D el_ Window - ]nit Supply Fan ._pe ed Mo_utate_ to 1'_ OVe

Space Temperature a on9,_ e_ned Curce o the O_cup ed Cool eet Polnt

(OO SP) "I"-,,

OCSP _ -- m ,

ocsP - 05 F

• Time

C09143

Fig. 6 - Cooling Speed Demand Window

Cooling Supply Air Set Point Reset

The PD unit can be configured to allow for reset of the Cool

Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--,SASP). This is needed for

applications where a high Cool Supply Air Set Point

(Setpoint--,SASP) is required or where dramatic load changes

occur over short time periods. In these situations a high supply air

temperature may not provide enough cooling to reduce the Space

Temperature (Temperatures--->AIR.T--->SPT) to the Occupied Cool

Set Point (Setpoints---,OCSP) or the Unoccupied Cool Set Point

(Setpoints---,UCSP) over a reasonable time period.

The compressor or econonfizer operation supplying cooling to the

conditioned space controls to the Supply Air Control Point (Run

Status--->COOL--->SA.CP). The Supply Air Control Point (Run

Status--->COOL--->SA.CP) which is a calculated value that is equal

to the Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--->SASP) plus the

calculated amount of reset required up to the values set by

configuration variables SASP Maxinmm Reset Down

(Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SA.MD) and SASP Maximum

Reset Up (Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SAJ_U).

Reset of the Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--->SASP) is

linfited by the configuration variables SASP Maxinmm Reset

Down (Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SA.MD) and SASP

Maximum Reset Up (Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SAJ_U).

The SASP Maximum Reset Down

(Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SA.MD) configuration variable

can be set from -20 to 0 F and will allow the Cool Supply Air Set

Point (Setpoint--->SASP) to be reset to as nmch as 20 F below the

Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--->SASP). The SASP

Maximum Reset Up (Configuration--->COOL?SAT--->SAJ_U)

configuration variable can be set from 0 to 20 F and will allow the

Supply Air Temperature to be Reset to as nmch as 20 F above the

Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--->SASP). The SASP

Maximum Reset Down (Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SAJ_D)

and SASP Maximum Reset Up

(Configuration--_COOL--_SAT--_SA_U) configuration variables

can be set independently and do not need to be equal values above

and below the Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--,SASP). For

example, the SASP Maximum Reset Down

(Configuration--->COOL--->SAT---> ?SA J_D) configuration variable

can be set to -10 and the SASP Maxinmm Reset Up

(Configuration--_COOL--_SAT--_SA_U) configuration variable

can be set to 0 giving the range of Cool Supply Air Set Point

(Setpoint--,SASP) reset of +0 and -10 F.

In normal operation when the Space Temperature is within the

speed demand window the unit control will modulate the indoor

fan speed and supply air temperature along a defined curve to bring

the Space Temperature to Occupied or Unoccupied Cool Set Point.

Since this curve is independent of the conditioned space load the

control scheme will adapt to any load present in the conditioned

space by adjusting the fan speed and supply air temperature and

move the space temperature along the defined time temperature

curve to Occupied or Unoccupied Cool Set Point.

When the space temperature rises above the Occupied Cool Set

Point (Setpoints-,OCSP) + Fan Speed Control Demand

(Configuration--->COOL--->FS.CD) for over 2 nfinutes or is outside

the speed demand window and there is some amount of SASP

Maximum Reset Down (Configuration--->COOL?SAT--->SA.MD)

configured the indoor fan will be locked at 100% and the unit

controls will subtract a calculated amount of temperature reset to

the Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--->SASP). The indoor fan

speed will be locked at 100% as long as reset is applied. The

Supply Air Temperature will now adjust to this new Supply Air

Control Point (Run Status--->COOL--->SA.CP). The controls will

continue to subtract a calculated amount of temperature reset

cunmlatively to a value equal to the Supply Air Temperature Set

Point (Setpoint--->SASP) + SASP Maxinmm Reset Down

(Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SAJ_D). When the reset is no

longer needed the control will remove Down Reset until all reset is

removed and the Supply Air Control Point (Run

Status--->COOL--->SA.CP) is back to the original Supply Air Set

Point (Setpoint--->SASP). The indoor fan will then modulate lower

than 100% to move the Space Temperature (Temperatures--->SPT)

along the defined time temperature curve to Cool Supply Air Set

Point (Setpoint--->SASP) or Unoccupied Cool Set Point

(Setpoints--->UCSP). See Fig. 6 and 7.

Supply Air Temperature

iiiiiiiiii!iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii!iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii_ b,iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii

iiiiiiiiiii!iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii!iiii!iii!iiiiiii iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii

SAS

Fig. 7 - Cool Supply Air Set Point

Time

C09144

Cooling Mode with Economizer Using Space

Temperature Sensor T55, T56, T58 or T59

If an economizer is installed, the Economizer Installed

configuration (Configuration--_ECON--_ EC.EN) should be set to

YES. The econonfizer is controlled by the Econo Commanded

Position (Outputs'--,ECON--, EC.CP) on the Econonfizer Control

Board. If the indoor fan is off or the building is unoccupied, the

econonfizer position is zero.

When the space temperature is above the Occupied Cool Set Point

(Setpoints-,OCSP) and the econonfizer is installed, configured

and working correctly the unit controls will always try to meet

space cooling demand using the econonfizer before turning on the

compressor. The econonfizer will provide free cooling when the

following outside air conditions are true.

18

Forall units with Economizers:

1. 1.The outdoor temperature is below the Econo Cool Hi

Temp Limit (Configuration--_ECON--_EH_LO) and above

the Econo Cool Lo Temp Linfit

(C onfiguration--+ E CON--+ EL_LO) .

For units with Enthalpy Control

2. 1.The outdoor enthalpy is low and the outdoor temperature

is below the Econo Cool Hi Temp Limit

(Configuration--+ECON--+EH.LO) and above the Econo

Cool Lo Temp Limit (Configuration--+ECON--+EL.LO).

If the conditions above are true and the economizer is available for

cooling the economizer outside air and return air dampers will

modulate to allow proportions of outside air and return air to mix

and produce atemperature equal to the Cool Supply Air Set Point

(Setpoint--+SASP). If reset is applied to the Supply Air

Temperature Set Point (Setpoint--+SASP) the dampers will control

to the Supply Air Control Point (Run Status--+COOL--+SA.CP).

If the conditions above are true but the economizer dampers are not

able to satisfy the Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--+SASP)

with Reset (if applied), the compressor will turn on and modulate

to provide additional cooling to satisfy the Cool Supply Air Set

Point (Setpoint--+SASP) with Reset if applied.

If the conditions above are not true, the economizer will move to a

user Configurable Econ Min at Max Fan Speed

(Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X) where the nfinimum

economizer damper position is based on the Supply Fan Maximum

Speed (Configuration--+UNIT--+FS.MX). This is done to

maintain a constant airflow through the economizer by opening the

dampers more as the indoor fan speed is reduced or closing the

dampers more as the indoor fan speed increases.

The shape of the Economizer Minimum Position vs. Fan Speed

curve is determined by the configuration parameters: Econ Min at

25% Fan speed (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.25), Econ Min at

50% Fan speed (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.50), Econ Min at

75% Fan speed (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.75) and Econ Min

at Max Fan speed (Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X).

The Econ Min at 25% Fan speed

(Configuration--+ECON--+MP.25), Econ Min at 50% Fan speed

(Configuration--+ECON--+MP.50) and Econ Min at 75% Fan

speed (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.75) damper positions are

calculated based on the Econ Min at Max Fan Speed

(Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X) and Supply Fan Maximum

Speed (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_X).

The Econ Min at 25% Fan speed

(Configuration--+ECON--+MP.25), Econ Min at 50% Fan speed

(Configuration--+ECON--+MP.50) and Econ Min at 75% Fan

speed (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.75) damper position are user

configurable and can be determined by setting the fan speed at 25,

50 and 75% and determining the damper position required to

maintain the Econ Min at Max Fan Speed

(Configuration--+ECON--+MP.MX) Outside air CFM through the

economizer outside air dampers. The default calculations

programmed into the PD controls is based on a side shot

economizer at 400 CFM/TON Supply Air flow with negative 0.25

in H20 pressure in the return duct.

Econ Min at Max fan Speed (Configuration--+UNIT--+FS.MN) is

set by user based on minimum required outside air ventilation

CFM required for the application. This procedure would be the

same as if this were a CV unit with the unit running at the design

point CFM. This determines the minimum position amount of

outside air CFM required when the fan is running at maximum

speed.

Configure the Indoor Fan Max Speed CFM

(Configuration--+ECON--+IDF.C) either to the supply CFM

deternfined from the fan performance tables or air balance reports.

If using fan performance tables make corrections for all installed

accessory pressure loss and use measured RPM, power and static

pressure readings to deternfine the actual Indoor Fan Max Speed

CFM (Configuration--+ECON--+IDF.C).

Economizer Position %

MAX P

20 25 50 75

ECON MIN

AT MAX

FANSPEED

POSITION

(MmNPMAX)

Minimum Configurable

Fan Speed is 20%

4PMX

;v

AQ/dl'j for DqYsj

I_ Fan Speed %

100

MINIMUM

IAQ

DAMPER

POSITION

(AO. MN)

100 700 INSIDE/OUTSIDECO2

/DIFFERENTIAL

AQ AQ

DIFFERENTIAL DIFFERENTIAL

LOW (AQD.L) HIGH (AQD.H)

C09145

Fig. 8 -Economizer Minimum Position

If the indoor fan is not operating, the econonfizer will be fully

closed, 0% open.

Ventilation Mode

If the space temperature falls 0.5F below the Occupied Cool Set

Point (Setpoints-+OCSP) the compressor will turn off, the indoor

fan speed will be set to the Vent Mode Fan Speed

(Configuration-+UNIT-+FS.VM) and the econonfizer will open

to the position that will supply nfinimum ventilation air at the

configured Vent Mode Fan Speed

(Configuration-+UNIT-+FS.VM). Default Vent Mode Fan Speed

(Configuration-+UNIT-+FS.VM) is 50%. Configuring the Vent

Mode Fan Speed (Configuration-+UNIT-+FS.VM) lower will

provide additional energy savings in vent mode but may not

supply the required ventilation air to the conditioned space at lower

fan speeds.

Demand Control Ventilation

The 48PD units can also be equipped with optional CO2 sensors

for additional indoor air quality control. When unit is equipped

with a return duct CO2 sensor or return duct CO2 sensor and

outside air CO2 sensor the Econonfizer nfinimum position vs. fan

speed curve will be recalculated based on the CO2 level of the

return and/or outside air as shown in Fig. 8. See the Indoor Air

19

Quality (IAQ) section of the Econonfizer Operation section above

for more details on Demand Control Ventilation (DCV).

Economizer Operation for Units Equipped with Return Air

COy Sensor Only

When the CO 2 sensor detects a CO 2 level or IAQ Level

(Inputs--+AIR.O--+IAO) below the AQ Differential Low

(Configuration--,AIR.O--,AOD.L) value the MP.25, MP.50,

MP.75 and MP.MX points will be recalculated to new values for

MP.25, MP.50, MP.75 based on the Econ Min IAQ Position

(Configuration--,AIR.O--,AO.MN). The econonfizer outside air

damper will close and reduce the amount of outside air CFM to the

conditioned space based on the lower IAQ sensor readings and

indoor fan speed. The econonfizer outside air damper will

continue to close and reduce the amount of outside air CFM to the

conditioned space until the damper reaches user configurable Econ

Min IAQ Position (Configuration--,AIR.Q--,AQ_N). This will

happen when the Commanded Fan Speed

(Outputs-+FANS-+F.SPD) is at the Supply Fan Maxinmm Speed

(Configuration--,UNIT--,FS_X). When the Commanded Fan

Speed (Outputs-+FANS-+F.SPD) is between Supply Fan

Maximum Speed (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_X) and the

Supply Fan Minimum Speed (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_N)

the damper will operate in the shaded area of Figure 8 based on the

IAQ Level (Inputs-+AIR.Q-+IAQ).

Economizer Operation for Units Equipped with Return Air

COy Sensor and outside air COy Sensor

The Econonfizer will operate sinfilar to Econonfizer Operation for

Units Equipped with Return Air CO2 Sensor Only but the IAQ

Level (Inputs-+AIR.Q-+IAQ) will be deternfined by actual

outside air CO2 measurements instead of the 400 ppm CO2 default

value for OAQ.

Cooling Mode Using Space Temperature Sensor T55,

T56, T58 or T59 and Humidistat (HL38MG029 or

TSTATCCPLH01-B)

Enhanced dehunfidifying will be provided when a hunfidistat

(HL38MG029 or TSTATCCPLH01-B) is connected the PD unit

ternfinal strip across the R and W2 ternfinals (since the PD unit

does not support the use of conventional thermostat inputs the W2

ternfinal is reconfigured for hunfidity input) and Space Hunfidity

Switch (Configuration--,UNIT--,RH.SW) configuration variable

is set to 1 (Normally Open-no call to dehunfidify). Relative

hunfidity set point is set by adjusting the dial on the HL38MG029

or TSTATCCPLH01-B device. When the hunfidistat contacts

close and provide 24VAC to the W2 ternfinal the PD unit will reset

the Supply Air Control Point (Run Status---,COOL---,SA.CP) by

one degree F lower than the Supply Air Set Point

(Setpoint-+SASP) or the current control point if the Supply Air

Set Point (Setpoint-+SASP) has already been modified. After 5

minutes if the humidistat contacts are still closed and 24 VAC is

being supplied to the W2 ternfinal the PD unit will reset the Supply

Air Control Point (Run Status--+COOL--+SA.CP) lower by one

more degree F. This reset cycle will continue to lower the supply

air temperature every 5 nfinutes until the Supply Air Control Point

(Run Status-+COOL-+SA.CP) is equal to the Supply Air Set

Point (Setpoint--+SASP) + SASP Maximum Reset Down

(Configuration--+COOL-+SAT-+SA.MD). The unit will continue

to operate at this reduced supply air temperature control point until

the hunfidistat contacts open and 24VAC is no longer supplied to

the W2 ternfinal. When 24VAC is no longer supplied to the W2

ternfinal the supply air control point will be reset higher by one

degree F. After 3 nfinutes if the hunfidistat contacts are still open

and 24VAC is not being supplied to the W2 ternfinal PD unit will

reset the Supply Air Control Point (Run Status---,COOL---,SA.CP)

higher by one more degree F. This reset cycle will continue to

raise the Supply Air Control Point (Run Status---,COOL---,SA.CP)

every 3 nfinutes until the Supply Air Control Point (Run

Status--,COOL--,SA.CP) is equal to the Supply Air Set Point

(Setpoint-+SASP) or the supply air control point if reset was being

applied due to cooling requirements that reset the Supply Air Set

Point (Setpoint-+SASP). Whenever Relative Hunfidity Reset is

applied the space temperature is controlled by modulating the fan

speed even if the fan was locked at 100% due to (Setpoint-+SASP)

reset.

Cooling Mode Using Space Temperature Sensor T55,

T56, or T58 and Humidity Sensor (HL39ZZ007 or

33ZCSENRH-01)

Enhanced dehumidifying will be provided when ahumidly sensor

(HL39ZZ007 or 33ZCSENRH-01) 4 to 20 ma control is

connected the PD unit terminal strip across the TB1-J10 pin 3 and

4, power to hunfidity sensor is connected to R and C, the RH

Sensor on OAQ Input (Configuration--,UNIT--,RH.S) is set to

YES and Space Hunfidity Switch

(Configuration--,UNIT--,RH.SW) configuration variable is set to

0. Relative hunfidity set point is set by changing the value of

Space RH Set point (Setpoint--,RH.SP). When the relative

hunfidity in the space is above the Space RH Set point

(Setpoint--,RH.SP) the PD unit controls will reset the supply air

temperature by one degree F lower than the Supply Air Set Point

(Setpoint--,SASP) or the current control point if the Supply Air

Set Point (Setpoint--,SASP) has already been modified. After 5

nfinutes the PD unit will reset the Supply Air Control Point (Run

Status-+COOL-+SA.CP) lower by one more degree F. This reset

cycle will continue to lower the Supply Air Control Point (Run

Status-+COOL-+SA.CP) every 5nfinutes until the Supply Air

Control Point (Run Status-+COOL-+SA.CP) is equal to the

Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--+SASP) + SASP Maximum Reset

Down (Configuration--+COOL--+ SAT-+SA.MD). When the

relative hunfidity in the space goes below the Space RH Set Point

(Setpoint-+RH.SP) - the Space RH Deadband

(Setpoint--_RH.DB) the supply air control point will be reset

higher by one degree F. After 3 nfinutes if the hunfidity sensor

reading is still below the Space RH Set Point (Setpoint-+RH.SP) -

the Space RH Deadband (Setpoint--+RHJ)B), the PD unit will

reset the Supply Air Control Point (Run

Status--+COOL--+SA.CP) higher by one more degree F. This reset

cycle will continue to raise the Supply Air Control Point (Run

Status--+COOL--+SA.CP) every 3 nfinutes until the supply air

temperature control point is equal to the Supply Air Set Point

(Setpoint--_SASP) or the supply air control point if reset was being

applied due to cooling requirements that reset the Supply Air Set

Point (Setpoint-+SASP).

Heating Modes

Gas Heating Mode Using Space Temperature Sensor

T55, T56, or T58 (48PD Units Only)

For gas units, the Type of Heat Installed

(Configuration---,HEAT---,HT.TY) will be factory set to a value of

1.

Heat will not operate if the outdoor temperature is greater than the

value configured for the Heating Lockout Temperature

(Configuration---,HEAT---,HT_LO), Heat Mininmm On Time

(Configuration---,HEAT---,MRTJt) and Heat Minimum Off Time

(Configuration--+HEAT--,MOT.H). Timeguards apply to both

stages of heating. Factory defaults values are 2 nfinute s ON and 2

nfinutes OFF. The Integrated Gas Controller (IGC) minimum

on-time of 1 nfinute will be followed even if Heat Minimum On

Time (Configuration---,HEAT---,MRTJt) is lower and during

Service Test.

If the indoor fan control is configured to cycle with the heating

demand by setting Fan ON When Occupied Heat Minimum On

Time (Configuration--,UNIT--,OC.FN) to NO, the fan will stop

after a delay configured by Fan-off Delay, Gas Heat

(Configuration-+HEAT-+FOD.G). The factory default for

Fan-off Delay, Gas Heat (Configuration--+HEAT--+FOD.G) is 45

seconds. If the IGC temperature limit switch opens within 10

nfinutes of the end of the gas heat cycle, the next fan off delay will

2O

beextendedby15seconds.Then_axinmmdelayis3minutes.

Once modified by the IGC, the fan off delay will not change back

to the configured Fan-off Delay, Gas Heat

(Configuration--,HEAT--,FOD.G) unless power is reset to the

control.

A light emitting diode (LED) is provided on the IGC to indicate

status. During normal operation the LED is continuously on. See

the Troubleshooting section if the LED is off or flashing. The IGC

is located behind the gas section access panel door. See Figure 8 or

9 for location.

The 48/50PD unit control will switch automatically between

cooling and heating to maintain space temperature. To nfininfize

unnecessary changes there is a 10 nfinute Mode Select Timeguard

(Operating Modes'--,HEAT--,MS.TG) after the last stage of

cooling turns off and before the heating is allowed.

The unit tries to maintain the space temperature at the Occupied

Heat Setpoint (Setpoint--,OHSP) or the Unoccupied Heat Setpoint

(Setpoint--,UHSP). See the Occupancy Deternfination section for

factors that affect the Currently Occupied (Run

Status--,VIEW--,OCC) parameter. Heating Demand (Operating

Modes'--,HEAT--,SPT--,DMDJt) is equal to the occupied or

unoccupied set point nfinus the Space Temperature (Operating

Modes'--,HEAT--,SPT--,SPT) [DMDJt = Setpoint - SPT].

Two methods are used to add and remove stages of heating for

48PD units. The first method causes the unit to operate around its

steady state number of stages. For example, if the correct number

of stages is between 0 and 1, this method will cause the first stage

to cycle. If the correct number of stages is between 1 and 2, this

method will cause the second stage to cycle. The second method

causes the unit to find the steady-state number of stages. Details of

these methods are provided below.

The control uses two methods to add a stage of heating. The first

method will add a stage of heating when the Heating Demand

(Operating Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,DMDdt) plus the change in

Spacetemp Trend (Operating Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,TRND)

times the Heat Thermal Lag Factor (Operating

Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,H.LAG) is greater than the SPT Heat

Demand (+) Level (Operating Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,HTaUD)

[DMD.H + change TRND *H.LAG >HT.PD].

The second method will add a stage of heating when Heat Demand

(Operating Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,DMDdt) is greater that the

SPT Heat Demand (+) Level (Operating

Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,HT.PD) plus 0.5 degrees F [DMD.H >

HT.PD + 0.5] and the heat demand is changing at a rate greater

than 0.3 degrees F per nfinute.

The control uses two methods to remove a stage of heating. The

first method will remove a stage of heating when the Heating

Demand (Operating Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,DMDdt) plus the

change in Spacetemp Trend (Operating

Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,TRND) times the Heat Thermal Lag

Factor (Operating Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,H.LAG) is less than

the SPT Heat Demand (-) Level (Operating

Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,HT_D) [DMDdt + change TRND *

H_LAG <HT_D].

The second method will remove a stage of heating when Heat

Demand (Operating Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,DMDdt) is less that

the SPT Heat Demand (-) Level (Operating

Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,HT.ND) nfinus 0.5 degrees F [DMDdt <

HT.PD - 0.5] and the heat demand is changing at a rate greater

than 0.3 degrees F per nfinute.

Configurable delays also apply when adding stages per Heat Stage

Increase Time (Configuration---,HEAT---,HdNC) or removing

stages per Heat Stage Decrease Time

(Configuration---,HEAT---,H_DEC). Heat Mininmm On Time

(Configuration---,HEAT---,MRTdt) and Heat Minimum Off Time

(Configuration---,HEAT---,MOTdt) also apply.

Supply-Air Temperature Sensor (SAT)

The SAT Heat Mode Sensing

(Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SATJt) affects the Supply Air

Temperature (Temperatures'--,AIR.T--,SAT) value displayed. This

configuration is accessible via the Scrolling Marquee on the SAT

Heat Mode Sensing (Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SATJt).

When the SAT Heat Mode Sensing

(Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SATJt) =DSBL, the Supply Air

Temperature (Temperatures---,AIR.T---,SAT) value on the

Scrolling Marquee and the CCN tables will be forced to zero when

heat outputs come ON and for 5nfinutes after. The default Supply

Air Temperature (Temperatures---,AIR.T---,SAT) location is at the

fan inlet, upstream of the heat section.

When the SAT Heat Mode Sensing

(Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SATdt) =ENBL, the Supply Air

Temperature (Temperatures---,AIR.T---,SAT) sensor reading is

displayed at the Scrolling Marquee and the CCN tables during

heating mode. This setting should only be used if the original SAT

sensor wires are removed from the Main Base Board (MBB) and

replaced by an accessory SAT sensor located in the supply duct

downstream of the heat section. There are then two supply air

temperature limits that become active, the Maximum SAT Lower

Level (Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAM_L) the Maximum

SAT Upper Level (Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAM.U).

Any time the supply air temperature rises above the Maximum

SAT Lower Level (Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAM_L) the

heat staging will be linfited to what is currently on and no

additional stages can be added until the supply air temperature falls

below the Maximum SAT Lower Level

(Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAM.L). If the supply air

temperature rises above the Maximum SAT Upper Level

(Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAM.U), then heating will be

reduced by removing a heat stage. That stage can not be added

again until the Supply Air Temperature

(Temperatures---,AIR.T---,SAT) falls below the Maximum SAT

Lower Level (Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAM_L). If the

supply air temperature stays above the Maximum SAT Upper

Level (Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SAM.U), then another

stage will be removed after the Heat Stage Decrease Time

(Configuration---,HEAT---,H_DEC).

In heating mode the PD control will maintain the Occupied Heat

Set Point (Setpoint--_OHSP) or the Unoccupied Heat Set Point

(Setpoint---,UHSP) by turning on or off the Stage I and Stage 2

Gas Heat at the Supply Fan Minimum Speed

(Configuration---, UNIT---,FS_N).

When the space temperature sensor detects the space temperature

below the Occupied Heat Set Point (Setpoint---,OHSP) or

Unoccupied Heat Set Point (Setpoint---,UHSP) and power is sent

to the Integrated Gas Unit Controller (IGC) board. The heat

staging is deternfined as described above and the Integrated Gas

Controller (IGC) initiates the gas heat module start-up.

Gas Heat Start-Up

An LED (light-enfitting diode) on the IGC board will be on during

normal operation. A check is made to ensure that the rollout switch

and linfit switch are closed and the induced-draft motor is running.

The induced-draft motor is then energized, and when speed is

proven with the Hall Effect sensor on the motor, the ignition

activation period begins. The burners will ignite within 5 seconds.

If the burners do not light, there is a 22-second delay before

another 5-second attempt. If the burners still do not light, this

sequence is repeated for 15 nfinutes. After the 15 nfinutes have

elapsed, if the burners still have not lit, heating is locked out.

When ignition occurs the IGC board will continue to monitor the

condition of the rollout and linfit switches, the Hall Effect sensor,

as well as the flame sensor. If for some reason the over temperature

linfit opens prior to the start of the indoor fan blower, on the next

attempt, the 45-second delay will be shortened to 5 seconds less

than the time from initiation of heat to when the linfit tripped. Gas

21

willnotbeinterruptedtotheburnersandheatingwillcontinue.

Oncemodified,thefanondelaywillnotchangebackto 45

secondsunlesspowerisresettothecontrol.Whentheindoorfan

turnsonafterthe40or45seconddelaytheindoorfanwillrunat

100%fanspeed.

Gas Heat Staging

When additional heat is required, power is supplied to the second

stage of the main gas valve. When the space temperature is 0.5F

above the Occupied Heat Set Point (Setpoint-+OHSP) or

Unoccupied Heat Set Point (Setpoint-+UHSP) power is removed

from the second stage of the main gas valve and to the IGC Wl

terminal. Both stage 1 and stage 2 of the gas valve closes,

interrupting the flow of gas to the main burners.

Gas Heat Shut Down

If power to the IGC Wl terminal lasted less than 1 minute, the

heating cycle will not ternfinate until 1 nfinute after power is

applied to the Wl ternfinal of the IGC board. If the over

temperature linfit opens after the indoor motor is stopped within 10

nfinutes of Wl beconfing inactive, on the next cycle the time will

be extended by 15 seconds. The maximum delay is 3 nfinutes.

Once modified, the fan off delay will not change back to 45

seconds unless power is reset to the control. A LED indicator is

provided on the IGC to monitor operation. The IGC is located in

the gas burner section and can be accessed by opening the gas

access door. During normal operation, the LED is continuously

on.

Gas Heat with Economizer

When there is a call for heat as described above the indoor fan will

operate at the Supply Fan Maximum Speed

(Configuration--_UNIT--_FS_X) configuration setting and the

econonfizer outdoor air damper will move to the Econ Min at Max

Fan Speed (Configuration--_ECON--_MP_X) position. The

econonfizer outdoor air damper is closed when the indoor fan is

not operating.

Electric Heating Mode Using Space Temperature

Sensor T55, T56, or T58 (50PD Units Only)

For electric heat units with factory installed electric heat, the Type

of Heat Installed (Configuration--,HEAT--,HT.T¥) will be

factory set to a value of 2 and the Number of Heat Stages

(Configuration--,HEAT--,N.HTR) will be factory set to match the

installed heater. If electric heat is installed in the field the value for

Number of Heat Stages (Configuration-+HEAT-+N.HTR) must

be changed to match the number of heat stages installed.

Heat will not operate if the outdoor temperature is greater that the

value configured for the Heating Lockout Temperature

(Configuration-+HEAT-+HT_LO), Heat Minimum On Time

(Configuration-+HEAT-+MRTJt) and Heat Minimum Off Time

(Configuration-+HEAT-+MOT.H). Timeguards apply to both

stages of heating. Factory defaults values are 2 minute s ON and 2

nfinutes OFF.

If the indoor fan control is configured to cycle with the heating

demand by setting Fan ON When Occupied Heat Minimum On

Time (Configuration-+UNIT--.OC.FN) to NO, the fan will stop

after a delay configured by Fan-off Delay, Elect Heat

(Configuration-+HEAT-+FOD.E). The factory default for

Fan-off Delay, Elect Heat (Configuration--+HEAT--+FOD_E) is

30 seconds.

The electronic control uses information from the space sensor to

deternfine the number of heat stages required. Once the number of

stages needed for heating is deternfined, either Heat Stage 1 Relay

(Outputs-+HEAT--,HT.1), or Heat Stage 1 Relay

(Outputs-+HEAT-+HT.1) and Heat Stage 2 Relay

(Outputs-+HEAT-+HT.2) outputs will be turned on. See Gas

Heating Mode Using Space Temperature Sensor for more

information.

Supply-Air Temperature Sensor (SAT)

The SAT Heat Mode Sensing

(Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SATart) affects the Supply Air

Temperature (Temperatures-,AIR.T-,SAT) value displayed. This

configuration is accessible via the Scrolling Marquee on the SAT

Heat Mode Sensing (Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SATart).

When the SAT Heat Mode Sensing

(Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SATart) =DSBL, the Supply Air

Temperature (Temperatures-+AIR.T-+SAT) value on the

Scrolling Marquee and the CCN tables will be forced to zero when

heat outputs come ON and for 5nfinutes after. The default Supply

Air Temperature (Temperatures-+AIR.T-+SAT) location is at the

fan inlet, upstream of the heat section.

When the SAT Heat Mode Sensing

(Configuration--+HEAT--+SAT--+SATatI) = ENBL, the Supply

Air Temperature (Temperatures-+AIR.T-+SAT) sensor reading is

displayed at the Scrolling Marquee and the CCN tables during

heating mode. This setting should only be used if the original SAT

sensor wires are removed from the Main Base Board (MBB) and

replaced by an accessory SAT sensor located in the supply duct

downstream of the heat section. There are then two supply air

temperature limits that become active, the Maximum SAT Lower

Level (Configuration--+HEAT--+SAT--+SAM_L) the Maximum

SAT Upper Level (Configuration-+HEAT-+SAT-+SAM.U).

Any time the supply air temperature rises above the Maximum

SAT Lower Level (Configuration--+HEAT--+SAT--+SAM_L) the

heat staging will be linfited to what is currently on and no

additional stages can be added until the supply air temperature falls

below the Maximum SAT Lower Level

(Configuration-+HEAT-+SAT-+SAM.L). If the supply air

temperature rises above the Maximum SAT Upper Level

(Configuration-+HEAT-+SAT-+SAM.U), then heating will be

reduced by removing a heat stage. That stage can not be added

again until the Supply Air Temperature

(Temperatures-+AIR.T-+SAT) falls below the Maximum SAT

Lower Level (Configuration--+HEAT--+SAT--+SAM_L). If the

supply air temperature stays above the Maximum SAT Upper

Level (Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SAM.U), then another

stage will be removed after the Heat Stage Decrease Time

(Configuration--+HEAT--+H39EC).

Temperature Compensated Start

This logic is used when the unit is in the unoccupied state. The

control will calculate early Start Bias time based on Space

Temperature deviation from the occupied cooling and heating set

points. This will allow the control to start the unit so that the space

is at conditioned levels when the occupied period starts. This is

required for ASHRAE 90.1 compliance.

Setting Up the System

The settings for temperature compensated start can be found in the

local display under Configuration-+UNIT.

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT

TCS.C Temp.Cmp.Strt.Cool Factr 0 - 60 min TCSTCOOL

TCS.H Temp.Cmp.Strt.Heat Factr 0 - 60 min TCSTHEAT

Temp Comp Strt Cool Factr (TCS.C)

This is the factor for the start time bias equation for cooling.

Temp Comp Strt Heat Factr (TCS.H)

This is the factor for the start time bias equation for heating.

IMPORTANT: Temperature compensated start is disabled when

these factors are set to 0.

22

Temperature Compensated Start Logic

The following conditions nmst be met for the algorithm to run:

• Unit is in unoccupied state.

• Next occupied time is valid.

• Current time of day is valid.

• Valid space temperature reading is available (sensor or CCN

network).

The algorithm will calculate a Start Bias time in nfinutes using the

following equations:

If (space temperature > occupied cooling set point)

Start Bias Time -- (space temperature - occupied cooling set

point)* TCS.C

If (space temperature < occupied heating set point)

Start Bias Time = (occupied heating set point - space

temperature)* TCS Jt

When the Start Bias Time is greater than zero the algorithm will

subtract it from the next occupied time to calculate the new start

time. When the new start time is reached, the Temperature

Compensated Start mode is set, the fan is started and the unit

controlled as in an occupied state. Once set, Temperature

Compensated mode will stay on until the unit goes into the

Occupied mode. The Start Bias Time will be written into the CCN

Linkage Equipment Table if the unit is controlled in DAV mode. If

the Unoccupied Economizer Free Cool mode is active when

temperature compensated start begins, the Unoccupied Free Cool

mode will be stopped.

IMPORTANT: The maximum minutes Start Bias can be is 180.

Carrier Comfort Network (CCN)®

Configuration

It is possible to configure the ComfortLink T,_control to participate

as an element of the Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) system

directly from the local display. This section will deal with

explaining the various programmable options which are found

under the CCN sub-menu in the Configuration mode.

The maior configurations for CCN programming are located in the

local displays at Configuration---,CCN. See Appendix A.

CCN Address (CCN.A)

This configuration is the CCN address the rooftop is assigned.

CCN Address (CCN.B)

This configuration is the CCN bus the rooftop is assigned.

CCN Baud Rate (BAUD)

This configuration is the CCN baud rate.

CCN Time/Date Broadcast (BROD-->B.TIM)

If this configuration is set to ON, the control will periodically send

the time and date out onto the CCN bus once a minute. If this

device is on a CCN network then it will be important to make sure

that only one device on the bus has this configuration set to ON. If

more than one time broadcaster is present, problems with the time

will occur.

IMPORTANT: Only the time and date broadcaster can perform

daylight savings time adjustments. Even if the rooftop is stand

alone, the user may want to set this to ON to accomplish the

daylight/savings traction.

CCN OAT Broadcast (BROD-->B.OAT)

If this configuration is set to ON, the control will periodically

broadcast its outside-air temperature at a rate of once every 30

nfinutes.

Global Schedule Broadcast (BROD--,B.GS)

If this configuration is set to ON and the schedule number

(SCH.N) is between 65 and 99, then the control will broadcast the

internal time schedule once every 2 nfinutes.

CCN Broadcast Acknowledger (BROD-->B.ACK)

If this configuration is set to ON, then when any broadcasting is

done on the bus, this device will respond to and acknowledge.

Only one device per bus can be configured for this option.

Schedule Number (SCH.O-->SCH.N)

This configuration determines what schedule the control may

follow.

SCH.N =0

SCH.N =1

SCH.N = 65-99

The control is ahvays occupied.

The control follows its internal time

schedules. The user may enter any

number between 1 and 64 but it will

be overwritten to "1" by the control

as it only has one internal schedule.

The control is either set up to

receive to a broadcasted time

schedule set to this number or the

control is set up to broadcast its

internal time schedule (B.GS) to the

network and this is the global

schedule number it is broadcasting.

If this is the case, then the control

still follows its internal time

schedules.

Accept Global Holidays? (SCH.O-->HOL.G)

If a device is broadcasting the time on the bus, it is possible to

accept the time yet not accept the global holiday from the broadcast

message.

Override Time Limit (SCH.O--,OV.TL)

This configuration allows the user to decide how long an override

occurs when it is initiated. The override may be configured from 1

to 4 hours. If the time is set to 0, the override function will

become disabled.

Timed Override Hours (SCH.O-->OV.EX)

This displays the current number of hours left in an override. It is

possible to cancel an override in progress by writing "0" to this

variable, thereby removing the override time left.

SPT Override Enabled? (SCH.O---'OV.SP)

If a space sensor is present, then it is possible to override an

unoccupied period by pushing the override button on the T55 or

T56 sensor. This option allows the user to disable this flmction by

setting this configuration to NO.

Demand Limit

Demand Linfit Control may override the cooling algorithm to linfit

or reduce cooling capacity during run time. The term Demand

Linfit Control refers to the restriction of machine capacity to

control the amount of power that a machine will use. This can save

the owner money by linfiting peaks in the power supply. Demand

linfit control is intended to interface with an external network

system. This is through a CCN Loadshed POC Device or writing

to network points.

To linfit stages through network writes, the points Run Status

---,COOL---,MAX.C and Run Status---,HEAT---,MAXJI are forced

on the network through CCN points MAX_CAPC and

MAXHSTGS respectively. Force these to the desired maximum

cooling/dehumidification capacity and the maximum heating

stages, respectively. When there is no force on these points, they

automatically reset to allow fltll cooling/dehumidification capacity

and all heating stages to be used. These points are reset at

power-on/reset (POR).

When using the Loadshed POC to do Demand Limiting, the cool

capacity and heat stage limits under both Redline and Loadshed

conditions can be set individually with configuration decisions. If

the active stages are greater then the loadshed or redline

configurations when a loadshed or redline command is given, the

unit will reduce capacity or remove stages. The configuration

points can be found in Configuration---,CCN---,LDS.

23

Loadshed Group Number (S.GRP)

This corresponds to the loadshed supervisory devices that reside

elsewhere on the CCN network and broadcast loadshed and redline

commands to its associated equipment parts. This variable will

default to zero which is an invalid group number. This allows the

loadshed flmction to be disabled until configured.

Redline Max Capacity (R.MXC)

This configuration tells the unit the maximum

cooling/dehunfidification capacity allowed active during a

loadshed condition.

Redline Max Heat Stages (R.MXH)

This configuration tells the unit the maximum heating stages

allowed to be on during a redline condition.

Loadshed Max Heat Stages (R.MXH

This configuration tells the unit the maximum heating stages

allowed to be on during a loadshed condition.

The two Demand Linfiting methods can be active simultaneously.

The lowest cool capacity and heat stage linfits imposed by either

method are applied, and these "effective linfits" are shown in the

points CAPLIMIT (Run Status--+COOL--+LMT.C) and

HSTGLIMT (Run Status--+HEAT--+LMTJt), respectively. In

normal running mode, these limits will prevent capacity/stages

from being added, or capacity/stages to be removed, as applicable.

In test mode, these limits are ignored, and the user may continue to

operate at full load.

The point MODEDMDL (Run Status--+MODE--+DJ, MT) is used

to show if any Demand Limiting is in effect that prevents the unit

from operating either cooling or heating at full-capacity.

IMPORTANT: MODEDMDL may reflect that staging is NOT

limited even though Loadshed is active or the network points are

being forced, if the capacity/stage limits in effect are not less than

the capacity/stages present in the unit.

If amore drastic mode of Demand Limiting is required, the

network point HVACDOWN (Run Status--+MODE--+HV.DN) can

be used to prohibit the unit from selecting any HVAC mode, thus

preventing the operation of the supply fan, compressors, condenser

fans, and heat stages. This point must also be forced, and is reset

automatically when not forced, and at POR.

Alarm Handling

There are a variety of different alerts and alarms in the system.

Alerts are indicated by TXXX (where XXX is the alert number) on

the display and generally signify that the improperly functioning

circuit can restart without human interaction. If an alarm occurs,

indicated by AXXX (where XXX is the alarm number), the

damaged circuit will generally not restart without an alarm reset via

the Scrolling Marquee display or CCN.

The response of the control system to various alerts and alarms

depends on the seriousness of the particular alert or alarm. In the

mildest case, an alert does not affect the operation of the unit in any

manner. An alert can also cause a "strike." A "striking" alert will

cause the circuit to shut down for 15 minutes. This feature reduces

the likelihood of false alarms causing a properly working system to

be shut down incorrectly. If three strikes occur before the circuit

has an opportunity to show that it can flmction properly, the circuit

will strike out, causing the shutdown alarm for that particular

circuit. Once activated, the shutdown alarm can only be cleared via

an alarm reset.

However, circuits with strikes will be given an opportunity to reset

their strike counter to zero. As discussed above, a strike typically

causes the circuit to shut down. Fifteen nfinutes later, that circuit

will once again be allowed to run. If the circuit is able to run for 1

nfinute, its replacement circuit will be allowed to shut down (if not

required to run to satisfy requested stages). However, the

"troubled" circuit must run continuously for a user defined time

(Configuration-+COOL-+RST.C) with no detectable problems

before the strike counter will be reset to zero. Default value is 5

nfinutes.

CCN Alarm Broadcast

Operators of CCN networks nfight not want to be notified of

"striking" alerts for refrigerant circuits until the circuit has been

shut down due to 3 strikes. Set the cooling configuration of Alert

Each Strike (Configuration--+COOL--+ALM.N on display,

ALM_NOW on CCN) to YES to broadcast each circuit strike alert.

Set Alert Each Strike to NO to broadcast only circuit shut down.

Alert Each Strike configuration is ignored during Service Test and

all alerts are broadcast.

Alarm Relay Output

The alarm relay output is a normally open 24 vac output between

field connection terminal board terminals Cand X. Selection of

which alerts and alarms will result in closing of the alarm relay

may be set in the Alarm Relay Configuration

(Configuration--,ALM.O). Setting a configuration to YES will

result in the alarm output relay, ALRM, status of ON and 24 vac

between C and X when that particular condition is in an alarm

state. Setting a configuration to NO will result in no action by the

alarm output relay for that particular condition.

IMPORTANT: An accessory filter switch can be used along with

the alarm relay output function to indicate dirty filter service need.

See the Troubleshooting section for more information on viewing,

diagnosing, and clearing alerts and alarms.

TROUBLESHOOTING

The Scrolling Marquee display shows the actual operating

conditions of the unit while it is running. If there are alarms or

there have been alarms, they will be displayed in either the current

alarm list or the history alarm list. (See Table 8.) The Service Test

mode allows proper operation of the compressors, fans, and other

components to be checked while the unit is not operating. See

Service Test.

Complete Unit Stoppage

There are several conditions that can cause the unit not to provide

heating or cooling:

• If an alarm is active which causes the unit to shut down,

diagnose the problem using the information provided in Alarms

and Alerts section below.

• Cooling and heating loads are satisfied.

• Programmed occupancy schedule.

• General power failure.

• Tripped CB1 or CB2 (24-volt transformer circuit breakers).

• Unit is turned off through the CCN network.

• If outdoor-air temperature is less than the Compressor Lockout

Temperature (CA.LO) configuration value, unit cannot cool.

• If outdoor-air temperature is greater than the Heating Lockout

Temperature (HT_LO) configuration value, unit cannot heat.

Restart Procedure

Before attempting to restart the machine, check the alarm list to

determine the cause of the shut down. If the shutdown alarm for a

particular control function has occurred, deternfine and correct the

cause before allowing the unit to run under its own control again.

When there is problem, the unit should be diagnosed in Service

Test mode. The alarms nmst be reset before the control function

can operate in either Normal mode or Service Test mode.

Control Module Communication

Red LED

Proper operation of the MBB, ECB and AUX1 control boards can

be visually checked by looking at the red status LEDs. When

operating correctly, the red status LEDs should blink in unison at a

rate of once every 2 seconds. If the red LED on the ECB and

24

AUXIis notblinking,checktheDIPswitchpositionsonthe

board,If theredLEDsarenotblinkinginunison,verifythat

correctpowerisbeingsuppliedtoallmodules,A blinkingred

LEDattherateofoncepersecondmeansthatsoftwareisnot

loadedontheboard,Also,besurethattheboardissuppliedwith

thecurrentsoftware,Ifnecessary,reloadcurrentsoftware,Aboard

LEDthatislitcontinuouslyshouldbereplaced,

Green LED

The MBB, ECB and AUX1 each have one green LED, The Local

Equipment Network (LEN) LED should always be blinking

whenever power is on, If LEN LED is not blinking, check LEN

connections for potential communication errors (MBB J3, J4, and

J5), Communication between modules is accomplished by a 3-wire

sensor bus, These 3 wires run in parallel from module to module,

The J4 connector on the MBB also provides both power and

communication directly to the Scrolling Marquee display, The J5

connector on the MBB provides a LEN interface at the field

connection ternfinal (TB).

Yellow LED

The MBB has one yellow LED which is used to indicate CCN

communication activity. The Carrier Comfort Network@ (CCN)

LED will blink during times of network communication.

Communication Failures

If the Scrolling Marquee or Navigator display Conmmnication

Failure or the green or yellow LED's do not flash on the boards

then the problem could be the communication chip on one of the

control boards (MBB, ECB or AUX1). Use an ohm meter to

measure the resistance on the communication pins of the boards to

determine if the board is bad. If the reading is less than half the

value indicated in Table 7, then the board needs to be replaced.

Table 7 1 LEN and CCN Communication Resistances

Device (CCN) Resistance between Pins/

Board Serial

Number

Prior to 4702N

Starting 4702N

Prior to 0803N

Starting 0803N

(LEN) Resistance between Pins/ Connector

Pins 5 to 6

7.5K Q

J5

9.9K £-2

J5

Connector

Pins 1 to 2

7.5K _2

J3, J4, & J5

9.9K £-2

J3, J4, & J5

5.2K £-._

J2

9.9K Q

J2

16K Q

J9

Pins 1to 3 Pins 2 to 3 Pins 5 to 7 Pins 6 to 7

15K C_ 7.5K C_ 15K C_ 7.5K C_

J3, J4, & J5 J3, J4, & J5 J5 J5

MBB 18.9K Q9.9K Q18.9K Q9.9K Q

J3, J4, & J5 J3, J4, & J5 J5 J5

5.9K 05K 0

J2 J2

ECB 18.9K Q 9.9K 0

J2 J2

29K 013.5K Q

AUX1 J9 J9 - - -

IMPORTANT: The resistive values should be read when the board is powered off and the unit is locked out.

Alarms and Alerts

Viewing and Clearing Unit Alarms

Presence of active alarms will be indicated on the Scrolling

Marquee display by the Alarm Status light turning on and by the

number of active alarms being displayed in the automatic View of

Run Status. Presence of active alarms may also be signaled on the

Alarm Output terminals. Each alarm may also be broadcast on the

CCN network. Active alarms and past alarm history can be

reviewed and cleared via the local display or aCCN device. The

following menu locations are used for the local display:

Alarms-->R.CURR (Reset All Current Alarms)

Change to YES to reset all active alarms. Turning unit power off

will also reset all current alarms.

Alarms-->R.HIST (Reset Alarm History)

Change to YES to reset the alarm history. Turning unit power off

will not reset the alarm history.

Alarms-->CURR (Currently Active Alarms)

Use the ENTER key, then scroll through any alarm numbers using

the up and down arrow keys. Alarms are displayed in numerical

order.

Alarms-->HIST (Alarm History)

Use the ENTER key, then scroll through any alarm numbers using

the up and down arrow keys. Up to 20 alarms are displayed in

order of occurrence, with time and date.

The description for an alarm can be viewed on the Scrolling

Marquee display by pressing ESCAPE and ENTER keys

sinmltaneously while displaying the alarm code number. Be sure to

expand description for each code, because in some cases there are

different possible descriptions and causes for the same code

number.

Diagnostic Alarm Codes and Possible Causes

Alert Code T051

There are 5different texts for this alert code. There are three

different alerts, two of which have corresponding test mode alerts

indicated with "Service Test" in the expanded text. Pressing enter

and esc on the marquee or navigator to expand the T051 alert will

show you one of the below alerts. Make sure the expanded text is

read correctly before troubleshooting.

• Digital Compressor Control Board Alarm

This alert occurs when the Digital Scroll Controller (DSC)

energizes its alarm relay. Refer to the DSC's LED diagnostic to

determine which of the nine codes are present. Power cycle will

clear the DSC's LED code. When the DSC's alarm clears, this

alert will automatically clear.

• Compressor AI Safety Trip

This Alert indicates that Current Sensing AI (CS.AI) has been

enabled. The unit does not support the use of a current sensor at

this time. Change the CS.A1 to disable and this alert will clear

and not return.

(Configuration-+COOL -+CS.41)

• Compressor AI Current Detected After Turnoff

This Alert indicates that Current Sensing A1 (CS.A1) has been

enabled. The unit does not support the use of a current sensor at

this time. Change the CS.AI to disable and this alert will clear

and not return.

(Con figuration--,COOL--,CS.41)

Alert Code T064 -Circuit A Saturated Condensing

Temperature Thermistor Failure

This alert occurs when the temperature is outside the range -40 °to

240°F (-40 ° to 116°C). When this occurs, the control will use

25

only the outdoor temperature to control the outdoor fans. If both

the SCT and OAT fail, then circuit shutdown alarm will occur also.

The cause of the alert is usually a faulty thernfistor, a shorted or

open thernfistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection.

Alert Code T066 -Circuit A Saturated Suction Temperature

Thermistor Failure

This alert occurs when the unit's suction transducers are turned off

internally. Cooling will not operate. This is usually due to a

network force on a non exposed CCN point. Reload factory

defaults or reinstall software on the MBB. Consult the network

manager if alert continues.

Alert Code T073 -Outdoor Air Temperature Thermistor

Failure

This alert occurs when the temperature is outside the range -40 ° to

240°F (-40 ° to 116°C). For all units, all ambient temperature

lockout linfits for cooling and heating are ignored. For all units, if

both SCT and OAT fail, then circuit shutdown alarm will also

occur. For econonfizer equipped units, the econonfizer will not

operate to provide cooling. The econonfizer will still operate for

ventilation. The control will use condenser temperatures for

outdoor fan control. For units with CCH crankcase heat relay

control, the crankcase heat relay will be turned on if any

compressor is off. This alert resets automatically. The cause of the

alert is usually a faulty thernfistor, a shorted or open thernfistor

caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection.

Alert Code T074 -Space Temperature Thermistor Failure

This alert occurs when the temperature is outside the range -40 ° to

240°F (-40 ° to 116°C). Cooling and heating will not operate. For

econonfizer equipped units, the econonfizer will still operate for

ventilation. This alert resets automatically. The cause of the alert is

usually a faulty thernfistor in the T-55, T-56, or T-58 device, a

shorted or open thernfistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose

connection.

Alert Code T075 -Supply Air Temperature Thermistor

Failure

This alert occurs when the temperature is outside the range -40 ° to

240°F (-40 ° to 116°C). Econonfizer cooling and compressor

operation cannot occur while this alert is active. The unit will not

be allowed to enter cooling mode. This alert resets automatically.

The cause of the alert is usually a faulty thernfistor, a shorted or

open thernfistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection.

Alert Code T076 -Return Air Thermistor Failure

This alert occurs when the temperature is outside the range -40 ° to

240°F (-40 ° to 116°C). Differential dry bulb crossover control

can not occur. Free cooling can only be controlled by the OAT and

enthalpy. This alert resets automatically. The cause of the alert is

usually a faulty thernfistor, a shorted or open thernfistor caused by

a wiring error, or a loose connection.

Alert Code T077 -Space Relative Humidity Sensor Failure

This alert occurs when the input is less than 3.5 mA and the sensor

is configured as installed. If a hunfidistat is not installed, then

dehunfidification will not be functional. Check sensor and wiring.

This alert clears automatically.

IMPORTANT: An ECB must be installed to use the space

relative hunfidity sensor.

Alert Code T092 -Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer

Failure

This alert occurs when the board does not properly read the

transducer voltage. A circuit cannot run when this alert is active.

Use the Scrolling Marquee to reset the alarm. The cause of the alert

is usually a faulty transducer, faulty 5-v power supply, or a loose

connection.

Alert Code T102 -Compressor A1 Current Sensor Failure

This Alert indicates that Current Sensing A1 (CS.A1) has been

enabled. The unit does not support the use of a current sensor at

this time. Change the CS.A1 to disable and this alert will clear and

not return.

(Con figuration--+COOL--+CS_41)

Alert Code Tll0 - Circuit A Loss of Charge

This alert has "Service Test" text that will be displayed if the alert

occurred during service test. This alert occurs when the

compressor is OFF and the suction pressure is less than 5psig and

OAT is greater than -5°F for I continuous minute. Use the

Scrolling Marquee to reset the alert. The cause of the alert is

usually low refrigerant pressure or afaulty suction pressure. This

alert only occurs when the compressor is OFF because the low

refrigerant pressure alarms (alert T133) handle this situation when

the compressor is operating.

Alert Code T126 - Circuit A High Discharge Pressure

This alert has "Service Test" text that will be displayed if the alert

occurred during service test. This alert occurs when alert T051 is

active while the appropriate condensing temperature is greater than

150°F. This alert reset automatically. The cause of the alert is

usually an overcharged system, high outdoor ambient temperature

coupled with dirty outdoor coil, plugged filter drier, or a faulty

high-pressure switch. See Alert T051 for diagnostic procedure.

Alert Code T133 -Circuit A Low Refrigerant Pressure

This alert has "Service Test" text that will be displayed if the alert

occurred during service test. This alert occurs when the

compressor is operating and the evaporating temperature

(converted from the suction pressure) is less than configured low

suction control levels, Configuration-+COOL-+SST-+SST.1

(Low Suction - Level 1) or SST.2 (Low Suction - Level 2) or

SST.3 (Low Suction Level 3). The circuit SST value must be less

than SST.I (for 5nfinutes), SST.2 (for 4 nfinutes), or SST.3 (for 3

minutes when using the economizer and 1.5 minutes when not

using the econonfizer) for the alert to occur. When the outdoor

temperature is less than 40°F, the above values are reduced I°F for

every 2°F the OAT is below 40°F. An alert will also occur if the

circuit SST value is less than SST.3 -5°F for 20 seconds and the

outdoor temperature is above 40°F. All the above timers will reset

if the suction temperature rises above SST.O for I nfinute. This

alert causes a strike for the respective circuit. This alert will activate

when the coil becomes frosted. However, during the 15-nfinute

reset period, the coils will thaw and strike should clear and restart if

there is nothing else wrong with the circuit. The alert resets

automatically. The cause of the alert is usually low refrigerant

charge, dirty filters, evaporator fan operating backwards, loose or

broken belt, plugged filter drier, faulty transducer, excessively cold

return air, or stuck open economizer when the ambient temperature

is low.

Alert Code T143 -Circuit A Failure to Pressurize

This alert has "Service Test" text that will be displayed if the alert

occurred during service test. This alert occurs when the

compressor turns on and the difference between suction and

discharge pressure is less then the Ckt A Minimum Pressure

(Configuration-+COOL-+SST-+PSIJ)). The pressure difference

must be greater then PSI.D (default is 20 psi) after 60 seconds and

stay above it while running the compressor. This alert causes a

strike for the respective circuit. The alert resets automatically. The

cause of the alert is usually compressor wiring causing reverse

rotation or a faulty compressor.

Alert Code T153 - Real Time Clock Hardware Failure

This alert occurs when the RTC clock chip on the MBB is not

responding. Time and date functions will not operate, such as local

occupancy schedules. The unit will default to 24/7 unoccupied

mode. Recovery is automatic but MBB board replacement may be

necessary. Cycling power to the control and reconfiguring the time

and date should be tried before board replacement.

Alarm Code A154 - Serial EEPROM Hardware Failure

The unit will completely shut down. The serial EEPROM chip on

the MBB, which stores the unit's configuration, is not responding.

26

Recovery is automatic but MBB board replacement may be

necessary. Cycling the power to the control should be tried before

board replacement.

Alarm Code T155 - Serial EEPROM Storage Failure Error

Configuration data in the serial EEPROM chip can not be verified.

The unit will run to last know good values or defaults, and

therefore operating errors may occur. Recovery is automatic but

MBB board replacement may be necessary. Cycling power to the

control and reconfiguring the control points should be tried before

board replacement.

Alarm Code A156 -Critical Serial EEPROM Storage Fail

Error

The unit will completely shut down. Critical configuration data in

the serial EEPROM chip can not be verified. Recovery is automatic

but MBB board replacement may be necessary. Cycling power to

the control and reconfiguring the critical control points should be

tried before board replacement. There are no critical configurations

in the 48/50PD.

Alert Code A157 -A/D Hardware Failure

The unit will completely shut down. The analog to digital

conversion chip on the MBB has failed. Recovery is automatic but

MBB board replacement may be necessary. Cycling power to the

control should be tried before board replacement.

Alert Code A163 -Circuit A Down due to Failure

This alarm occurs when a circuit has 3 strikes. Use the Scrolling

Marquee display to reset the alarm. Investigate the alarm that

caused the strikes to occur.

Alert Code T178 -Loss of Communication with the Capacity

Control Board

This alert occurs when the MBB cannot conmmnicate with the

AUX1 board. Unit operation will be disabled. This is usually

caused by a wiring problem. Investigate using the Low Voltage

Schematic, check that the AUX1 address is correct, and verify the

resistance between pins on the LEN connections.

Alert Code T179 -Loss of Communication with the

Economizer Control Board

This alert occurs when the MBB cannot conmmnicate with the

ECB. Economizer operation will be disabled. This is usually

caused by a wiring problem. If a relative humidity sensor is

installed and configured but there is not an ECB installed on the

unit, this alert will be generated (the ECB is required for RH sensor

operation). Investigate using the Low Voltage Schematic, check

that the ECB address is correct, and verify the resistance between

pins on the LEN connections.

Alert Code T180 -Loss of Communication with the

Economizer Actuator

This alert occurs when the ECB cannot conmmnicate with the

Belimo Actuator. If the analog signal is connected properly, the

economizer will still be controlled through it. This is usually

caused by a wiring problem, actuator failure, or the wrong actuator.

Investigate using the Low Voltage Schematic, make sure the

actuator is a MFT conmmnication actuator, and verify the feedback

signal from the actuator is correct.

Alarm Code A200 -Linkage Timeout -Comm Failure

This alarm occurs when the MBB fails to communicate with a

Linkage device. This only occurs when the MBB has previously

conmmnicated with a Linkage device since last power cycle. If a

back up sensor was not installed the T074 alert will occur shortly

after this one. Reset power to the unit and verify Linkage is

communicating.

Alarm Code A404 - Fire Shutdown

This alarm occurs when the shutdown input is either open or

closed depending upon its configuration. This alarm is usually

caused by an auxiliary device that is trying to shut down the unit,

e.g., smoke detector. The configuration for this switch input can be

found at variable Configuration-+UNIT-+FS.SW. Verify that the

configuration is set correct, verify the wiring and auxiliary device.

This alarm resets automatically.

Alert Code T408 - Dirty Air Filter

This alert occurs when the Filter Status switch senses aplugged

filter for 120 continuous seconds after the indoor fan has been

running for 10 seconds. Because the Dirty Air Filter switch can be

configured normally opened or closed, the switch might be open or

closed. The configuration for this switch input can be found at

variable Configuration-+UNIT--,FL.SW. Verify that the

configuration is set correct and verify the wiring and filter status

switch. The hose should be connected to the low side of the switch.

This alert resets automatically.

Alert Code T409

There are 2 different texts for this alert code. Pressing enter and esc

on the marquee or navigator to expand the T409 alert will show

you one of the below alerts. Make sure the expanded text is read

correctly before troubleshooting.

• Fan Status Switch On, Fan Contactor Off

This alarm occurs when the fan status switch has sensed that the

indoor fan has been on for 10 seconds and the indoor fan

feedback has determined that the indoor fan should be off.

Because the Fan Status switch can be configured normally

opened or closed, the switch might be open or closed. The

configuration for this switch input can be found at

Configuration-+UNIT-+FN.SW. Verify that the configuration

is set correctly. Verify the wiring and fan status switch. The hose

should be connected to the high side of the switch. If the IDF is

configured to shut down the unit when this alarm occurs

(Configuration-+UNIT-+IDF.F =YES), then this alarm can

only be reset manually and the unit is shut down. If the IDF is

not configured to shut the unit down when this alarm occurs

(IDF.F = NO), then this alarm resets automatically and no

specific control action is taken.

• Fan Status Switch Off, Fan Contactor On

This alert occurs when the fan status switch has sensed that the

indoor fan has been off for 10 seconds and the indoor fan

feedback has determined that the indoor fan should be on.

Because the Fan Status switch can be configured normally

opened or closed, the switch might be open or closed. The

configuration for this switch input can be found at

Configuration-+UNIT-+FN.SW. Verify that the configuration

is set correctly. Verify the wiring and fan status switch. The hose

should be connected to the high side of the switch. If the IDF is

configured to shut down the unit down when this alert occurs

(Configuration-+UNIT-+IDF.F =YES), then this alarm can

only be reset manually and the unit is shut down. If the IDF is

not configured to shut the unit down when this alert occurs

(IDF.F = NO), then this alert resets automatically and no specific

control action is taken.

Alert Code T414

There are 6 different alerts under this one alert code. Pressing enter

and esc on the marquee or navigator to expand the T414 alert will

show you one of the below alerts. All these alerts are generated by

the Belimo actuator and reported to the ECB. These alerts can only

occur if the ECB is controlling the actuator digitally through MFT.

• Economizer Damper Actuator Out of Calibration

This alert occurs when the economizer actuator reports a control

angle (Operating Modes-+ECON-+C_4NG) less than the

minimum control angle (Configuration-+ECON-+M_4NG).

27

Initiate economizer calibration (Service Test--,INDP--, E.CAL)

using the Service Test menu. The economizer calibration

procedure will try to find new maximum open and closed

positions. If the alert does not clear automatically after the

calibration procedure is complete, investigate what is limiting

economizer rotation. After that step, run another calibration, but

first power off unit (spring return the damper), loosen the

actuator clamp, and while pushing the damper closed tighten the

clamp. This alert resets automatically.

Economizer Damper Actuator Torque Above Load Limit

This alert occurs when the actuator load is too high. Investigate

to determine what is increasing damper load and verify that the

actuator is the correct size for the unit. This alert resets

automatically.

• Economizer Damper Actuator Hunting Excessively

This alert occurs when the commanded damper position is

changing too rapidly. The stop jog ration must be less than 21%

to clear this alert. Leave the actuator powered with no signal for

a few hours to allow the ratio to decrease (may have to wait

longer than a few hours). If the alert continues, determine if the

ECB or actuator is bad. This alert resets automatically.

• Economizer Damper Stuck or Jammed

This alarm occurs when the actuator senses it can no longer

move. Investigate what is stopping the rotation of the actuator

and fix. This alert resets automatically.

• Economizer Damper Actuator Mechanical Failure

This alert occurs when the actuator senses a catastrophic failure.

Investigate actuator and replace if necessary. This alert resets

automatically.

• Economizer Damper Actuator Direction Switch Wrong Position

This alert occurs when the economizer damper direction switch

is in the wrong position. The direction switch should be in the

clockwise position and the actuator should be mounted so that

the CW face of the actuator is accessible. Correct if necessary.

This alert clears automatically.

Alert Code T415 - IAQ Input Out of Range

This alert occurs when the IAQ input (on ECB) is less than 3.5 mA

and the sensor is configured as installed. IAQ operation will be

disabled. Check sensor and wiring. This alert clears automatically.

Alert Code T416 - OAQ Input Out of Range

This alert occurs when the OAQ input (on ECB) is less than 3.5

mA and the sensor is configured as installed. OAQ operation will

be disabled. Check sensor and wiring. This alert clears

automatically,

28

Table8-- ComfortLink T_,Alarm Codes

ALARM

OR

ALERT

NUMBER

T051

T064

T066

T073

T074

T075

T076

T077

T092

T102

Tl10

T126

T133

T143

T153

A154

T155

A156

A157

DESCRIPTION

Digital Compressor Control Board Alarm

Compressor A1 Safety Trip

Service Test -Compressor A1 Safety Trip

Compressor A1 Current Detected After

Turnoff

Service Test - Compressor A1 Current

Detected After Turnoff

Circuit A Saturated Condensing Temp

Thermistor Failure

Circuit A Saturated Suction Temperature

Thermistor Failure

Outdoor Air Temperature Thermistor Failure

Space Temperature Thermistor Failure

Supply Air Temperature Thermistor Failure

Return Air Thermistor Failure

Space Relative Humidity Sensor Failure

Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer

Failure

Compressor A1 Current Sensor Failure

Circuit A Loss of Charge

Service Test - Circuit A Loss of Charge

Circuit A High Discharge Pressure

Service Test - Circuit A High Discharge

Pressure

Circuit A Low Refrigerant Pressure

Service Test -Circuit A Low Refrigerant

Pressure

Circuit A Failure To Pressurize

Service Test - Circuit A Failure To

Pressurize

ACTION TAKEN BY

CONTROL

Real Timeclock Hardware Failure

Serial EEPROM Hardware Failure

Serial EEPRQM Storage Failure Error

Critical Serial EEPRQM Storage Fail Error

A/D Hardware Failure

Circuit A Down Due to Failure

Service Test - Circuit A Down Due to

Failure

No action

Add Strike for Circuit A

Add Strike for Circuit A

Turn off all

compressors

Turn off all

compressors

Use OAT to control

Outdoor fans

No Cooling

No cooling with

economizer

No heating or cooling

No cooling mode

No differential DB

crossover

If RH.S = Yes, then no

indoor humidity control

Shutdown Circuit A

If CS.A1 = Enable,

then no T051 current

alarm

Shutdown Circuit A

Shutdown Circuit A

Shutdown Circuit A

Shutdown Circuit A

Add Strike for Circuit A

Add Strike for Circuit A

Add Strike for Circuit A

Add Strike for Circuit A

No time and date

schedule operation

Unit Shutdown

Unit operation errors

Unit Shutdown

Unit Shutdown

Shutdown Circuit A

RESET

METHOD

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Manual

Automatic

Manual

Manual

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Automatic

Manual

A163 Shutdown Circuit A Manual

PROBABLE CAUSE

See the DSC's LEDs for troubleshooting

Current Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and

should be off

Current Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and

should be off

Current Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and

should be off

Current Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and

should be off

Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor caused by wiring

error or loose connection.

Suction transducers internally forced inactive

Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor caused by wiring

error or loose connection.

Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor caused by wiring

error or loose connection.

Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor caused by wiring

error or loose connection.

Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor caused by wiring

error or loose connection.

Faulty, shorted, or open sensor caused by wiring

error or loose connection.

Faulty transducer, faulty 5-V power supply, or loose

connection

Current Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and

should be off

Low refrigerant or faulty suction pressure transducer

Low refrigerant or faulty suction pressure transducer

An overcharged system, high outdoor ambient

temperature coupled with dirty outdoor coil, plugged

filter drier, or a faulty high-pressure switch.

An overcharged system, high outdoor ambient

temperature coupled with dirty outdoor coil, plugged

filter drier, or a faulty high-pressure switch.

Low refrigerant charge, dirty filters, evaporator fan

turning backwards, loose or broken fan belt, plugged

filter drier, faulty transducer, excessively cold return

air, or stuck open economizer when the ambient

temperature is low.

Low refrigerant charge, dirty filters, evaporator fan

turning backwards, loose or broken fan belt, plugged

filter drier, faulty transducer, excessively cold return

air, or stuck open economizer when the ambient

temperature is low.

Wiring causing reverse rotation or faulty compressor

Wiring causing reverse rotation or faulty compressor

No time/date configured, software failure, or MBB

failure

Software failure or MBB failure

Software failure or MBB failure

Software failure or MBB failure

Software failure or MBB failure

Circuit has 3 strikes or has been locked out by

another alarm

Circuit has 1 strike or has been locked out by another

alarm

See Legend on next page

29

Table8-- ComfortLink T_Alarm Codes (cont)

ALARM

OR ACTION TAKEN BY RESET

DESCRIPTION PROBABLE CAUSE

ALERT CONTROL METHOD

NUMBER

T178 Loss of Communication with the Capacity Unit shutdown -HVAC Automatic Communication wiring problem with AUX1 or faulty

Control Board disable MBB, ECB, or AUXl

T179 Loss of communication with the Economizer No economizer Automatic Communication wiring problem with ECB or faulty

Control Board operation MBB, ECB, or AUXl

Loss of communication with the Economizer No economizer

T180 Actuator operation Automatic Communication wiring problem with actuator.

No Linkage Operation Received a table write from Linkage before, now not

A200 Linkage Timeout Error - Comm Failure fall back to local SPT Automatic receiving any linked commands

A404 Fire Shutdown Unit Shutdown Automatic Smoke detected by smoke detector

T408 Dirty Filter Alert Generated Automatic Dirty Filter

If IDF.F =

If IDF.F = Yes, then Unit YES, then

Fan Status Switch ON, Fan Contactor OFF Shutdown Manual, Bad Fan Status Switch. Configuration incorrect.

otherwise

T409 automatic

If IDF.F =

Fan Status Switch OFF, Fan Contactor ON If IDF.F = Yes, then Unit YES,Manual,thenTripped Circuit Breaker. Broken belt. Bad indoor fan

Shutdown otherwise motor. Configuration incorrect. Bad fan status switch.

automatic

Economizer Damper Actuator Out of Calibrate economizer (E.CAL). If problem still exist

Calibration Alert Generated Automatic then determine what is limiting economizer rotation.

Economizer Damper Actuator Torque Above

Load Limit Alert Generated Automatic Actuator load too high. Check damper load.

Economizer Damper Actuator Hunting Alert Generated Automatic Damper position changing too quickly.

T414 Excessively No economizer motion. Check damper blades, gears,

Economizer Damper Stuck or Jammed Alert Generated Automatic and actuator.

Economizer Damper Actuator Mechanical

Failure Alert Generated Automatic Check actuator and replace if necessary.

Economizer Damper Actuator Direction

Switch Wrong Alert Generated Automatic Actuator direction control switch (CCW, CW) wrong.

Bad sensor, bad wiring, or sensor configured

T415 IAQ Input Out of Range No IAQ Operations Automatic incorrectly.

Bad sensor, bad wiring, or sensor configured

T416 OAQ Input Out of Range No OAQ Operations Automatic incorrectly.

LEGEND

ECB -Economizer ControlBoard

IGC Integrated Gas Controller

MBB - Main Base Board

OAT - Outdoor-Air Thermistor

Cooling Troubleshooting

Use the Scrolling Marquee display or a CCN device to view the

cooling status display and the cooling diagnostic display (see

Appendix A) for information on the cooling operation. Check the

current alarms and alarm history for any cooling alarm codes and

correct any causes. (See Table 9.)

Verify any unique control configurations per installed site

requirements or accessories. If alarms conditions are corrected and

cleared, operation of the compressors and fans may be verified by

using the Service Test mode. (See Table 5.) See Table 9 for general

cooling service analysis.

30

Table9-- CoolingService Analysis

PROBLEM

Compressor and Fan Will Not Start

Compressor Cycles (other than

normally satisfying demand).

Compressor Operates

Continuously.

Excessive Condenser Pressures,

Condenser Fans Not Operating,

Excessive Suction Pressure,

Suction Pressure Too Low.

LEGEND

CB - Circuit Breaker

DSC - Digital Scroll Controller

TXV - Thermostatic Expansion 'Calve

VFD - X?ariable Frequency Drive

CAUSE

Power failure.

Fuse blown or circuit breaker tripped. Check CB1 and

CB2.

Disconnect off.

Compressor time guard to prevent short cycling.

Occupancy schedule set point or supply set point not

calling for Cooling.

Outdoor temperature too low.

Active alarm.

Insufficient line voltage.

Active alarm.

Unit undersized for load.

Occupancy schedule set point or supply set point too

low. Compressor running at lowest capacity

Compressor contactor stuck on

Dirty air filters.

Low refrigerant charge.

Condenser coil dirty or restricted.

Loose condenser thermistors.

Dirty condenser coil.

Refrigerant overcharge.

Faulty TXV.

Condenser air restricted or air short cycling.

Restriction in liquid tube.

No Power to contactors.

High heat load.

Faulty TXV.

Refrigerant overcharged.

Dirty air filters.

Low refrigerant charge.

Faulty TXV.

Insufficient evaporator airflow.

Indoor Fan Running to slow or off while compressor is

on

Temperature too low in conditioned area (low

return-air temperature).

REMEDY

Call power company.

Replace fuse or reset circuit breaker.

Power disconnect.

Check time guards using ComfortLink_' Scrolling

Marquee also the DSC has a 2 minute anti-short time

Check cooling demand using ComfortLink Scrolling

Marquee.

Check Compressor Lockout Temperature using

ComfortLink Scrolling Marquee.

Check active alarms using ComfortLink Scrolling

Marquee and DSC alert flash codes

Determine cause and correct.

Check active alarms using ComfortLink Scrolling

Marquee and DSC alert flash codes

Decrease load or increase size of unit.

Check and adjust set points if needed.

Check cooling demand using ComfortLink Scrolling

Marquee and DSC alert flash codes.

Replace filters.

Check pressure, locate leak, repair, evacuate, and

recharge.

Clean coil or remove restriction.

Tighten thermistors.

Clean coil.

Recover excess refrigerant.

1.Check TXV bulb mounting and secure tightly to suction

line and insulate.

2.Replace TXV (and filter drier) if stuck open or closed.

Determine cause and correct.

Remove restriction.

Fuse blown or plug at motor loose.

Check for sources and eliminate

1.Check TXV bulb mounting and secure tightly to suction

line and insulate.

2.Replace TXV (and filter drier) if stuck open or closed.

Recover excess refrigerant.

Replace air filters.

Check pressure, locate leak, repair, evacuate, and

recharge.

1.Check TXV bulb mounting and secure tightly to suction

line and insulate.

2.Replace TXV (and filter drier) if stuck open or closed.

Check belt tension. Check for other restrictions.

Check VFD display is illuminated and shows Auto

mode. Power supplied to VFD. Check O-lOvdc signal

present at AUXl board.

Reset thermostat or occupancy schedule.

Digital Scroll Controller (DSC) Troubleshooting

The 48/50PD units are equipped with a digital scroll compressor.

The compressor has a solenoid unloader that is controlled by the

digital scroll controller (DSC). This DSC turns the unloader on

and off within a 20 second window. The amount of time the

unloader is on verses off within that 20 seconds depends on the

desired capacity. This means that the ComfortLink control does

not have direct control of the compressor, but it does however

control the power to the DSC and the signal for commanded

capacity.

The DSC has three LED lights to help during troubleshooting;

green, yellow, and red The DSC will run the compressor

unloaded for a half a second on start up and one second on

shutdown to prevent reverse rotation. A two minute anti-short

time guard is applied by the DSC after shutting the compressor off.

The DSC has an alarm relay output that is connected to the MBB.

When this MBB input switch is closed, the MBB activates the

T051 alert. Check the LED status on the DSC for flash alarm

codes and correct any problems. Table 10 shows the DSC's Red

LED flash codes.

POWER LED (green) -- indicates voltage is present at the

24VAC power terminal. When the 2 minute anti-short cycle timer

is active, the green LED will flash.

UNLOADED LED (yellow) -- indicates the unloader solenoid

status. The LED is on when the unloader solenoid is energized.

ALERT LED (red) -- conmmnicates an abnormal system

condition through a unique flash code.

All LEDs Flashing at the Same Rate -- indicates 24VAC supply

is too low for operation.

All LEDs On Solid at the Same Time -- indicates Digital Scroll

Controller failure.

Flash Code 1 -- Reserved for future use

Flash Code 2 -- High Discharge Temperature

This occurs when the discharge temperature thermistor (DTT) has

31

measuredatemperatureabove268F(131C)orthethermistorhas

shortcircuited(jumperedout).

TheDSCwillde-energizethecompressorcontactorandunloader

solenoid,andthealarmrelaycontactswillclosecausingaT051

alertontheComfortLinkControl. Thecompressorwill be

allowedtorestartafter30minutedelayandaftertheDTTreads

below250F(120C).Theflashcodeandalarmrelaycontactswill

beresetafterthecompressorhasrunfor60minuteswithoutany

otherALERTs.If fivedischargetemperatureALERTshave

occurredwithinfourhours,theDSCwilllockoutthecompressor.

Thelockoutcanonlyberesetbycyclingthe24VACpoweroffand

on.

Flash Code 3 -- Compressor Protector Trip

This occurs when the demand signal from the system controller is

greater than 1.44VDC and there is no compressor current detected.

This could be due to the compressor's internal overload protector

being open, fuse or breaker open, power disconnected to

compressor contactor, compressor power wiring not run through

DSC current transformer port or a compressor contactor failure.

The DSC will de-energize the compressor contactor and unloader

solenoid and the alarm relay contacts will close causing a T051

alert on the ComfortLink Control. The DSC will wait for the two

minute anti-short cycle timer to time out and if the system

controller demand signal is still greater than 1.44VDC, energize the

compressor contactor again. If compressor current is detected on

the restart, the ALERT code and alarm relay output will reset. The

DSC will attempt to restart compressor as long as the system

controller demand is above 1.44VDC. There is no lockout feature

for this ALERT.

Flash Code 4 -- Locked Rotor

A locked rotor condition in the compressor is sensed by the DSC

on four consecutive start ups. The DSC will de-energize the

compressor contactor and unloader solenoid and the alarm relay

contacts will close causing a T051 alert on the ComfortLink

Control. This code results in a lockout and can only be reset by

cycling the 24VAC power off and on.

Flash Code 5-- Demand Signal Loss

This occurs when the demand signal input has dropped below

0.5VDC. The demand input signal wire may be disconnected or

the system controller providing the signal may not be powered.

The DSC will de-energize the compressor contactor and unloader

solenoid and the alarm relay contacts will close causing a T051

alert on the ComfortLink Control. Once the system controller

demand signal input has risen above 0.5VDC, the ALERT code

and alarm relay output will reset. If the demand signal is above

1.44VDC and the anti-short cycle timer has timed out, the

compressor will restart.

Flash Code 6 -- Discharge Thermistor Fault

This occurs when the DSC is not receiving a signal from the

discharge temperature thermistor (DTT). The thermistor may be

missing, disconnected or a wire broken. The alarm relay contacts

will close and the DSC will not increase the capacity of the

compressor beyond 50% loading. This ALERT code and alarm

relay output are reset by reconnecting the DTT.

Flash Code 7 --Reserved for future use

Flash Code 8 -- Compressor Contactor Fault

This occurs when the compressor current is detected when the

system controller demand signal is below 1.44VDC. The

compressor contactor may have welded contacts or the contacts

may be mechanically jammed. The compressor will continue to run

in this condition since the DSC cannot open the compressor

contactor. The DSC will energize the compressor contactor and the

alarm relay contacts will close causing a T051 alert on the

ComfortLink Control. The unloader solenoid will remain

energized causing the compressor to run unloaded as long as the

system controller demand signal is less than 1.44VDC. If the

system controller demand is greater than 1.44VDC, the unloader

solenoid will de-energize causing the compressor to run loaded.

The ALERT code and alarm relay output are reset when current is

no longer detected while system controller demand signal is below

1.44VDC.

Flash Code 9-- Low 24VAC Supply

This occurs when the supply voltage to the DSC has dropped

below 18.5VDC. The DSC will de-energize the compressor

contactor and unloader solenoid. The alarm relay contacts may

close if the voltage is high enough for the alarm relay to pull in.

The ALERT code and alarm relay output are reset when the supply

voltage to the DSC rises above 19.5VAC.

Table 10 -- DSC Red LED Flash Codes

LED Flash Description Action Taken Reset Probable Cause

Code by Control Method

1 Reserved for Future Use N/A N/A N/A

Flash

2 High Discharge Temperature Compressor Automatic Compressor discharge temperature is greater then 268

Flash shutdown degrees F or the DTT is shorted.

3 Compressor Protector Trip Compressor Automatic Compressor's internal overload protector being open,

Flash shutdown fuse or breaker open, power disconnected to compres-

sor contactor, compressor power wiring not run through

DSC current transformer port or a compressor contactor

failure.

4 Locked Rotor Compressor Manual Four consecutive start ups with locked rotor.

Flash lockout

5 Demand Signal Loss Compressor Automatic Signal wire may be disconnected or the system control-

Flash shutdown ler providing the signal may not be powered

6 Discharge Thermistor Fault Capacity Limited Automatic DTT may be missing, disconnected or a wire broken

Flash

7 Reserved for Future Use N/A N/A N/A

Flash

8 Compressor Contactor Fault Keep capacity Automatic Compressor contactor may have welded contacts or the

Flash at 15% contacts may be mechanically jammed

9 Low 24VAC Supply Compressor Automatic Bad connection or transformer.

Flash shutdown

32

Economizer Troubleshooting

Use the unit Scrolling Marquee display or a CCN device to view

the economizer status display and the economizer diagnostic

display (see Appendix A) for information on the economizer

operation, Check the current alarms and alarm history for any

economizer alarm codes and correct any causes, (See Table 11.)

Verify any unique control configurations per installed site

requirements or accessories. If alarms conditions are corrected and

cleared, operation of the economizer may be verified by using the

Service Test mode (see Service Test section and Table 5). The

following steps specify how to test the economizer using the

Scrolling Marquee display, See Table 11 for general economizer

service analysis.

1. Enter the Serviee Test main menu on the display.

2. Enter TEST and turn ON test mode, A password may be

needed in order to turn ON the Service Test, The default

password is 1111.

3. Return to the main level of Serviee Test,

4. Enter the INDP submenu and enter an initial value for

ECON. This will drive the economizer damper to the

specified position. Continue to adjust the ECON value to

make sure the economizer opens and closes.

5. Because of a mechanical problem with the economizer, the

actuator might acquire a new degree of rotation which is

less than M.ANG. If this occurs, a "T414 Economizer

Damper Actuator Out of Calibration" alert will be

generated. This alert can only occur if the economizer is

using digital conmmnications (Configuration

--,ECON--,E.CTL = 1 or 2). The economizer calibration

procedure (Serviee Test-,IND.P-,E.CAL) will reconfigure

the actuator to the new fully closed and fully open

positions. To implement the calibration procedure, change

E.CAL from OFF to ON. E.CAL will remain ON as long as

the calibration procedure is being implemented (as long as 5

minutes). During the calibration procedure the actuator will

close fully and then open fully. After the calibration is

complete, the degree of rotation should be greater than

M.ANG, causing the T414 alert to clear. If the T414 alert

does not clear, check the economizer damper for other

mechanical problems.

6. Return to Serviee Test-+TEST and turn OFF test mode,

This will cause the unit to return to normal operation,

Table 11 -- Economizer Service Analysis

PROBLEM

Damper Does Not Move. Indoor Fan is off.

Economizer Operation is Limited

to Minimum Position.

Economizer Position is Less

Than Minimum Position.

Economizer Does Not Return

to Minimum Position.

Damper Does Not Close on Power

Loss.

Outdoor Damper Does Not Fully Close

at 0% or Fully Open at 100%.

Economizer is not a configured

minimum position

POSSIBLE CAUSE

Actuator is unplugged at motor or at economizer board.

Unit is not configured for economizer.

Outdoor-air temperature is above economizer

high temperature lockout.

Outdoor-air temperature is below economizer low

temperature lockout.

Communication loss to economizer board.

Damper is jammed.

Minimum position is set incorrectly.

Outdoor-air temperature is above economizer

high temperature lockout.

Outdoor-air temperature is below economizer

low temperature lockout.

Outdoor-air thermistor is faulty.

Low suction pressure problem with a compressor.

IAQ is controlling minimum damper position.

Unit is in Unoccupied mode.

Damper is jammed.

Unit is operating under free cooling.

Damper is jammed or spring return is backwards.

Economizer actuator is out of calibration.

Unit is operating under free cooling.

Unit fan speed is offsetting the economizer minimum

position to maintain proper ventilation.

REMEDY

Check for proper VFD connections. Check that

VFD is illuminated and in Auto mode.

Unit is not configured for continuous fan operation

and there are no cooling or heating demands.

Unit is in Unoccupied mode and there is no call for

heating or cooling.

Tripped circuit breaker.

No power to the unit.

Unit is off via CCN command.

Check wiring connections.

Configure unit for economizer per the

instructions.

Adjust the high temperature lockout setting if it is

incorrect, otherwise, economizer is operating

correctly.

Adjust the low temperature lockout setting if it is

incorrect, otherwise, economizer is operating

correctly.

Check wiring connections.

Identify the obstruction and safely remove.

Adjust minimum position setting.

Adjust the high temperature lockout setting

if it is incorrect, otherwise, economizer is

operating correctly.

Adjust the low temperature lockout setting

if it is incorrect, otherwise, economizer is

operating correctly.

Replace outdoor-air thermistor.

Economizer is operating correctly, identify

compressor problem.

Adjust the IAQ settings if incorrect,

otherwise, the economizer is operating correctly.

Adjust unit occupied schedule if incorrect,

otherwise, economizer is operating correctly.

Identify the obstruction and safely remove.

Economizer is operating correctly.

Identify the obstruction and safely remove.

Remove actuator, flip it over and re-install.

Enter Service Test mode and run the Calibrate

Economizer (E.CAL) procedure.

Economizer is operating correctly.

Economizer is operating correctly.

LEGEND

CCN Carrier Comfort Network

IAQ Indoor Air Quality

VFD Variable Frequency Drive

33

Heating Troubleshooting

Use the unit Scrolling Marquee display or aCCN device to view

the heating status display and the heating diagnostic display (see

Appendix A) for information on the heating operation. Check the

current alarms and alarm history for any heating alarm codes and

correct any causes. (See Table 12.) Verify any unique control

configurations per installed site requirements or accessories. If

alarms conditions are corrected and cleared, operation of the heat

stages and indoor fan may be verified by using the Service Test

mode. (See Table 5.)

Gas Heat (48PD Units Only)

See Table 12 for general gas heating service analysis. See Fig. 9 for

service analysis of the IGC board logic. Check the status LED on

the IGC board for any flashing alarm codes and correct any causes.

(See Table 13.)

Electric Heat (50PD Units Only)

See Table 14 for electric heating service analysis.

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Troubleshooting

The VFD must be in "Auto" mode and when commanding it to

100% the voltage signal should be 10vdc across AI1 and AIGND.

Verify all parameters are correct to factory defaults. See Appendix

B for parameters and additional troubleshooting.

Phase Loss Protection

The phase loss protection option will monitor the three-phase

electrical system to provide phase reversal and phase loss

protection.

Phase Reversal Protection

If the control senses an incorrect phase relationship, the relay (KI)

will be de-energized (opening its contact). If the phase relationship

is correct, the relay will be energized. The control has a self-bypass

flmction after a pre-set time. If the control determines that the three

phases stay in a correct relationship for 10 consecutive minutes, the

relay will stay energized regardless of the phase sequence of three

inputs as long as 24-vac control voltage is applied. This self-bypass

flmction will be reset if all three phases are restored in a phase loss

event.

Phase Loss Protection

If the reverse rotation board senses any one of the three phase

inputs has no AC voltage, the relay will be de-energized (opening

its contact). This protection is always active as long as 24-vac

control voltage is applied, and is not affected by the self by-pass

flmction of the phase sequence monitoring flmction. However, in

the event of phase loss, the relay will be re-energized only if all

three phases are restored and the three phases are in the correct

sequence.

A red LED is provided to indicate the flmction of the board. See

the table below.

LED STATUS FUNCTION

On Continuously Relay contact closed (normal operation).

Relay contact open (phase loss or phase

Blinking reversal has occurred) - No power will be

supplied to the control system.

Off 24 vac control power not present (off).

Table 12 -- Gas Heating Service Analysis

PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY

Burners Will Not Ignite, Unit is not configured for heat. Check heating configurations using ComfortLink _' Scrolling

Marquee.

Active alarm. Check active alarms using ComfortLink_' Scrolling Marquee and

the IGC alert flash codes.

No power to unit. Check power supply, fuses, wiring, and circuit breakers.

No power to IGC. Check fuses and plugs.

Heaters off due to time guard to prevent short Check active alarms using ComfortLink_' Scrolling Marquee and

cycling, the IGC alert flash codes.

Occupancy schedule set point not calling for Check using ComfortLink _' Scrolling Marquee.

Heating.

No gas at main burners.

Water in gas line.

Inadequate Heating, Dirty air filters.

Gas input too low.

Occupancy schedule set point set too low.

Unit undersized for load.

Restricted or low airflow.

Too much outdoor air.

Limit switch cycles main burners.

Poor Flame

Characteristics, Incomplete combustion (lack of combustion air)

results in: Aldehyde odors, CO, sooting flame, or

floating flame.

Burners Will Not Turn Off, Unit is in Minimum on-time.

Unit running in Service Test mode.

Main gas valve stuck.

LEGEND

IGC Integrated Gas Controller

SAT Supply Air Temperature

Check gas line for air and purge as necessary. After purging gas

line of air, allow gas to dissipate for at least 5 minutes before

attempting to re-light unit.

Drain water and install drip.

Replace air filters.

Check gas pressure at manifold. Refer to gas valve adjustment in

the Service section.

Check setpoints and adjust if necessary.

Decrease load or increase of size of unit.

Remove restriction, verify proper fan speed operation, and check

SAT compared to the SAT heating limits.

Check economizer position and configuration. Adjust minimum

position if needed using ComfortLink Scrolling Marquee. Verify

proper fan speed operation.

Check rotation of blower and temperature rise of unit. Adjust as

needed.

Check all screws around flue outlets and burner compartment.

Tighten as necessary.

Cracked heat exchanger, replace.

Unit is over-fired, reduce input. Adjust gas line or manifold

pressure.

Check vent for restriction. Clean as necessary.

Check orifice to burner alignment.

Check using ComfortLink_' Scrolling Marquee and the IGC alert

flash codes.

Check using ComfortLink _' Scrolling Marquee.

Turn off gas supply and unit power. Replace gas valve.

34

I FLASH - INDOOR FAN [_ELAY_O_FED (HEATING)

2 _S - OF_-NN OF UMESW_rCH

3 _ - _ SFJV_OR

iNE_J_TES FLAME WffH

CLOSED GAS VALVE

HEATING

F-

F-

4 FL_..S - L_IT SWITCH

CYCLED 4 _MES ON t--

CALL FK)R HEAT

I 5 _ - E_rK3N L(_r2,KOLrF_

(No _nJ_n ',_ t5 mW"_tses)

MOTOR FAULT

_ _nat f_rn _"te I_I Effect

t7FLASHES - OF_F&NG OFROLLObq" _TCH

8_-_ FAULT

I9 FLASHES -SOFTWARELOCKOUT

1

t

IGC H_.4HVOLTAGE

TRAt,L_F.R CREATES A

'lO,(X_OVO£T SPARK FOR 5

8ECONOS

.{

'Wf FROM BASE CONTROL BOARD ENERGIZES 'W'ON IGC -1 MINUTE LOCK-ON

±

COMBUSTION RELAY ON IGC 18 ENERGIZED

I

J

_ _ CORRECT _ TO TE'RM_,L 'Jl' ON

EXCHANGER

Yes

(5 N.AS__S OF LED)

LEGEND

IDM -- Induced-Draft Motor

iGC -- Integrated Gas Unit Controller

iI

NOTE: Thermostat Fan Switch in the

"AUTO" position.

VALVE FOR 5 8_X_

r

[

IGC SAFETY LOGIC WILL 8_JT VHo@

OFF C4.8 VALVE AND SPARK

Yes

H_8 8E8_ REDUG_E) DUE TO L_ 8V_TCH

TRIPS) E_C WILL _ BLOWER RELAY

No

.½

_ SAFETY LOG_ S_ OFF GAS V_ t

t

STOP& ]

45 SECOND B_OWER 8H_ IMP'LAY

(DFJ.AYEXTENDED BY 5Sa_CON{3_3FOR EACH LIMIT8-'Wff{_._ITRIP

MAXIMUM DELAY: 3 MINUTES)

SUBTRACT 5 _ (C_

ANC/FHER 5_) FROM

FAN ON TIME DELAY

Fig. 9-IGC Service Analysis Logic

]

(07014

35

Table 13 -- IGC Board LED Alarm Codes

LED ACTION TAKEN BY

FLASH DESCRIPTION RESET METHOD PROBABLE CAUSE

CONTROL

CODE

On Normal Operation __ __ __

Off Hardware Failure No gas heating. -- Loss of power to the IGC. Check 5 amp fuse on

IGC, power to unit, 24V circuit breaker, transformer,

and wiring to the IGC.

1 Flash Indoor Fan On/Off Delay 5 seconds subtracted from Power reset. High temperature limit switch opens during heat

Modified On delay, exchanger warm-up period before fan-on delay

5 seconds added to Off expires.

delay (3 min max). High temperature limit switch opens within

10 minutes of heat call (W) Off.

See Limit Switch Fault.

2 Flashes Limit Switch Fault Gas valve and igniter Off. Limit switch closed, or High temperature limit switch is open. Check the

Indoor fan and inducer On. heat call (W) Off. operation of the indoor (evaporator) fan motor.

Ensure that the supply-air temperature rise is within

the range on the unit nameplate. Check wiring and

limit switch operation.

3Flashes Flame Sense Fault Indoor fan and inducer On. Flame sense normal. The IGC sensed a flame when the gas valve should

Power reset for LED reset, be c!osed. Check wiring, flame sensor, and gas

valve operation.

4 Flashes Four Consecutive Limit Switch No gas heating. Heat call (W) Off. 4 consecutive limit switch faults within a single call

Fault Power reset for LED reset, for heat. See Limit Switch Fault.

5Flashes Ignition Fault No gas heating. Heat call (W) Off. Unit unsuccessfully attempted ignition for 15 minutes.

Power reset for LED reset. Check igniter and flame sensor electrode spacing,

gaps, etc. Check flame sense and igniter wiring.

Check gas valve operation and gas supply.

6Flashes Induced Draft Motor Fault If heat off: no gas heating. Inducer sense normal, or Inducer sense On when heat call Off, or inducer

If heat on: gas valve Off heat call (W) Off. sense Off when heat call On. Check wiring, voltage,

and inducer On. and operation of IGC motor. Check speed sensor

wiring to IGC.

7 Flashes Rol!out Switch Lockout Gas valve and igniter Off. Power reset. Rollout switch has opened. Check gas valve

Indoor fan and inducer On. operation. Check induced-draft blower whee! is

properly secured to motor shaft.

8 Flashes Internal Control Lockout No gas heating. Power reset. IGC has sensed internal hardware or software error.

If fault is not cleared by resetting 24 v power,

replace the IGC.

9 Flashes Temporary Software Lockout No gas heating. 1 hour auto reset, or Electrical interference is disrupting the IGC

3ower reset, software.

LEGEND

IGC -Integrated Gas [7nit Control

LED - Light-Emitting Diode

NOTES:

1. There is a 3-second pause between alarm code displays.

2. If more than one alarm code exists, all applicable alarm codes will be displayed in numerical sequence.

3. Alarm codes on the IGC will be lost if power to the unit is interrupted.

Table 14 -- Electric Heat Service Analysis

PROBLEM

Heat Will Not Turn On.

CAUSE

Unit is not configured for heat.

Active alarm.

No power to unit.

Unit is in minimum heat off-time, or minimum

cool- heat changeover time.

Heat forced off in Service Test.

No 24 vac at heater contactor.

Open temperature limit switch on heater.

Dirty air filters.

Bad heater elements.

Inadequate Heating.

Occupancy schedule set point set too low.

Heat undersized for load.

Restricted or low airflow.

Too much outdoor air.

Limit switch cycles heaters.

Heat Will Not Turn Off, Unit is in minimum heat on-time.

Occupancy schedule set point still calling for

Heating.

LEGEND

SAT Supply Air Temperature

REMEDY

Check heating configurations using ComfortLink _

Scrolling Marquee.

Check active alarms using ComfortLink T,, Scrolling

Marquee.

Check power supply, fuses, wiring, and circuit breakers.

Check using ComfortLink _' Scrolling Marquee.

Check using ComfortLink _' Scrolling Marquee. Turn

Service Test mode off.

Check transformer, circuit breaker, auto-reset limit

switches on heater, and manual-reset limit switches (LS)

on indoor fan housing.

Check minimum airflow. Check limit switch when it is cool,

replace if not.

Replace air filters.

Power off unit and remove high voltage wires. Check

resistance of element, replace if open.

Check setpoints and adjust if necessary.

Decrease load or increase size of heater.

Remove restriction, verify proper fan speed operation, and

check SAT compared to the SAT heating limits.

Check economizer position and configuration. Adjust

minimum position if needed using ComfortLink _' Scrolling

Marquee. Verify proper fan speed operation.

Check rotation of blower, temperature rise of unit, and

minimum airflow. Adjust as needed.

Check using ComfortLink _' Scrolling Marquee.

Check using ComfortLink _' Scrolling Marquee.

Unit running in Service Test mode. Check using ComfortLink _' Scrolling Marquee.

Heater contactor failed. Power off unit. Check contactor and replace if closed.

36

Thermistor Troubleshooting

The electronic control uses thermistors to sense temperatures used

to control operation of the unit. Resistances at various temperatures

are listed in Table 15-17. Thermistor pin connection points are

shown in the Maior System Components section. The general

locations of the thermistors are shown the Maior System

Components section.

Air Temperatures

Air temperatures are measured with 10 kilo-ohm thermistors. This

includes supply-air temperature (SAT), outdoor-air temperature

(OAT), space temperature sensors (T55, T56, T58), and return air

temperature (RAT).

The supply air temperature (SAT), return air temperature (RAT)

and outdoor air temperature (OAT) thermistors use a snap-mount to

attach through the unit sheet metal panels. The snap-mount tabs

must be flattened on the tip end of the sensor to release for removal

from the panel. (See Fig. 10.) To reinstall, make sure the

snap-mount tabs extend out.

,, ",,, !

/\ ix), %

I', ','_ \ %,, _d,',,/

\'-\\ "%'7"g

\ \ \ %\\

\ ", ",-',',""L/"',,

X JX \ X \x._=j \\

\ _ \_X\\ %%%% \\

(07015

Fig. 10 - SAT, RAT and OAT Thermistor Mounting

Refrigerant Temperatures

Condenser coil temperatures are measured with 5kilo-ohm

thermistors. These measurements provide an approximate saturated

condensing temperature for each circuit (SCT.A). Fig. 11 shows

the factory locations for the SCT thermistors on 48/50PD units.

Ensure that thermistors are placed at the correct location and are

snapped securely over the return bend so that contact is made

between the thermistor and the tube.

(07016

Fig. 11 - Saturated Condensing Temperature Thermistor

Location

Thermistor/Temperature Sensor Check

Ahigh quality digital volt-ohmmeter is required to perform this

check.

Connect the digital voltmeter across the appropriate thermistor

terminals at the J8 terminal strip on the Main Base Board (see

Maior System Components section).

Using the voltage reading obtained, read the sensor temperature

from Table 15-17.

To check thermistor accuracy, measure temperature at probe

location with an accurate thermocouple-type

temperature-measuring instrument. Insulate thermocouple to avoid

ambient temperatures from influencing reading. Temperature

measured by thermocouple and temperature determined from

thermistor voltage reading should be close, within 5°F, if care was

taken in applying thermocouple and taking readings.

If a more accurate check is required, unit must be shut down and

thermistor removed and checked at a known temperature (freezing

point or boiling point of water) using either voltage drop measured

across thermistor at the J8 terminal, or by determining the

resistance with unit shut down and thermistor disconnected from

J8. Compare the values determined with the value read by the

control in the Temperatures mode using the Scrolling Marquee

display.

37

Sensor Trim

Corrective offsets can be applied to the space temperature and the

supply air temperature sensor readings. These corrections are set in

the Configuration--,TRIM menu for the display, or in the

Maintenance--,TRIM table for CCN. See the Indoor Air Quality

section for available adjustments to IAQ and OAQ sensor readings.

The space temperature may be corrected by entering either a

calibration temperature value in SPT.C, or an offset temperature

value in SPT.T. The supply-air temperature may be corrected by

entering either a calibration temperature value in SAT.C, or an

offset temperature value in SAT.T. The return-air temperature may

be corrected by entering either a calibration temperature value in

RAT.C or an offset temperature value in RAT.T. Temperature

corrections should only be made if sensor readings are compared to

an accurate reference temperature measurement device.

Transducer Troubleshooting

The electronic control uses suction pressure transducers to measure

the suction pressure of the refrigerant circuits. The pressure/voltage

characteristics of these transducers are in shown in Table 18, the

5vdc power is applied to legs A and B of the transducer and legs B

to C represent the voltage drop shown in the table. The accuracy of

these transducers can be verified by connecting an accurate

pressure gauge to the second refrigerant port in the suction line.

Forcing Inputs and Outputs

Many variables may have their value forced through CCN or

directly at the local display. This can be useful during diagnostic

testing and also during operation, typically as part of an advanced

third party control scheme. Input and output points that may be

forced are indicated as 'forcible' in the write status column of the

display and CCN tables.

If the user needs to force a variable, follow the same process as

when editing a configuration parameter. A forced variable will be

displayed on the Scrolling Marquee with a blinking period "."

following its value. A forced value on Navigator TM accessory is

indicated with a blinking "f'. A forced value on CCN devices is

indicated with "Control" if forced at the unit display, or

"Supervisor" if forced via CCN. To remove a local force with the

Scrolling Marquee, select the point with the ENTER key and then

press the up-arrow and down-arrow keys simultaneously.

IMPORTANT: In the case of a control power reset, any force in

effect at the time of power reset will be cleared.

38

TEMP

(F)

-25

-24

-23

-22

-21

-20

-19

-18

-17

-16

-15

-14

-13

-12

-11

-10

-9

-8

-7

-6

-5

-4

-3

-2

-I

0

I

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

I0

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

5O

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

6O

Table 15 -- Temperature (°F) vs Resistance/Voltage Drop Values for

RAT, OAT, SAT, and SPT Thermistors (10K at 25°C Resistors)

VOLTAGE

DROP (V)

4.758

4.750

4.741

4.733

4.724

4.715

4.705

4.696

4.686

4.676

4.665

4.655

4.644

4.633

4.621

4.609

4.597

4.585

4.572

4.560

4.546

4.533

4.519

4.505

4.490

4.476

4.461

4.445

4.429

4.413

4.397

4.380

4.363

4.346

4.328

4.310

4.292

4.273

4.254

4.235

4.215

4.195

4.174

4.153

4.132

4.111

4.089

4.067

4.044

4.021

3.998

3.975

3.951

3.927

3.903

3.878

3.853

3.828

3.802

3.776

3.750

3.723

3.697

3.670

3.654

3.615

3.587

3.559

3.531

3.503

3.474

3.445

3.416

3.387

3.357

3.328

3.298

3.268

3.238

3.208

3.178

3.147

3.117

3.086

3.056

3.025

RESISTANCE TEMP VOLTAGE RESISTANCE TEMP VOLTAGE RESISTANCE

(Ohms) (F) DROP (V) (Ohms) (F) DROP (V) (Ohms)

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

7O

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

8O

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

9O

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

IO0

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

2.994

2.963

2.932

2.901

2.870

2.839

2.808

2.777

2.746

2.715

2.684

2.653

2.622

2.592

2.561

2.530

2.500

2.470

2.439

2.409

2.379

2.349

2.319

2.290

2.260

2.231

2.202

2.173

2.144

2.115

2.087

2.059

2.030

2.003

1.975

1.948

1.921

1.894

1.867

1.841

1.815

1.789

1.763

1.738

1.713

1.688

1.663

1.639

1.615

1.591

1.567

1.544

1.521

1.498

1.475

1.453

1.431

1.409

1.387

1.366

1.345

1.324

1.304

1.284

1.264

1.244

1.225

1.206

1.187

1.168

1.150

1.132

1.114

1.096

1.079

1.062

1.045

1.028

1.012

0.996

0.980

0.965

0.949

0.934

0.919

0.905

14,925

14,549

14,180

13,824

13,478

13,139

12,814

12,493

12,187

11,884

11,593

11,308

11,031

10,764

10,501

10,249

10,000

9,762

9,526

9,300

9,078

8,862

8,653

8,448

8,251

8,056

7,869

7,685

7,507

7,333

7,165

6,999

6,838

6,683

6,530

6,383

6,238

6,098

5,961

5,827

5,698

5,571

5,449

5,327

5,210

5,095

4,984

4,876

4,769

4,666

4,564

4,467

4,370

4,277

4.185

4,096

4,008

3,923

3,840

3,759

3,681

3,603

3,529

3,455

3,383

3,313

3,244

3,178

3,112

3,049

2,986

2,926

2,866

2,809

2,752

2,697

2,643

2,590

2,539

2,488

2,439

2,391

2,343

2,297

2,253

2,209

196,453

189,692

183,300

177,000

171,079

165,238

159,717

154,344

149,194

144,250

139,443

134,891

130,402

126,183

122,018

118,076

114,236

110,549

107,006

103,558

100,287

97,060

94,020

91,019

88,171

85,396

82,729

80,162

77,662

75,286

72,940

70,727

68,542

66,465

64,439

62,491

60,612

58,781

57,039

55,319

53,693

52,086

50,557

49,065

47,627

46,240

44,888

43,598

42,324

41,118

39,926

38,790

37,681

36,610

35,577

34,569

33,606

32,654

31,752

30,860

30,009

29,177

28,373

27,597

26,838

26,113

25,396

24,715

24,042

23,399

22,770

22,161

21,573

20,998

20,447

19,903

19,386

18,874

18,384

17,904

17,441

16,991

16,552

16,131

15,714

15,317

147 0.890 2,166

148 0.876 2,124

149 0.862 2,083

150 0.848 2,043

151 0.835 2,003

152 0.821 1,966

153 0.808 1,928

154 0.795 1,891

155 0.782 1,855

156 0.770 1,820

157 0.758 1,786

158 0.745 1,752

159 0.733 1,719

160 0.722 1,687

161 0.710 1,656

162 0.699 1,625

163 0.687 1,594

164 0.676 1,565

165 0.666 1,536

166 0.655 1,508

167 0.645 1,480

168 0.634 1,453

169 0.624 1,426

170 0.614 1,400

171 0.604 1,375

172 0.595 1,350

173 0.585 1,326

174 0.576 1,302

175 0.567 1,278

176 0.558 1,255

177 0.549 1,233

178 0.540 1,211

179 0.532 1,190

180 0.523 1,169

181 0.515 1,148

182 0.507 1,128

183 0.499 1,108

184 0.491 1,089

185 0.483 1,070

186 0.476 1,052

187 0.468 1,033

188 0.461 1,016

189 0.454 998

190 0.447 981

191 0.440 964

192 0.433 947

193 0.426 931

194 0.419 915

195 0.413 900

196 0.407 885

197 0.400 870

198 0.394 855

199 0.388 841

200 0.382 827

201 0.376 814

202 0.370 800

203 0.365 787

204 0.359 774

205 0.354 762

206 0.349 749

207 0.343 737

208 0.338 725

209 0.333 714

210 0.328 702

211 0.323 691

212 0.318 680

213 0.314 670

214 0.309 659

215 0.305 649

216 0.300 639

217 0.296 629

218 0.292 620

219 0.288 610

220 0.284 601

221 0.279 592

222 0.275 583

223 0.272 574

224 0.268 566

225 0.264 557

39

Table 16 -- Temperature (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop Values for SCT Sensors (5K at 25°C Resistors)

TEMP VOLTAGE RESISTANCE VOLTAGE RESISTANCE VOLTAGE RESISTANCE

(F) DROP (V) (Ohms) TEMP (F) DROP (V) (Ohms) TEMP (F) DROP (V) (Ohms)

-25 3.699 98,010 59 1.982 7,866 143 0.511 1,190

-24 3.689 94,707 60 1.956 7,665 144 0.502 1,165

-23 3.679 91,522 61 1.930 7,468 145 0.494 1,141

-22 3.668 88,449 62 1.905 7,277 146 0.485 1,118

-21 3.658 85,486 63 1.879 7,091 147 0.477 1,095

-20 3.647 82,627 64 1.854 6,911 148 0.469 1,072

-19 3.636 79,871 65 1.829 6,735 149 0.461 1,050

-18 3.624 77,212 66 1.804 6,564 150 0.453 1,029

-17 3.613 74,648 67 1.779 6,399 151 0.445 1,007

-16 3.601 72,175 68 1.754 6,238 152 0.438 986

-15 3.588 69,790 69 1.729 6,081 153 0.430 965

-14 3.576 67,490 70 1.705 5,929 154 0.423 945

-13 3.563 65,272 71 1.681 5,781 155 0.416 925

-12 3.550 63,133 72 1.656 5,637 156 0.408 906

-11 3.536 61,070 73 1.632 5,497 157 0.402 887

-10 3.523 59,081 74 1.609 5,361 158 0.395 868

-9 3.509 57,162 75 1.585 5,229 159 0.388 850

-8 3.494 55,311 76 1.562 5,101 160 0.381 832

-7 3.480 53,526 77 1.538 4,976 161 0.375 815

-6 3.465 51,804 78 1.516 4,855 162 0.369 798

-5 3.450 50,143 79 1.493 4,737 163 0.362 782

-4 3.434 48,541 80 1.470 4,622 164 0.356 765

-3 3.418 46,996 81 1.448 4,511 165 0.350 750

-2 3.402 45,505 82 1.426 4,403 166 0.344 734

-1 3.386 44,066 83 1.404 4,298 167 0.339 719

0 3.369 42,679 84 1.382 4,196 168 0.333 705

1 3.352 41,339 85 1.361 4,096 169 0.327 690

2 3.335 40,047 86 1.340 4,000 170 0.322 677

3 3.317 38,800 87 1.319 3,906 171 0.317 663

4 3.299 37,596 88 1.298 3,814 172 0.311 650

5 3.281 36,435 89 1.278 3,726 173 0.306 638

6 3.262 35,313 90 1.257 3,640 174 0.301 626

7 3.243 34,231 91 1.237 3,556 175 0.296 614

8 3.224 33,185 92 1.217 3,474 176 0.291 602

9 3.205 32,176 93 1.198 3,395 177 0.286 591

10 3.185 31,202 94 1.179 3,318 178 0.282 581

11 3.165 30,260 95 1.160 3,243 179 0.277 570

12 3.145 29,351 96 1.141 3,170 180 0.272 561

13 3.124 28,473 97 1.122 3,099 181 0.268 551

14 3.103 27,624 98 1.104 3,031 182 0.264 542

15 3.082 26,804 99 1.086 2,964 183 0.259 533

16 3.060 26,011 100 1.068 2,898 184 0.255 524

17 3.038 25,245 101 1.051 2,835 185 0.251 516

18 3.016 24,505 102 1.033 2,773 186 0.247 508

19 2.994 23,789 103 1.016 2,713 187 0.243 501

20 2.972 23,096 104 0.999 2,655 188 0.239 494

21 2.949 22,427 105 0.983 2,597 189 0.235 487

22 2.926 21,779 106 0.966 2,542 190 0.231 480

23 2.903 21,153 107 0.950 2,488 191 0.228 473

24 2.879 20,547 108 0.934 2,436 192 0.224 467

25 2.856 19,960 109 0.918 2,385 193 0.220 461

26 2.832 19,393 110 0.903 2,335 194 0.217 456

27 2.808 18,843 111 0.888 2,286 195 0.213 450

28 2.784 18,311 112 0.873 2,239 196 0.210 445

29 2.759 17,796 113 0.858 2,192 197 0.206 439

30 2.735 17,297 114 0.843 2,147 198 0.203 434

31 2.710 16,814 115 0.829 2,103 199 0.200 429

32 2.685 16,346 116 0.815 2,060 200 0.197 424

33 2.660 15,892 117 0.801 2,018 201 0.194 419

34 2.634 15,453 118 0.787 1,977 202 0.191 415

35 2.609 15,027 119 0.774 1,937 203 0.188 410

36 2.583 14,614 120 0.761 1,898 204 0.185 405

37 2.558 14,214 121 0.748 1,860 205 0.182 401

38 2.532 13,826 122 0.735 1,822 206 0.179 396

39 2.506 13,449 123 0.723 1,786 207 0.176 391

40 2.480 13,084 124 0.710 1,750 208 0.173 386

41 2.454 12,730 125 0.698 1,715 209 0.171 382

42 2.428 12,387 126 0.686 1,680 210 0.168 377

43 2.402 12,053 127 0.674 1,647 211 0.165 372

44 2.376 11,730 128 0.663 1,614 212 0.163 367

45 2.349 11,416 129 0.651 1,582 213 0.160 361

46 2.323 11,112 130 0.640 1,550 214 0.158 356

47 2.296 10,816 131 0.629 1,519 215 0.155 350

48 2.270 10,529 132 0.618 1,489 216 0.153 344

49 2.244 10,250 133 0.608 1,459 217 0.151 338

50 2.217 9,979 134 0.597 1,430 218 0.148 332

51 2.191 9,717 135 0.587 1,401 219 0.146 325

52 2.165 9,461 136 0.577 1,373 220 0.144 318

53 2.138 9,213 137 0.567 1,345 221 0.142 311

54 2.112 8,973 138 0.557 1,318 222 0.140 304

55 2.086 8,739 139 0.548 1,291 223 0.138 297

56 2.060 8,511 140 0.538 1,265 224 0.135 289

57 2.034 8,291 141 0.529 1,240 225 0.133 282

58 2.008 8,076 142 0.520 1,214

40

Table 17 -- Temperature vs Resistance Values for the DTT Thermistor

(86K at 25 °C Resistors)

Degree C Degree F Resistance (k Ohms)

-40 -40 2889.60

- 65 - 61 2087.22

- 30 - 22 1522.20

-25 -16 1121.44

- 20 - 4 864.72

- 15 5 627.28

- 10 14 475.74

- 5 23 363.99

0 62 280.82

5 41 218.41

10 50 171.17

15 59 165.14

20 68 107.44

25 77 86.00

30 86 69.28

35 95 56.16

40 104 45.81

45 116 37.58

50 122 60.99

55 161 25.68

60 140 21.40

65 149 17.91

Degree CDegree F Resistance (k Ohms)

70 158 15.07

75 167 12.76

80 176 10.79

85 185 9.20

90 194 7.87

95 206 6.77

1O0 212 5.85

105 221 5.09

110 260 4.45

115 269 3.87

120 248 3.65

125 257 2.92

130 266 2.58

165 275 2.28

140 284 2.02

145 296 1.80

150 602 1.59

155 311 1.39

160 620 1.25

165 329 1.12

170 368 1.01

175 647 0.92

180 356 0.86

41

PRESSURE

(psig)

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

2O

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

42

44

46

48

50

52

54

56

58

60

62

64

66

Table 18 -- Pressure (psig) vs. Voltage Drop Values for Suction Pressure Transducers

VOLTAGE PRESSURE

DROP (V) (psig)

0.465 68

0.485 70

0.505 72

0.524 74

0.544 76

0.564 78

0.583 80

0.603 82

0.623 84

0.642 86

0.662 88

0.682 90

0.702 92

0.721 94

0.741 96

0.761 98

0.780 100

0.800 102

0.820 104

0.839 106

0.859 108

0.879 110

0.898 112

0.918 114

0.938 116

0.958 118

0.977 120

0.997 122

1.017 124

1.036 126

1.056 128

1.076 130

1.095 132

1.115 134

VOLTAGE PRESSURE

DROP (V) (psig)

1.135 136

1.154 138

1.174 140

1.194 142

1.214 144

1.233 146

1.253 148

1.273 150

1.292 152

1.312 154

1.332 156

1.351 158

1.371 160

1.391 162

1.410 164

1.430 166

1.450 168

1.470 170

1.489 172

1.509 174

1.529 176

1.548 178

1.568 180

1.588 182

1.607 184

1.627 186

1.647 188

1.666 190

1.686 192

1.706 194

1.726 196

1.745 198

1.765 200

1.785 202

VOLTAGE

DROP (V)

1.804

1.824

1.844

1.863

1.883

1.903

1.922

1.942

1.962

1.982

2.001

2.021

2.041

2.060

2.080

2.100

2.119

2.139

2.159

2.178

2.198

2.218

2.237

2.257

2.277

2.297

2.316

2.336

2.356

2.375

2.395

2.415

2.434

2.454

PRESSURE VOLTAGE

(psig) DROP (V)

204 2.474

206 2.493

208 2.513

210 2.533

212 2.553

214 2.572

216 2.592

218 2.612

220 2.631

222 2.651

224 2.671

226 2.690

228 2.710

230 2.730

232 2.749

234 2.769

236 2.789

238 2.809

240 2.828

242 2.848

244 2.868

246 2.887

248 2.907

250 2.927

252 2.946

254 2.966

256 2.986

258 3.005

260 3.025

262 3.045

264 3.065

266 3.084

268 3.104

270 3.124

MAJOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS

General

The 48/50PD single package rooftop units contain the

ComfortLink .... electronic control system that monitors all

operations of the rooftop. The control system is composed of

several main control components and available factory-installed

options or field-installed accessories as listed in sections below.

See Fig. 12-14 for the control and power schematics for

48/50PD. Fig. 15 shows the layout of the control box, unit, and

thermistor and transducer locations for the 48/50PD.

42

RC

J2 J1

(ECB)

T_AN2

Fig. 12 -48PD Control Wiring Schematic

01

J

[48HG503976 I4.0

C08582

43

B

J10

19}

_k<_ I_ _ r....................................._i:;_-, .Fi.L.; _ 2'"_,'?_ '_'_

111........ ÷ ............

_-, I ........................................................RED

) T

TO MBf_J7 9 v GRY

................ BL_..... BL}{ ...............

L_RN--

-G>> CO.TRO.

L GRNI G_D

................. YEL _ QUIP [

_ SWITCHES

4. 5 AND

70_

1

POWER EXHAUST J

FlOP/ACCESSORY

TBI Jll 4

LSa

TRA_I

81 Jll 2

4.8HG503977 4.0

Fig. 13 -50PD Control Wiring Schematic

C08583

44

1 POWER SCHEMATIC 48/50 PD C05,C06 208/230,460-3-60

: NACR ] D SCON ECTI :> : COMFORTL NK

C¥ -- ,= ....................................................................................

................. _ ........ LK

.....................i'i ........................... ...................................................................................................

IUPP L _> S[D WIll 81U ::: _:: ::::: /

:_Loo :RV, L:CIRI¢ ;01_I_DLK I _K ',i_f3U CCHR

FAT _OP/

] _ _ _ I KE2_YE[ _ D_K I ; t _ .......................J ]..................................................................................................................................A/vw7

_- _ ACCY OALY I v I : / " / / / / CCB AT

: EQUIP GND ,SEE £1_# i :FLOP ........... Y[!I _l {_) .........................I1 ....................................................................................................................................................

/ ncn. LA EL "_PHASE L_S I ; B U

L............ J BLNI ]_OTECTI_ .IIFC _ _ _

/ _ U., -- BLK i i iU_TNV_I...................... \

/YI I/]_- vLVL}Kl......................YEL_i _S fIR M

L I ......................................................................................................................................

115V BOX DOOR K

fIELD .................. _ " "

PP Y ............. K 460V

SU L _l'm ROP--_ _ _BLKH OILY] _-_

• _J _ NOfW_OWERED, BL_ O; CY( / L

." I_ CONVERIENCE' _ L_( ] >_i[{ 5> R/} ........................................ ................./; 0

_Nu _ _y OUTLETI YFI 460V Y _ / /. _ /1s0_A_OR '

L?, ..--J _ ONL Y _</_<_ DLK [ CAP1 ......................_I'K _]

7J DLK

..........................................'ll ............DRN Z:I )ORM

_BK \I RANI II .........................Y .......... YEL_ _--" /

/ @<_<_,_ib;_==========================I .............................. _-

I III..............:B'' A_DLK_7_ _DLK /_:_ P:MI .... B KT(_ I_BLU_ >MI

/rocB '"' T -024v / I _' [_ b.... I/Q_ L/_ m[/,,_ /YELl <RSl / _BIK \ ..... ]) YELl

_52 AMPS) +SCHEMATC .................iUL _/ LU _ _Fx£/ "_" L _ I _vr_l I _-_ I

BK .................................TRAN2 /I{_tI_BLK J-_ P_H _ P:MH

........ y _ CAPS

.....w._.._,._._ _ FlOP/ACCESSORY _ @ OT Yf L =

ONI Y P_C2 460V ON ,¢-J 20D/230, ONLY

(32 AMPS)

LEGEND

{_} IERMINAI {MARKED>

o TERMINAL(UNMARKED)

TERMINALBLOCK

FACTORY WIRING

FIELD CONTROL WIRING

.........................FIELD POWEBWIRING

.... ACCESSORY OR OPTIONAL WIRING

TO INDICAIE COMMON

POTENI_A! ONLY:

NOI TO REPRESENT WIRING

A CIRCUIT A

AUXI WODULATION DOARD Ol:C

C COMPRESSOR CONTACT@ OFM

CAP CAPACITOR PEC

CB CIRCUIT BREAKER PEN

CON CRANKCASE HEATER PF

CCNR CRANKCASE HEATER RELAY P[

CCN CARRIER COMFORT NETWORK OT

COMP COMPRESSOR {DIGITAL}

CS CURRRNT SENSOR

BS¢ DIGITAL SCROLL CONTROLLER

BTT DISCHARGE [EMPERATURE THERMISTER

ED ENTNALPY CONTROL

EBB ECONOMIZER CONTROL BOARD

fS ELAME SENSOR

RU fDSE

GND GROUND

GN GAS VALVE

NPS NIGH PRESSURE SWITCH

I IGNI{OR

IAQ INDOOR AIR QUALITY

IBM INDUCED DRAFT MOTOR

i_C INDOOR fAN CONTACTOR

/fM INDOOR fAN MOIOR

IGC INTEGRATED GAS CONTROIL_R

INV ADJUSTABLE SPFFD AC MOTOR DRIVE

[EN LOCAL EOUIPMENI NETWORK

IS L!MI[ SW!{CN

LSM lIMIT SWITCH MANUAl RESET

MBB MAIN BASE BOARD

OAO OUIDOOR AIR OUAL[TY

OAT OUIDOOR AER /{MPERAIUR!

NOTES:

I If ANY Of TBE ORIGINAL WIRE FURNISHED

MUST DE REPLACED, IT MUST BE REPLACED

WITH TYPE 90°C OR [{S EOUWAIENT

2 THREE PHASE MOTORS ARE PROTECTED UNDER

PRIMARY SINGLE _KASING CONDITIONS

5USE COPPER CONDUCTORSONLY

4 RED JUMPER WIRE MDSI DE ADDED BETWEEN

R AND W] ROB SPACE TENPFRATURE MODE

AND TFMPORAR]LY DURING SERVICE-TES!

MODE WHEN IHE HEATERS NEED TO OP#RATE

5 THAN1 AND 2 ARE WIRED FOR 23BY ON 2081230v

UNITS IF UNIT IS TO BE BUN WITH 2OBV POWER

SUPPLY, DISCONNECT BLK WERE FROM 25or

TERMINAl. AND CONNEC[ TO 2OOV TERMIRA!

OUTDOORPAN CONTACTON

OUTDOOR FAN MO[OR

POWER EXHAUST CONTACIOR

POWER EXHAUST MOTOR

PLUGGED FILTER

PLUG

QUADRUPLE TERMINAl

RAT RETURN AIR TEMPRHATUNE

RS ROLLOUT SWIT¢I!

SAT SUPPLY AIR TEMPERAIURE

SCT SATURATED CONDENSING IEMP

SSP SATURATED SUCTION PRESSURE

TB TERMINAL BOARD

TRAN TRANSFORMER

UC UNLOADER COlE

THERMOSTAT/IOC MARKINGS

BM BLOWER NO/OR

C CONNON

CW COMBUSTION MOTOR

G FAR

iFO INDOOR FAN ON

LI LENE I

R THERMOSTAT POWER

RT POWER SUPPLY

SS SPEED SENSOR

WTHER4OSTAT HEA r .... _Wl Isl SIAGE OF AING POWRD

wR 2n_ STAGE OF /_EAHNG _CONVEN NCI _

xALARM OUTPUT : OUI _:

Y1 1st SIAGE OF COOLENG

Y2 2nd SIAGE OF COOL NG

SFE CONTROL SCNFMATIC

BC

48 SERES ONLY

GAS SECTION ONIY

(48 SERES>

C C I......

[£{:] E ]

I 48HG504029I&O.....

Fig. 14 -48/50PD Power Wiring Schematic and Legend

(:08584

45

D]:T AND UC LOCAIION

RAT

UNIT CONTROL BOX

TRAN 1 TRAN 2

AUXI

i ......: _ _"i¸

// Z{: 7

MPRESSOR [CO

CONTACTO ......

-_ ECB

CURRENT

SENSOR

DSC

Fig. 15 - Typical Unit Component Arrangement

(:08657

46

Main Base Board (MBB)

See Fig. 16 and Table 19. The MBB is the center of the

ComfortLink control system. It contains the maior portion of the

operating software and controls the operation of the unit. The

MBB continuously monitors input/output channel information

received from its inputs and from the Economizer Control Board

(ECB). The MBB receives inputs from thermistors and transducers.

The MBB also receives the Current Sensor inputs for compressors

and other discrete or digital inputs. The MBB reads space

RED LED - STATUS GREEN LED -

_ LEN (LOCALEQUIPMENT NETWORK)

CEPL130346-01

L_

STATUS

temperature (SPT) from either a T-55, T-56 or T-58 device and

space temperature offset (SPTO) from a T-56 device. See

Field-Installed Accessories section. The MBB controls 9 relays.

IMPORTANT: The Main Base Board (MBB) has a 3-position

instance jumper that is factory set to '1.' Do not change this

setting.

YELLOW LED -

CCN (CARRIER COMFORT NETWORK)

INSTANCE JUMPER (SET TO 1)

J10

J7

I I I ©

Fig. 16 -Main Base Board (MBB)

J9

C07026

47

Table19-- MBBConnections

DISPLAY CONNECTION

NAME POINT DESCRIPTION SENSOR LOCATION TYPE OF I/O PIN NUMBER

INPUTS

Input power from TRAN1 control box 24 VAC J1, 1-3

IGC Fan Request gas section switch input J6, 4

FDWN Fire shutdown switch supply/return/space switch input J6, 6

HUM Space Humidity switch space switch input J7, 4

Digital Scroll Unloader switch input J7, 6

C.ALM Scroll Compressor Alarm switch input J7, 8

CMRA Compressor A Feedback switch input J7, 10

FIL.S Filter status switch indoor fan section switch input J9, 2-3

CS.A1 Compressor A1 Current Sensor control box 0-5vdc digital input J9, 10-12

SPT Space temperature (T55/56) space 1Ok thermistor J8, 1-2

SPTO Space temperature offset (T56) space 1Ok thermistor J8, 2-3

OAT Outdoor air temperature outdoor coil support 1Okthermistor J8, 5-6

indoor fan housing, or 1Ok thermistor J8, 7-8

SAT Supply air temperature supply duct

SCT.A Saturated condenser temperature, circuit A outdoor coil, circuit A 5k thermistor J8, 9-10

RAT Return air temperature Return air Section 1Ok thermistor J8, 13-14

FAN.S Fan status switch indoor fan section switch input J8, 15-16

0-5 VDC pressure J8, 18-20

SSRA Suction pressure, circuit A compressor A suction transducer

OUTPUTS

CTLR Digital Scroll Ctrl Pwr relay J10, 11

CCH Crankcase heat relay relay J10, 13

OFC.1 Outdoor fan 1 relay relay J10, 19

IDF Indoor fan VFD pwr relay relay J10, 21

ALRM Alarm relay relay J10, 23

HT.1 Heat Stage 2 relay relay J10, 25

HT.2 Heat Stage 1 relay relay J10, 27

COMMUNICATION

Local Equipment Network (LEN) communication J5, 1-3

Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) communication J5, 5-7

Network device power 24 VAC J5, 9-10

Scrolling Marquee Display (LEN) communication J4, 1-3

Scrolling Marquee Display power 24 VAC J4, 5-6

Modulation Board (AUXl) LEN communication J3, 1-3

Optional ECB power 24 VAC J2, 1-2

48

Economizer Control Board (ECB)

The ECB controls the economizer actuator. (See Fig. 17 and Table

20.) The control signal from the ECB uses either the MFT

(Multi-Function Technology) digital communication protocol or a

4to 20 mA output signal as defined by the configuration

Configuration--_ECON--_E.CTL. The ECB has inputs for

Indoor Air Quality (IAQ), Outdoor Air Quality (OAQ), enthalpy

and RH sensor. It also controls two power exhaust outputs.

By digitally communicating with the ECB, the economizer

actuator is able to provide the damper position and diagnostic

information to the ComfortLink controller. The damper

position is displayed at Outputs-->ECON-->EC.4P. Diagnostic

information is displayed via Alert T414. More information about

these alarms is contained in the Alarms and Alerts section.

IMPORTANT: The Economizer Control Board (ECB) has a

4-position DIP switch that is factory set to '0' (ON, towards

the center of the board). Do not change this setting.

RED LED GREEN LED-LEN

STATUS (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK)

+0+0

C07027

Fig. 17 -Economizer Control Board (ECB)

49

Table 20 -- ECB Connections

DISPLAY POINT DESCRIPTION SENSOR TYPE OF I/O CONNECTION

NAME LOCATION PIN NUMBER

INPUTS

Input power from MBB control box 24 VAC J1, 1-2

RM.OC Remote occupancy switch field installed switch input J4, 2

ENTH or Outdoor enthalpy switch, or economizer, or switch input J4, 4

IAQ.S Indoor air quality switch return/space

IAQ Indoor air quality sensor return/space 0-20 mA J5, 2

OAQ or Outdoor air quality sensor, or field installed 0-20 mA J5, 5

SRRH Relative humidity sensor

Sensor Common Ground J5, 3

Actuator Common Ground J7, 3

OUTPUTS

Output power to enthalpy switch 24 VAC J4, 3

Output power for loop power sensors 24 VDC J5, 1

Output power to economizer actuator 24 VAC J7, 2

PE.1 Power exhaust 1 relay relay J8, 3

PE.2 Power exhaust 2 relay relay J8, 6

EC.CP Commanded Economizer position 0-20 mA J9, 1

COMMUNICATION

Local Equipment Network (LEN) communication J2, 1-3

Carrier Comfort Network (CON) communication J3

EC.CP & Economizer actuator position MFT J7, 1

EC.AP (digital control) communication

5O

Modulation Board (AUX1)

The AUXI board controls the compressor capacity and the indoor

fan speed (See Fig. 18 and Table 21.) It outputs a l-5vdc and a

2-10vdc signal to the DSC and VFD for capacity and fan speed,

respectively. This board is also used as the LEN connection buss

for the ECB, therefore must be operational for the ECB to

communicate.

IMPORTANT: The AUXI board has an 8-position DIP switch

(SI) that is factory set for its LEN address. All the switches must

be in the off position except 4, 5 and 7 which are on (off is towards

the center of the board). Do not change this setting.

DIP SWITCH

TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5 TR(_ TR7 TR8

Fig. 18 - Modulation Board (AUX1)

(:08658

Table 21 -- AUX1 Connections

DISPLAY CONNECTION

NAME POINT DESCRIPTION TYPE OF I/O PIN NUMBER

OUTPUTS

Input power from TRAN1 24 VAC J1, 11-12

CAPC Compressor Capacity 1-5vdc CH9

RSPD Commanded Fan Speed 2-10vdc CH10

COMMUNICATION

Local Equipment Network (LEN) communication J9, 1-3

Local Equipment Network (LEN) communication J9, 1-3

51

Digital Scroll Control Board (DSC)

The DSC board controls the compressor's capacity. (See Fig. 19

and Table 22.) It receives a l-5vdc signal from the AUX1 board

determined by the cooling algorithm.

The DSC has direct control of the compressor and pulses a

solenoid unloader on and off to provide a specific capacity. The

discharge temperature thermistor (DTT) is monitored by the DSC

for compressor safety. The DSC is equipped with an LED

(light-emitting diode) for diagnostics, See the troubleshooting

section for more details.

T3

R

....CC

TI

C

T2

D4 D2 T6 T4 T2 P6 P4 P2 C4 C2 24 24 .,i Power LED

D3D1 T5T3T1 P5P3Pl C3C1 VACCOM {]_ (Green)

Unloader LED

Alert LED

(Red)

Fig. 19 -Digital Scroll Controller (DSC)

(08659

Table 22 -- DSC Connections

DISPLAY SENSOR CONNECTION

NAME POINT DESCRIPTION LOCATION TYPE OF I/O PIN NUMBER

INPUTS

CTLR Digital Scroll Ctrl Pwr 24 VAC 24VAC/24COM

Compressor Discharge Temperature (DTT) Discharge line 86k thermistor T1/T2

CAPC Compressor Capacity 1- 5vdc C1/O2

Load Control Power* 19-250VA0 L1/L2

OUTPUTS

C.ALM Scroll Compressor Alarm Relay A1/A2

CMRA Compressor A Feedback Relay M1/M2

Digital Scroll Unloader Compressor Relay U1/U2

section

Voltage used for contacts M1 & M2, U1 & U2, and VI & V2 (24 VAC used).

52

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

The VFD varies the frequency of the AC voltage supplied to the

indoor fan. (See Fig. 20 and Table 23.) This causes the variance in

the speed of the fan. The commanded fan speed is received by the

VFD from the AUXI board as a 2-10vdc signal.

The AII DIP switch must be in the off (or towards "U") position to

properly read the analog signal. There are three jumper wires that

must remain installed for proper operation. The VFD is mounted

behind the fan housing on the fan sled and the remote keypad is

mounted on the front of the fan housing for easy access. The VFD

is factory set to the auto mode for unit operation.

....

_i2V]iii

i..........

Fig. 20 -Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

Table 23 -- VFD Connections

TERMINAL TERMINAL

DISPLAY NAME POINT DESCRIPTION TYPE OF I/O NUMBER NAME

LOW VOLTAGE INPUTS

Shielded Cable Ground Shield 1 SCR

ESPD Commanded Fan Speed 2-10vdc 2 All *

Analog Input 1 Common Ground 3 AGND

Low Voltage Power (jumped to DI1 & DI4) 24v 10 24v

Low Voltage Common (jumped to DCOM) Ground 11 GND

Discrete Inputs Common (jumped from GND) Ground 12 DCOM

Discrete Input 1 (jumped from 24v) Switch Input 13 DI1

Discrete Input 4 (jumped from 24v) Switch Input 16 DI4

HIGH VOLTAGE

Voltage Leg from IFC-21 Voltage Input U1 MAINS

Voltage Leg from IFC-22 Voltage Input V1 MAINS

Voltage Leg from IFC-23 Voltage Input Wl MAINS

Voltage Leg to IFM-3 Voltage Output U2 MOTOR

Voltage Leg to IFM-2 Voltage Output V2 MOTOR

Voltage Leg to IFM-1 Voltage Output W2 MOTOR

Requires the All dip switch to be in in the Off (or towards "U") position.

C09146

53

Integrated Gas Control (IGC) Board

The IGC is provided on gas heat units. (See Fig. 21 and Table 24.)

The IGC controls the direct spark ignition system and monitors the

rollout switch, limit switch, and induced-draft motor Hall Effect

switch.

The IGC is equipped with an LED (light-emitting diode) for

diagnostics. See the Troubleshooting section for more information.

RED LED-STATUS

LH33WPOO2A

II II II

1068-12

Fig. 21 - Integrated Gas Control (IGC) Board

( 07028

Table 24 -- IGC Connections

TERMINAL CONNECTION

LABEL POINT DESCRIPTION SENSOR LOCATION TYPE OF I/O PIN NUMBER

INPUTS

RT,C Input power from TRAN 1 control box 24 VAC

SS Speed sensor gas section analog input J1, 1-3

FS, T1 Flame sensor gas section switch input

W Heat stage 1 MBB 24 VAC J2, 2

RS Rollout switch gas section switch input J2, 5-6

LS Limit switch gas section switch input J2, 7-8

CS Centrifugal switch (not used) switch input J2, 9-10

OUTPUTS

L1, CM Induced draft combustion motor gas section line VAC

IFO Indoor fan request control box relay J2, 1

GV (W1) Gas valve (heat stage 1) gas section relay J2, 12

GV (W2) Gas Valve (heat stage 2, from MBB) gas section Not on IGC

54

Low Voltage Terminal Strip

(TB1)

This circuit board provides a connection point between the major

control boards and a majority of the field-installed accessories. (See

Fig. 22 and Table 25.) The circuit breakers for the low voltage

control transformers, interface connection for the Carrier Comfort

Network@ (CCN) communication, and interface connection for the

Local Equipment Network (LEN) communications are also located

on the low voltage terminal strip.

17 I I4 I I

J10 J11 RUN TEST

SEPARATIONOFCIRCUITSTO EACH24V TRANSFORMERMUSTBEMAiNTAiNED

123 4 5 678910 R Y1 Y2 W1 W2 G C X

Fig. 22 -Low-Voltage Terminal Board (LVTB)

Table 25 -- Field Connection Terminal Strip

TERMINAL DISPLAY SENSOR CONNECTION

LABEL NAME POINT DESCRIPTION LOCATION TYPE OF I/O PIN NUMBER

1 24 VDC Sensor Loop power 24 VDC output JlO, 17

2 IAQ Indoor air quality sensor return/space 4-20 mA input J1O, 16

3 Air quality & humidity sensor common Ground J1O, 15

OAQ or Outdoor air quality sensor or

4 SP.RH Relative humidity sensor field installed 4-20 mA input J1O, 14

5 RM.OC Remote occupancy switch field installed 24 VAC input J1O, 16

6 Switch power (ENTH, RM.OC, IAQ.S) 24 VAC output JlO, 11-12

ENTH or Outdoor enthalpy switch, or economizer, or

7 IAQ.S Indoor air quality switch return/space 24 VAC input J1 O, 9-10

Economizer commanded position

8* EC.CP economizer 2-10 VDC output J1O, 6-8

actuator (when in digital control)

9 Economizer signal common Ground J1O, 3-5

10" EC.AP Economizer position feedback (when economizer communication JlO, 1-2

in analog control) 2-10 VDC output

R 24 VAC power 24 VAC output J11, 11-14

Y1 NOT USED J11,10

Y2 NOT USED Jll, 9

Wl NOT USED Jll, 7-8

W2 HUM Space Humidity Switch space 24 VAC input J11,6

G NOT USED Jll, 5

C 24 VAC common 24 VAC output J11,2-4

X ALRM Alarm output (normally open) 24 VAC output J11, 1

FIRE

SHUTDOWN FDWN Fire shutdown switch 24 VAC output supply/return switch input J12, 7

1

FIRE

SHUTDOWN FDWN Fire shutdown switch input supply/return switch input J12, 6

2

T55 SPT Space temperatu re (T55/56) space 1Okthermistor J12, 4- 5

1-2

T55 SPTO Space temperatu re offset (T56) space 1Ok thermistor J12, 3- 4

2-3

FAN STATUS NOT USED J12, 1-2

1-2

LEN Local Equipment Network (LEN) communication J13, 1-3, 4-5

CCN Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) communication J13, 6-8, 4-5

Refer to Third Party Control section for more information

(08660

55

Scrolling Marquee Display

This device is the keypad interface used to access rooftop

information, read sensor values, and test the unit. (See Fig. 23.)

The Scrolling Marquee display is a 4-key, 4-character, 16-segment

LED (light-emitting diode) display. Eleven mode LEDs are located

on the display as well as an Alarm Status LED. See Basic Control

Usage section for further details.

Alarm St alus

80,;2°0 :2

80:::,:.......

Fig. 23 -Scrolling Marquee

(06320

Accessory Navigator TM Display

The accessory hand-held Navigator display can be used with

48/50PD units. (See Fig. 24.) The Navigator display operates the

same way as the Scrolling Marquee device. The Navigator display

plugs into the LEN port on either TB or the ECB board.

Fig. 24 -Accessory Navigator TM Display

C06321

Carrier Comfort Network (CCN)® Interface

The units can be connected to the CCN if desired. The

communication bus wiring is a shielded, 3-conductor cable with

drain wire and is field supplied and installed. The system elements

are connected to the communication bus in a daisy chain

arrangement. (See Fig. 25.) The positive pin of each system

element communication connector must be wired to the positive

pins of the system elements on either side of it. This is also

required for the negative and signal ground pins of each system

element. Wiring connections for CCN should be made at TB. (See

Fig. 25.) Consult the CCN Contractor's Manual for further

information.

IMPORTANT: Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG

(American Wire Gauge) minimum stranded, tinned copper.

Individual conductors must be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon,

vinyl, Teflon, or polyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil

shield and an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl, or

Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of -20°C to

60°C is required. See Table below for acceptable wiring.

MANUFACTURER PART NO.

Alpha 2413 or 5463

Belden 8772

Carol C2528

West Penn 302

It is important when connecting to a CCN communication bus that

a color-coding scheme be used for the entire network to simplify

the installation. It is recommended that red be used for the signal

positive, black for the signal negative and white for the signal

ground. Use a similar scheme for cables containing different

colored wires.

At each system element, the shields of its communication bus

cables must be tied together. The shield screw on TBI can be used

to tie the cables together. If the communication bus is entirely

within one building, the resulting continuous shield must be

connected to a ground at one point only. The shield screw on TBI

is not acceptable for grounding. If the communication bus cable

exits from one building and enters another, the shields must be

connected to grounds at the lightning suppressor in each building

where the cable enters or exits the building (one point per building

only). To connect the unit to the network:

1. Turn off power to the control box.

2. Cut the CCN wire and strip the ends of the red (+), white

(ground), and black (-) conductors. (Substitute appropriate

colors for different colored cables.)

3. Connect the red wire to (+) terminal on TBI, the white wire

to COM terminal, and the black wire to the (-) terminal.

4. The RJI4 CCN connector on TBI can also be used, but is

only intended for temporary connection (for example, a

laptop computer running Carrier network software).

5. Restore power to unit.

IMPORTANT: A shorted CCN bus cable will prevent some

routines from running and may prevent the unit from starting. If

abnormal conditions occur, unplug the connector. If conditions

return to normal, check the CCN connector and cable. Run new

cable if necessary. A short in one section of the bus can cause

problems with all system elements on the bus.

Field-Installed Accessories

Space Temperature Sensor (T-55)

The T-55 space temperature sensor (part no. 33ZCT55SPT) is a

field-installed accessory. The sensor is installed on a building

interior wall to measure room air temperature. The T-55 sensor

also includes an override button on the front cover to permit

occupants to override the Unoccupied Schedule (if programmed).

TBI-T55-1 ........ Sensor Input

TBI-T55-2 ........ Sensor Common

Space Temperature Sensor (T-56)

The T-56 space temperature sensor (part no. 33ZCT56SPT) is a

field-installed accessory. This sensor includes a sliding scale on the

front cover that permits an occupant to adjust the space temperature

set point remotely. The T-56 sensor also includes an override

button on the front cover to allow occupants to override the

unoccupied schedule (if programmed).

TB1-T55-1 ........ Sensor Input

TB1-T55-2 ........ Sensor Common

TB1-T55-3 ........ Setpoint Offset Input

56

Space Temperature Sensor (T-58)

The T-58 space temperature sensor (part no. 33ZCT58SPT) is a

field-installed accessory. The T-58 sensor communicates with the

ComfortLink TM controller, providing space temperature, heating

and cooling set points, and mode operation information.

Refer to the T-58 installation instructions for information on

installing and configuring the T-58 sensor.

CCNBUS

Each T-58 sensor must have a unique address on the CCN. Each

T-58 sensor nmst also be configured with the address of the unit

control it is communicating to.

Space Temperature Sensor Averaging

See Fig. 26 for space temperature averaging with T-55 sensors

only. If the use of one T-56 sensor is required, refer to Fig. 27.

BUILDING SUPERVISOR

NETWORK

OPTIONS

REMOTE __[ AUTODIAL i--

CCN SITE GATEWAY

NON CARRIER

HVAC I

EQUIPMENT

COMFORT

CONTROLLER

RO& TTOP ROO OP

€ROOFTOP _ L_ _

ROOFTOP

UNIT UNIT

HEATING/COOLING UNITS

LEGEND

CCN-- CarrierComfort Network ®

CL -- ComfortLink'" Controls

DAV-- DigitalAirVolume

HVAC-- Heating,Ventilation, and

Air Conditoning

TCU -- Terminal Control Unit

TO

ADDITIONAL

MINALS

DAV FAN

POWERED

MIXING

BOX

AIR DISTRIBUTION-DIGITALAIR VOLUME CONTROL (DAV)

Fig. 25 -CCN System Architecture

(07030

57

TB

T B 1-T55

] RED

] BLK

TO MAIN

BASE BOARD

1

I I

I I

/

SENSOR 1

RED RED

BLK BLK

RED

BLK

SENSOR 2

7

I

0-

SENSOR 3

RED

BLK L

SENSOR

SPACETEMPERATURE AVERAGING --4 T-55 SENSOR APPLICATION

TB1 -T55

vt RED

,1_ BLK

I SENSOR 1

I

SENSOR 4

LEGEND

D

TO MAIN

BASE BOARD

-- Terminal Block

-- Factory Wiring

-- Field Wiring

tj

SENSOR 2

RED 41

BLK

SENSOR 5

RED

BLK

I

la

I

LRED

• ®

BLK

SENSOR 7 SENSOR 8

RED

BLK I

tj

SENSOR 3

RED

BLK I

tw

SENSOR 6

RED

BLK I

SENSOR 9

SPACETEMPERATURE AVERAGING --9 T-55 SENSOR APPLICATION

Fig. 26 - Space Temperature Sensor Averaging

C07032

TB1-T55

] RED

] BLK

TO MAIN

BASE

BOARD

I

I

I

I

I

I

RED RED

BLK BLK

RED

BLK

7

I

0-

TB1-T55

[]

TO MAIN

BASE

BOARD

VVV-

T-55 SENSOR 1 L

T-55 SENSOR 2

F

T

T-55 SENSOR 3

RED

BLK

WHT

I

Fig. 27 - Space Temperature Sensor Averaging with 3 T-55 Sensors and One T-56 Sensor

C07033

58

Carrier Accessory Kits

There are specific accessory kits sold for various field installed

accessories. These kits vary based on model, size, voltage,

manufacture date, and duct orientation. Some of these kits include

Economizer, Power Exhaust, and Electric Heat. Refer to the

Controls Quick Set-Up section for configuration and more

information on these accessories.

Two-Position Damper

The two-position outdoor air damper accessory usage depends on

model size and return duct orientation. This accessory wires

directly into the low voltage circuit for the indoor fan control. No

other control configuration is needed.

Indoor Air Quality

The indoor air quality (IAQ) sensor (part no. 33ZCSENCO2) is a

field-installed accessory which measures CO2 levels in the air.

When installing this sensor, an ECB board must be installed and

the unit must be configured for IAQ use by setting

Configuration-+AIR.Q-+IA.CF to a value of 1, 2, or 3. See the

Indoor Air Quality section for more information.

TB1-2 ....... 4-20 mA Input

TB1-3 ....... Sensor Common

TB1-R ...... 24 VAC Output

TB1-C ...... Common (GND)

Outdoor Air Quality

The outdoor air quality (OAQ) sensor is afield-installed accessory

that measures ('02 levels in the air. When installing this sensor, an

ECB board must be installed and the unit must be configured for

OAQ use by setting Configuration-+AIR.Q-+OA.CF to a value

of Ior 2. See the Indoor Air Quality section for more information.

TBI-4 ....... 4-20 mA Input

TBI-3 ....... Sensor Common

TB1-R ...... 24 VAC Output

TB1-C ...... Common (GND)

Smoke Detectors

The smoke detectors are field-installed accessories. These detectors

can detect smoke in either the return air (part no.

CRSMKDET003A00) or supply and return air (part no.

CRSMKSUP002A00). When installing either detector, the unit

must be configured for fire shutdown by setting

Configuration-+UNIT-+FS.SW to normally open (1) or normally

closed (2).

TB1-Fire Shutdown-1 .... Dry Contact Source

TB1-Fire Shutdown-2 .... Discrete Input to Board

TB1-R ................ 24 VAC Output

TB1-C ................ Common (GND)

Filter Status

The filter status accessory (part no. CRSTATUS002B00) is a

field-installed accessory. This accessory detects plugged filters.

When installing this accessory, the unit must be configured for

filter status by setting Configuration-+UNIT-+FL.SW to

normally open (1) or normally closed (2). Normally open (1) is the

preferred configuration. Filter status wires are pre-run in the unit

harness and located near the switch installation location. Refer to

the Filter Accessory Installation Instructions for more information.

Fan Status

The fan status accessory (part no. CRSTATUS003B00) is a

field-installed accessory. This accessory detects when the indoor

fan is blowing air. When installing this accessory, the unit must be

configured for fan status by setting

Configuration-+UNIT-+FN.SW to normally open (1) or

normally closed (2). Normally open (1) is the preferred

configuration. Fan status wires are pre-run in the unit harness and

located near the switch installation location. Refer to the Fan

Accessory Installation Instructions for more information.

IMPORTANT: The Fan Status terminals on TB1 are NOT to be

used.

Enthalpv Sensors

The enthalpy accessories (part no. CRENTSNG002A00 and

CRENTDIF002A00) are field-installed accessories. The first

accessory (outdoor air only) detemfines when the enthalpy is low

relative to a fixed reference. Adding the second accessory (return

air) compares the enthalpy between the outdoor and return

airstreams. In each case, the enthalpy 4 to 20 mA signals are

converted to a switch output which is read by the ECB. When

installing this accessory, the unit must be configured for

enthalpy-based control by setting

Configuration-+ECON-+EN.SW to normally open (1). Normal

status is an active switch which tells the control that enthalpy is

LOW. The actual switch terminal LOW is normally closed. Refer

to the Enthalpy Kit Installation Instructions for more information

on its installation.

Return/Supply Air Temperature Sensor

The temperature sensor (part no. 33ZCSENSAT) is afield-installed

accessory which may be installed on the common return air duct

and/or the common supply air duct near the unit. The duct supply

air temperature (SAT) may be used to replace the SAT sensor that

is internal to the unit. A supply duct SAT measurement is valid for

heating mode display while the factory-standard internal SAT is

not valid for heating due to its location upstream of the heating

section. When installing the supply duct SAT, the unit must be

configured by setting Configuration--+UNIT--+SATJI to ENBL.

A SAT sensor in the supply duct is the preferred configuration for

systems with Carrier variable volume and temperature (VVT®)

accessory controls.

Space Humidistat

The Space Humidistat (part no. --HL--38MG-029) is a wall

mounted device with an adjustable setpoint to control humidity

levels. The humidistat input is provided on the field connection

terminal board. The Space Humidity Switch configuration,

Configuration-_UNIT-_RH.SW, identifies the normally open or

normally closed status of this input at LOW humidity.

TB1-R ...... 24 VAC Dry Contact Source

TB1-W2 ..... Discrete Input to Board

Space Humidity Sensor

The space relative humidity sensor (part no. 33ZCSENDRH-01

duct mount or 33ZCSENSRH-01 wall mount) is a field-installed

accessory. The space relative humidity (RHS) may be selected for

use if the outdoor air quality sensor (OAQ) is not used and an

economizer board is installed. When installing the relative

humidity sensor, the unit must be configured by setting

Configuration -_UNIT-_RH.S to YES.

TBI-1 ....... 24 VDC Loop Power

TB1-4 ....... 4-20 mA Input Signal

SERVICE

ELECTRICALSHOCK HAZARD

Failure to follow this warning could cause personal

iniury or death.

Before performing service or maintenance operations

on unit, turn off main power switch to unit and install

lockout tag. Ensure electrical service to rooftop unit

agrees with voltage and amperage listed on the unit

rating plate.

59

UNITOPERATIONANDSAFETYHAZARD

Failureto follow this warning could cause personal

iniury, death and/or equipment damage.

Puron ® (R-410A) refrigerant systems operate at higher

pressures than standard R-22 systems. Do not use R-22

service equipment or components on Puron refrigerant

equipment.

FIRE, EXPLOSION HAZARD

Failure to follow this warning could result in personal

injury, death and/or property damage.

1. Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service,

or maintenance can cause property damage, personal

iniury, or loss of life. Refer to the User's Information

Manual provided with this unit for more details.

2. Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable

vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other

appliance.

What to do if you smell gas:

1. DO NOT try to light any appliance.

2. DO NOT touch any electrical switch, or use any

phone in your building.

3. IMMEDIATELY call your gas supplier from a

neighbor's phone. Follow the gas supplier's

instructions.

4. If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire

department.

FIRE, EXPLOSION HAZARD

Failure to follow this warning could result in personal

injury or death.

Disconnect gas piping from unit when pressure testing at

pressure greater than 0.5 psig. Pressures greater than

0.5 psig will cause gas valve damage resulting in hazardous

condition. If gas valve is subjected to pressure greater than

0.5 psig, it must be replaced before use. When pressure

testing field-supplied gas piping at pressures of 0.5 psig or

less, a unit connected to such piping must be isolated by

closing the manual gas valve(s).

Cleaning

Inspect unit interior at beginning of each heating and cooling

season and as operating conditions require. Remove unit top panel

and/or side panels for access to unit interior.

Coil Maintenance and Cleaning Recommendation

Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain proper

operation of the unit. Elimination of contamination and removal of

harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the coil and extend

the life of the unit. The following maintenance and cleaning

procedures are recommended as part of the routine maintenance

activities to extend the life of the coil.

Remove Surface Loaded Fibers

Surface loaded fibers or dirt should be removed with a vacuum

cleaner. If a vacuum cleaner is not available, a soft non-metallic

bristle brush may be used. In either case, the tool should be applied

in the direction of the fins. Coil surfaces can be easily damaged (fin

edges can be easily bent over and damage to the coating of a

protected coil) if the tool is applied across the fins.

IMPORTANT: Use of a water stream, such as a garden hose,

against a surface loaded coil will drive the fibers and dirt into the

coil. This will make cleaning efforts more difficult. Surface loaded

fibers must be completely removed prior to using low velocity

clean water rinse.

Periodic Clean Water Rinse

A periodic clean water rinse is very beneficial for coils that are

applied in coastal or industrial environments. However, it is very

important that the water rinse is made with very low velocity water

stream to avoid damaging the fin edges. Monthly cleaning as

described below is recommended.

Routine Cleaning of Round-Tube Coil Surfaces

Monthly cleaning with Totaline® environmentally sound coil

cleaner is essential to extend the life of coils. This cleaner is

available from Carrier Replacement parts division as part number

P902-0301 for a one gallon container, and part number

P902-0305 for a 5 gallon container. It is recommended that all

round-tube coils, including standard aluminum, pre-coated,

copper/copper or E-coated coils be cleaned with the Totaline

environmentally sound coil cleaner as described below. Coil

cleaning should be part of the unit's regularly scheduled

maintenance procedures to ensure long life of the coil. Failure to

clean the coils may result in reduced durability in the environment.

Avoid the use of:

• coil brighteners

• acid cleaning prior to painting

• high pressure washers

• poor quality water for cleaning

Totaline environmentally sound coil cleaner is non-flammable,

hypoallergenic, non-bacterial, and a USDA accepted

biodegradable agent that will not harm the coil or surrounding

components such as electrical wiring, painted metal surfaces, or

insulation. Use of non-recommended coil cleaners is strongly

discouraged since coil and unit durability could be affected.

Totaline Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner Application

Equipment

• 21/2 gallon garden sprayer

• water rinse with low velocity spray nozzle

[]NIT DAMAGE HAZARD

Failure to follow this caution may result in corrosion and

damage to the unit.

Harsh chemicals, household bleach or acid or basic cleaners

should not be used to clean outdoor or indoor coils of any

kind. These cleaners can be very difficult to rinse out of the

coil and can accelerate corrosion at the fin/tube interface

where dissimilar materials are in contact. If there is dirt

below the surface of the coil, use the Totaline

environmentally sound coil cleaner as described above.

60

UNITRELIABILITYHAZARD

Failureto follow this caution may result in reduced unit

performance.

High velocity water from a pressure washer, garden hose, or

compressed air should never be used to clean a coil. The

force of the water or air jet will bend the fin edges and

increase airside pressure drop.

Sound Coil Cleaner ApplicationTotaline Environmentally

Instructions

1. Proper eye protection such as safety glasses is

recommended during nfixing and application.

2. Remove all surface loaded fibers and dirt with a vacuum

cleaner as described above.

3. Thoroughly wet finned surfaces with clean water and a low

velocity garden hose, being careful not to bend fins.

4. Mix Totaline environmentally sound coil cleaner in a

21/2 gallon garden sprayer according to the instructions

included with the cleaner. The optimum solution

temperature is 100 ° F.

IMPORTANT: Do NOT USE water in excess of 130°F, as the

enzymatic activity will be destroyed.

5. Thoroughly apply Totaline® environmentally sound coil

cleaner solution to all coil surfaces including finned area,

tube sheets and coil headers.

6. Hold garden sprayer nozzle close to finned areas and apply

cleaner with a vertical, up-and-down motion. Avoid

spraying in horizontal pattern to nfininfize potential for fin

damage.

7. Ensure cleaner thoroughly penetrates deep into finned

areas.

8. Interior and exterior finned areas must be thoroughly

cleaned.

9. Finned surfaces should remain wet with cleaning solution

for 10 nfinutes.

10. Ensure surfaces are not allowed to dry before rinsing.

Reapplying cleaner as needed to ensure 10-nfinute

saturation is achieved.

11. Thoroughly rinse all surfaces with low velocity clean water

using downward rinsing motion of water spray nozzle.

Protect fins from damage from the spray nozzle.

Condensate Drain Pan

Check and clean each year at the start of the cooling season. In

winter, keep drains and traps dry.

To clean the condensate pan:

1. Disconnect condensate drain system from side or bottom

drain connection.

2. Remove and clean trap.

3. Remove 4 screws securing condensate pan access cover to

unit. Save screws and panel.

4. Slide condensate pan out from unit and clean. Pan is made

of non-corrosive plastic. Use a nfild cleaner to remove

heavy deposits of dirt and grime.

5. Replace pan in unit.

6. Replace condensate pan access cover with 4 screws saved

from Step 3.

7. Re-attach and prime condensate trap.

8. Connect condensate drainage system.

ROLLOUT

t

HEATEXCHANGER /

SECTION MAINBURNERSECTION

INDUCED

MOTOR

-COMBUSTION

FAN HOUSING

MAtN GAS

VALVE

Fig. 28 - Typical Gas Heating Section

(07037

Filters

Clean or replace at start of each heating and cooling season, or

more often if operating conditions require. Refer to unit Installation

Instructions for type and size.

Outdoor-Air Inlet Screens

Clean screens with steam or hot water and a mild detergent. Do

not use throwaway filters in place of screens. See unit installation

instructions for quantity and size.

Main Burner (48PD)

At the beginning of each heating season, inspect for deterioration

or blockage due to corrosion or other causes. Observe the main

burner flames. Refer to Main Burners section.

Flue Gas Passageways (48PD)

The flue collector box and heat exchanger cells may be inspected

by opening heat section access door, flue box cover, and main

burner assembly. (See Fig. 28.) Refer to Main Burners section for

burner removal sequence. If cleaning is required, clean tubes with a

wire brush. Use Caution with ceranfic heat exchanger baffles.

When installing retaining clip, be sure the center leg of the clip

extends inward toward baffle. (See Fig. 29.)

CERAMIC

BAFFLE

CLIP

NOTE: One baffle and clip will be in each upper tube of the heat exchanger.

C07260

Fig. 29 -Removing Heat Exchanger Ceramic

Baffles and Clips

Combustion-Air Blower (48PD)

Clean periodically to assure proper airflow and heating efficiency.

Inspect blower wheel every fall and periodically during heating

season. For the first heating season, inspect blower wheel

bi-monthly to determine proper cleaning frequency.

61

Toinspectblowerwheel,openheatsectiondoor.Usinga

flashlight,lookintotheflueexhaustducttoinspect.If cleaningis

required,removemotorandwheelassemblybyremovingthe

screwsholdingtheflueboxcovertothefluebox.Removethe

screwsholdingtheinducerhousingtotheinletplate.Thewheel

canthenberemovedfromthemotorshaftandcleanedwitha

detergentorsolvent.Replacethewheelontothemotorshaftinthe

correctpositionandreassemblethefluecoverontothefluebox.

Lubrication

Compressors

Each compressor is charged with the correct amount of oil at the

factory.

UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD

Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to unit

components.

The compressor is in a Puron refrigerant system and uses a

polyolester (POE) oil. This oil is extremely hygroscopic,

meaning it absorbs water readily. POE oils can absorb 15

times as much water as other oils designed for HCFC and

CFC refrigerants. Avoid exposure of the oil to the

atmosphere.

Polyolester (POE) compressor lubricants are known to cause long

term damage to some synthetic roofing materials. Exposure, even if

immediately cleaned up, may cause roofing materials to become

brittle (leading to cracking) within a year. When performing any

service which may risk exposure of compressor oil to the roof, take

appropriate precautions to protect roofing. Procedures which risk

oil leakage include compressor replacement, repairing refrigerant

leaks, and replacing refrigerant components. To prepare rooftop:

1. Cover extended roof work area with an impermeable plastic

dropcloth or tarp. Make sure a 10 x 10 ft area around the

work area is covered.

2. Cover area in front of the unit service panel with a terry

cloth shop towel to absorb lubricant spills and prevent

run-offs. Towel will also protect dropcloth from tears caused

by tools or components.

3. Place terry cloth shop towel inside the unit directly under

components to be serviced to prevent spills through the

bottom of the unit.

4. Perform the required service.

5. Remove an dispose of any oil contaminated material per

local codes.

Indoor Fan Shaft Bearings

The indoor fan has permanently sealed bearings. No field

lubrication is necessary.

Condenser and Evaporator-Fan Motor Bearings

The condenser-fan and evaporator-fan motors have permanently

sealed bearings, so no field lubrication is necessary.

Economizer or Manual Outside Air Damper

If blade adjustment is required, refer to unit or accessory

installation instructions,

Evaporator Fan Service and Replacement

The units feature a slide-out fan deck for easy servicing of the

indoor-fan motor, pulleys, belt, bearings and VFD. To service

components in this section, perform the following procedure:

1. Turn off unit power.

2. Open the fan section access door.

3. Remove two no. 10 screws at front of slide-out fan deck.

Save screws. (See Fig. 30.)

4. Disconnect the electrical wires connected to the slide-out

fan deck (supply air thermistor and fan status switch if

installed). Wires may be damaged if not disconnected.

5. Fan deck can now be slid out to access serviceable

components.

UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD

Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to the

unit.

DO NOT SLIDE FAN DECK OUT PAST THE FAN

DECK STOP. If further access is required, the fan deck

must be supported. Make sure plugs and wiring are not

pinched between fan housing and unit sheet metal post.

6. To replace fan deck to operating position, slide fan deck

back into the unit. Secure with the two no. 10 screws

removed in Step 3.

7. Re-attach electrical wires.

8. Close fan section access door.

9. Restore power to unit.

MOTOR

VFD

MOUNTING

BASE,

SCREW

(RIDDEN)

FAN DECK STOP

SLIDE_OUT

FAN DECK

PULLEY

SCREW

FAN

PULLEY

C08661

Fig. 30 - Evaporator-Fan Motor Adjustment

Evaporator Fan Performance Adjustment

Fan motor pulleys are factory set for speed shown in Appendix D.

To change fan speeds:

1. Shut off unit power supply.

2. Loosen nuts on the 4 carriage bolts in the mounting base.

Using adjusting bolts and plate, slide motor and remove

belt.

3. Loosen movable-pulley flange setscrew. (See Fig. 31.)

4. Screw movable flange toward fixed flange to increase speed

and away from fixed flange to decrease speed. Increasing

fan speed increases load on motor. Do not exceed maximum

speed specified in Appendix D.

See Appendix D for air quantity limits.

5. Set movable flange at nearest keyway of pulley hub and

tighten setscrew. (See Appendix D for speed change for

each full turn of pulley flange.)

6. Replace belts.

62

7.Realignfanandmotorpulleys:

a.Loosenfanpulleysetscrews.

b.Slidefanpulleyalongfanshaft.

c.Makeangularalignmentbylooseningmotorfrom

mountingplate.

8.Tightenbelts.

9.Restorepowertounit.

STRAIGHTEDGE OR STRING

MUST BE PARALLEL

WITH BELT

MOTOR AND FAN

SHAFTS MUST BE

PARALLEL

MOVABLE

FLANGE

SETSCREWS_

FIXED FLANGE

SINGLE-GROOVE

C06041

Fig. 31 - Evaporator-Fan Alignment and Adjustment

Evaporator Fan Belt Tension Adjustment

To adjust belt tension:

1. Turn off unit power.

2. Slide out fan deck to service position as shown in

Evaporator Fan Service and Replacement section above.

3. Loosen motor mounting plate bolts.

4. Move motor mounting plate to adjust to proper belt tension.

Motor adjuster bolts may be used to tighten belts. (See Fig.

30.) Do not overtighten belt.

5. Check for proper belt alignment. Adjust if necessary.

6. Tighten motor mounting plate bolts to lock motor in proper

position.

7. Return fan deck back into operating position.

8. Restore power to unit.

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Replacement

The 48/50PD units are equipped with a VFD that is mounted

behind the blower housing on the fan sled. The VFD's remote

display is mounted on the front of the fan housing for easier access.

The VFD is mounted to a plate which is mounted to the fan sled.

When accessing the VFD or to remove the VFD, follow the

Evaporator fan service and replacement Steps 1-5 and the

following steps:

IMPORTANT: If fan deck stop screws are removed for further

access, the front of the fan deck MUST BE SUPPORTED.

1. Remove the 2 screws holding the VFD's mount bracket to

the fan sled. The horizontal cross section of the bottom half

of the mount bracket is shown on Fig. 32.

2. Cut the wire ties holding the VFD power wires to the fan

housing and the two wire ties holding the control wires to

the VFD display/keypad at the top of the fan scroll.

3. With the VFD still attached, remove the mount bracket from

the fan sled. To do this requires a slight lift on the screw

side then a push towards the pulley side of the fan sled.

(See Fig. 32.) Lift out the bracket when the pulley side is

clear from the fan sled.

4. With all the wires stilled attached to the VFD, turn the VFD

assembly so it is parallel with the fan sled.

5. Pull the VFD assembly to the front of the fan sled and place

in a secure flat surface.

6. Disconnect the power, ground, RJ45, and control wiring to

the VFD making sure to note their connections.

IMPORTANT: Wires are marked with VFD terminal labels and

wiring diagram shows the wiring connections.

7. Remove the 4 screws holding the VFD to the mount bracket

and remove the VFD.

8. Remove the replacement VFD cover and install jumper

wires provided with it as shown on the unit wiring diagram.

If jumpers are not provided with the replacement VFD,

remove them from the defective one or field supply the

jumpers.

9. Set AII and AI2 DIP switches to the U (oft) direction as

indicated on the plastic housing near the DIP switch.

10. Replace the VFD with the new one.

11. Install the 4 screws in the VFD to secure it to the mounting

bracket.

12. Connect the wiring as it was on the previous VFD, refer to

the wiring diagram.

13. Move the VFD assembly to the back of the fan sled.

14. Turn the VFD assembly lengthwise with the fan housing,

making sure the screw side of the bracket lines up with the

screw holes on the fan sled.

15. Make sure the bracket s pulley side U bend is clear of the

fan sled and pull the assembly towards the screw side.

16. Install the 2 screws in the bracket to secure it to the fan sled.

17. Secure power and control wires with new wire ties.

18. Follow the Evaporator fan service and replacement Steps

6-9.

19. Power up VFD and set up its parameters per Table 40 in

Appendix B.

IMPORTANT: If fan deck stops were removed, they must be

reinstalled.

For VFD service and maintenance, refer to Appendix B.

'[*t/qff&'

(08662

Fig. 32 -VFD Mount Bracket Cross Section

Condenser-Fan Adjustment

1. Shut off unit power supply.

2. Remove condenser-fan assembly (grille, motor, motor

cover, and fan) and loosen fan hub setscrews.

3. Adjust fan height as shown in Fig. 33.

4. Tighten setscrews and replace condenser-fan assembly.

5. Turn on power to unit.

63

Fig. 33 - Condenser-Fan Adjustment

(08570

Verify Sensor Performance

Verify that thermistor, transducer, and switch inputs are reading

correctly. These values can be accessed through the Scrolling

Marquee display in the Temperatures, Pressures, and Inputs menus.

Some values will depend on configuration choices. Refer to the

Control Set Up Checklist completed for the specific unit

installation and to the configuration tables in Appendix A.

Economizer Operation During Power Failure

Dampers have a spring return. In event of power failure, dampers

will return to fully closed position until power is restored. Do not

manually operate damper motor:

Evacuation

Proper evacuation of the system will remove noncondensables and

ensure a tight, dry system before charging. Evacuate from both

high and low side ports. Never use the system compressor as a

vacuum pump. Refrigerant tubes and indoor coil should be

evacuated to 500 nficrons. Always break a vacuum with dry

nitrogen. The two possible methods are the deep vacuum method

and the triple evacuation method.

Deep Vacuum Method

The deep vacuum method requires a vacuum pump capable of

pulling a minimum vacuum of 500 nficrons and a vacuum gauge

capable of accurately measuring this vacuum depth. The deep

vacuum method is the most positive way of assuring a system is

tree of air and liquid water. (See Fig. 340

69

rC

©

5OOO

4500

4000

3500

3000

2500

2000

1500

1000

5OO

LEAK IN

VACUUM TIGHT

TOO WET

TIGHT

DRY SYSTEM

23456

MINUTES

Fig. 34 - Deep Vacuum Graph

(:06264

Triple Evacuation Method

The triple evacuation method should only be used when vacuum

pump is capable of pumping down to 28-in. of mercury and

system does not contain any liquid water. Proceed as follows:

1. Pump system down to 28-in. of mercury and allow pump

to continue operating for an additional 15 nfinutes.

2. Close service valves and shut off vacuum pump.

3. Connect a nitrogen cylinder and regulator to system and

open until system pressure is 2 psig.

4. Close service valve and allow system to stand for 1 hr.

During this time, dry nitrogen will be able to diffuse

throughout the system, absorbing moisture.

5. Repeat this procedure. System will then contain nfinimal

amounts of contanfinants and water vapor.

Refrigerant Charge

Amount of refrigerant charge is listed on unit nameplate. Refer to

Carrier GTAC II; Module 5; Charging, Recovery, Recycling, and

Reclamation section for charging methods and procedures. Unit

panels nmst be in place when unit is operating during charging

procedure.

Puron® (R-410A) refrigerant systems should be charged with

liquid refrigerant. Use a commercial type metering device in the

manifold hose.

UNIT OPERATION AND SAFETY HAZARD

Failure to follow this warning could cause personal

injury, death and/or equipment damage.

Puron (R-410A) refrigerant systems operate at higher

pressures than standard R-22 systems. Do not use R-22

service equipment or components on Puron refrigerant

equipment. Gauge set, hoses, and recovery system nmst

be designed to handle Puron refrigerant. If unsure

about equipment, consult the equipment manufacturer.

IMPORTANT: Do not use recycled refrigerant as it may contain

contanfinants.

No Charge in the System

Use standard evacuating techniques. After evacuating system,

weigh in the specified amount of refrigerant (refer to unit

nameplate). Verify charge using the charging chart via "Charge in

the System."

Charge in the System

IMPORTANT: The circuit must be running in normal cooling

mode with the compressor capacity at 100%. The VFD must be

running at max fan speed and indoor airflow must be within

specified air quantity limits for cooling (See Appendix D). All

outdoor fans must be on and running at high speed. Use the

Cooling Service Test Outdoor Fan Override function to start all

outdoor fans.

An accurate pressure gauge and temperature-sensing device is

required. Charging is accomplished by ensuring the proper amount

of liquid subcooling. Connect pressure gauge to the compressor

discharge service valve. Connect temperature sensing device to the

liquid line between the condenser and the TXV (thermostatic

expansion valve), and insulate it so that ambient temperature does

not affect reading. Use the cooling charging chart (Fig. 35-36) to

deternfine if additional charge is needed or if some charge needs to

be removed from the system.

To Use the Coolinu Charuinu Chart

Use the temperature and pressure readings, and find the

intersection point on the cooling charging chart. If intersection

point on chart is above line, add refrigerant. If intersection point on

chart is below line, carefully recover some of the charge. Recheck

suction pressure as charge is adjusted.

64

TheTXVis setto maintain between 10 and 15 degrees of

superheat at the compressors. The valves are factory set and cannot

be adjusted. Do not use A TXV designed for use with R-22.

R410A REFRIGERANT

OUTDOOR FAN M UST BE OPERA TING ON HIGH SPEED

160

140

120

lOO

80 ¸

60

20

150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550

Compressor Discharge Pressure, [psig]

160

Fig. 35 - Charging Chart-- 48/50PD05

R410A REFRIGERANT

OUTDOOR FAN M UST BE OPERA TING ON HIGH SPEED

6OO

(07040

140

120

lOO

80 ¸

60

20

150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600

Compressor Discharge Pressure, [psig]

Fig. 36 - Charging Chart i48/50PD06

(07041

Puron® Refrigerant

Puron refrigerant operates at 50 to 70 percent higher pressures than

R-22. Be sure that servicing equipment and replacement

components are designed to operate with Puron refrigerant. Do not

mix with components that have been used with other refrigerants.

Puron refrigerant, as with other HFCs, is only compatible with

POE oils.

Recovery cylinder service pressure rating must be 400 psig. Puron

systems should be charged with liquid refrigerant. Use a

commercial-type metering device in the manifold hose. Manifold

sets should be 750 psig high-side and 200 psig low-side with 520

psig low-side retard. Use hoses with 750 psig service pressure

rating. Leak detectors should be designed to detect HFC

refrigerant.

Table 26 -- Altitude Compensation*

48PG03-07

ELEVATION NATURAL GAS PROPANE

(It) ORIFICEt ORIFICEt

0-1,999 45 52

2,000 47 52

3,000 47 53

4,000 47 53

5,000 48 53

6,000 48 53

7,000 48 53

8,000 49 54

9,000 49 54

10,000 50 54

11,000 51 54

12,000 51 55

13,000 52 55

14,000 52 56

*As the height above sea level increases, there is less oxygen per cubic foot of air.

Therefore, heat input rate should be reduced at higher altitudes. Includes a 4% input

reduction per each 1000 ft.

t Orifices available through your Carrier dealer.

Gas Valve Adjustment

The gas valve opens and closes in response to the thermostat or

limit control.

When power is supplied to valve terminals W2 (High Fire) and C1,

the main valve opens to its preset position.

The regular factory setting is stamped on the valve body.

To adjust regulator:

1. Set unit at setting for no call for heat.

2. Turn main gas valve to OFF position.

3. Remove 1/8-in. pipe plug from manifold pressure tap

connection. Install a suitable pressure-measuring device.

4. Set main gas valve to ON position.

5. Set thermostat at setting to call for heat.

6. Remove screw cap covering regulator adjustment screw.

(See Fig. 37.)

7. Turn adjustment screw clockwise to increase pressure or

counterclockwise to decrease pressure. The setting is 3.50

in. wg on sizes 03-14 and 3.00 on size 16-28.

8. Once desired pressure is established, set unit setting for no

call for heat, turn off main gas valve, remove

pressure-measuring device, and replace 1/8-in. pipe plug and

screw cap.

HIGH REGULATOR

ADJUSTMENT SCREW

LOW REGULATOR

ADJUSTMENTSCREW

OUTLETPRESSURE

HI (W2) MALE

INLET PRESSURE MAIN (Wl) MALE SPADE TERMINAL

TAP (PLUGGED) SPADE TERMINAL

Fig. 37 - 48PD Gas Valve

(08663

65

High Altitude

For high altitude applications greater than 2,000 ft the heat input

rate should be reduced. The higher the altitude is above sea level,

the less oxygen is in the air. See Table 8 for orifice sizing. A high

altitude kit is available to convert unit for altitudes up to 7,000 ft.

Main Burners

For all applications, main burners are factory set and should require

no adjustment.

Main Burner Removal

1. Shut off (field-supplied) manual main gas valve.

2. Shut off power to unit.

3. Open gas section access door.

4. Disconnect gas piping from gas valve inlet.

5. Remove wires from gas valve.

6. Remove wires from rollout switch.

7. Remove sensor wire and ignitor cable from IGC board.

8. Remove 2 screws that hold the burner assembly to vestibule

plate.

9. Rotate the burner/manifold assembly to the right, away

from the flue extension and lift burner/manifold assembly

out of unit.

Cleaning and Adjustment

1. Remove burner rack from unit as described in Main Burner

Removal section above.

2. Inspect burners, and if dirty, remove burners from rack. The

two outer burners have the flame crossover closed off in

order to prevent gas flow from exiting the sides of the

burner assembly. To prevent ignition problems, make sure

the outer burners are returned to their original position when

done servicing.

3. Using a soft brush, clean burners and crossover port as

required.

4. Adjust spark gap. (See Fig. 38.)

5. Reinstall burners on rack.

6. Reinstall burner rack as described above.

tB

MA×.(_P. I

SECTION E-E

SCALE 2:1

SPARK GAP

_C

D_

_ SPARK GAP

0.120 TO 0.140"

............ [3.05 TO 3.56]

SECTION O-O

I

SECTION A-A

SCALE 1:1

Ir

SECTION B-B

SCALE 1:1

Fig. 38 - Spark Gap Adjustment

SECTION D-D

/

/

C06269

Filter Drier

Replace filter drier whenever refrigerant system is exposed to

atmosphere. Only use factory specified liquid-line filter driers with

working pressures no less than 650 psig. Do not install a

suction-line filter drier in liquid line. A liquid-line filter drier

designed for use with Puron® refrigerant is required on every unit.

Protective Devices

Compressor Rotation

Overcurrent

Each compressor has internal line break motor protection.

Overtemperature

Each compressor has an internal protector to protect it against

excessively high discharge gas temperatures.

High-Pressure Switch

If the high-pressure switch trips, the compressor will shut down

and the current sensor (3-phase units only) will not detect current.

See the Current Sensor section below for more information.

Current Sensor (CS) (3-Phase Units Only)

The purpose of the CS is to detect losses in compressor power.

After detecting a loss in compressor power, unit control locks out

the compressor for 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, the alarm will

automatically reset. If this alarm occurs 3 times consecutively, the

compressor will remain locked out until an alarm reset is initiated

via CCN or manually via the Scrolling Marquee display (see

Alarms and Alerts section for more details).

IMPORTANT: The current sensor is not currently used in the

48/50PD, but reserved for future implementation.

66

Evaporator Fan Motor Protection

Indoor-fan motors less than 5 hp are equipped with internal

overcurrent and overtemperature protection. Protection devices

reset automatically. Disconnect and lock out power when servicing

motor. Indoor-fan motors 5 hp and larger are equipped with a

manual reset, calibrated trip, magnetic circuit breaker and

overcurrent protection. Do not bypass connections or increase the

size of the breaker to correct trouble. Determine the cause and

correct it before resetting the breaker.

Condenser-Fan Motor Protection

Each condenser-fan motor is internally protected against

overtemperature.

Fuses are located in the control box and feed power to the

condenser fan motors. Always replace blown fuses with the

correct size fuse as indicated on the unit fuse label.

Saturated Suction Pressure (SSP)

If the SSP for aparticular circuit is reading below the alarm set

point for an extended period of time, that circuit will be shut down.

After 15 minutes, the alarm will automatically reset. If this alarm

occurs 3 times consecutively, the circuit will remain locked out

until an alarm reset is initiated via CCN or manually via the

Scrolling Marquee display (see Alarms and Alerts section for more

details).

Relief Devices

All units have relief devices to protect against damage from

excessive pressures (i.e., fire). These devices protect the high and

low side and are located at the suction line service port. Protect

joint during brazing operations near joint.

Compressor Sound Shield

The 48/50PD units are equipped with a compressor sound shield.

The sound shield has two parts, the compressor jacket encloses the

shell of the compressor and the base shield is installed between the

bottom of the compressor and the unit base pan. The sound shield

reduces the difference in noise levels as the compressor loads and

unloads in the frequency ranges of 200 to 2000 Hz. Since the

human speech occurs in the 200 to 2000 Hz frequency ranges the

sound shield reduces the speech annoyance caused by the loading

and unloading of the compressor.

The compressor jacket is held closed around the compressor by

Velcro tape. To remove the compressor jacket, separate the Velcro

along the side and top of the compressor. Slide the jacket toward

the back of the compressor to remove the jacket. Make sure the

jacket is reinstalled after servicing or replacing the compressor.

The compressor base shield is accessible when the compressor is

removed. To remove the base shield without removing the

compressor, remove one front compressor mounting bolt and

grommet. At the three remaining compressor mounting grommets,

cut the sound shield so that the base shield can be slid in the

direction of the compressor mounting bolt and grommet that was

removed. (See Fig. 39.) Cut replacement base shield along dotted

lines as shown in Fig. 39 and reinstall in reverse direction. When

installing the base shield, place the soft side facing upward.

Reinstall compressor mounting grommet and bolt.

]

CutCompressorBase Sound /

Shield alom, doiled lines ]

Remove this compressor

mounting bolt and grommet

at this location.

Slide Compressor Base Sound

Shield in Ibis direction.

Fig. 39 -Base Sound Shield

(08664 /

Control Circuit, 24-V 1

I

Each control circuit is protected against overcurrent by a 3.2 amp

circuit breaker. Breaker can be reset. If it trips, determine cause of

trouble before resetting.

Replacement Parts

A complete list of replacement parts may be obtained from any

Carrier distributor upon request.

Diagnostic LEDs

The MBB, ECB, AUXI, IGC and DSC control boards have LED

lights for diagnostic purposes. The meanings and error codes can

be found in the the troubleshooting section of this manual.

67

APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES

Table 27 -- MODE - RUN STATUS

ITEM

RUN STATUS

VIEW

HVAC

OCC

SAT

ALRM

TIME

VERS

MBB

ECB

AUX

MARQ

MODE

SYS

HVAC

HV.DN

EFEC

EFEH

OCC

T.OVR

LINK

D.LMT

C.LOC

H.LOC

E.LOC

COOL

DMD.C

SA.CP

SASP

SR.CD

SR.RH

F.SPD

CMRA

TG .A

CAPC

MAX.C

MIN.C

LMT.C

SST.A

SSRA

SCT.A

SCRA

OFC.1

H EAT

DMD.H

AVL.H

REQ.H

MAX.H

LMT.H

F.SPD

HT.1

TG.H1

HT.2

TG.H2

ECON

EC.CP

EC.AP

EC.MP

IAQ.S

IAQ

OAT

ENTH

OAQ

PE.1

PE.2

HRS

A1

CCH

IDF

OFC.1

HT.1

HT.2

PEA

PE.2

ALRM

EXPANSION

Auto View of Run Status

HVAC Mode Status

Currently Occupied

Supply Air Temperature

Current Alarms & Alerts

Time of Day

Software Version Numbers

CESR 131459- xx- xx

CESR 131249- xx- xx

CESR131333-xx-xx

CESR131171-xx-xx

Control Modes

Unit operation disabled

Unit operation enabled

Service test enabled

HVAC Operation Disabled

Ventilation (fan- only)

Cooling

Unoccupied Free Cooling

Heating

Remote HVAC Mode Disable

Cool Setpoint in Effect

Heat Setpoint in Effect

Currently Occupied

Timed Override in Effect

Linkage Active

Demand Limit In Effect

Compressor OAT Lockout

Heat OAT Lockout

Econo Cool OAT Lockout

Cooling Status

Cooling Demand

Supply Air Control Point

Cool Supply Air Setpoint

Cool Demand SASP Reset

Dehumidifying SASP Reset

Commanded Fan Speed

Compressor A Feedback

Compressor A Timeguard

Compressor Capacity

Max Compressor Capacity

Min Compressor Capacity

Max Capacity In Effect

Sat. Suction Temp A

Suction Pressure A

Sat. Condenser Temp A

Condenser Pressure A

Outdoor Fan 1 Relay

Heating Status

Heating Demand

Available Heating Stages

Requested Heating Stages

Max Allowed Heat Stages

Max Heat Stage In Effect

Commanded Fan Speed

Heat Stage 1 Relay

Heat Stage 1 Timequard

Heat Stage 2 Relay

Heat Stage 2 Timequard

Economizer Status

Econo Commanded Position

Econo Actual Position

Min Position in Effect

IAQ Level (switch)

IAQ Level (sensor)

Outdoor Air Temperature

Outdoor Enthalpy Switch

OAQ Level (sensor)

Power Exhaust 1 Relay

Power Exhaust 2 Relay

Component Run Hours

Compressor A1 Run Hours

Crankcase Htr Run Hours

Indoor Fan Run Hours

Outdoor Fan 1 Run Hours

Heat Stage 1 Run Hours

Heat Stage 2 Run Hours

Power Exhaust1 Run Hours

Power Exhaust2 Run Hours

Alarm Relay Run Hours

RANGE UNITS

1 =Disabled

2=Fan Only

3=Cool

4=Heat

Yes/No

xxx..x dF

xx

xx.xx hh.mm

(xx- xx in

table)

Yes/No

XXX.X

XXX.X

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

XXX.X

XXX.X

XXX.X

XXX.X

XXX.X

XXX

On/Off

xxx

xxx

xxx

xxx

xxx

xxx.x

xxx.x

xxx.x

xxx.x

On/Off

XXX.X

X

X

X

X

XXX

On/Off

xxx

On/Off

xxx

xxx

xxx

xxx

High/Low

XXXX

XXX.X

High/Low

XXXX

On/Off

On/Off

XXXXX.XX

XXXXX.XX

XXXXX.XX

XXXXX.XX

XXXXX.XX

XXXXX.XX

XXXXX.XX

XXXXX.XX

XXXXX.XX

^F

dF

dF

^F

^F

%

sec

%

%

%

%

dF

psig

dF

psig

^F

%

sec

sec

%

%

%

ppm

dF

ppm

hours

hours

hours

hours

hours

hours

hours

hours

hours

CON

TABLE/SUB-TABLE

STATUS DISPLAY

(VIEW =Display only)

VERSIONS

MODEDISP

COOLD!SP

HEATDISP

ECOND!SP

STRTHOUR

CCN POINT

HVACMODE

OCCUPIED

SAT DISP

ALRMALRT

TIMECOPY

MODEL NUMBER 01

MODEL NUMBER 02

MODEL NUMBER 03

MODEL NUMBER 04

SYS MODE TEXT1

SYS MODE TEXT2

(tab_ only) -

SYS MODE TEXT3

(tab_ only) -

HVACMODE TEXT 1

HVACMODE-TEXT-2

(table only)

HVACMODE TEXT 3

(table only)

HVACDOWN

CSP EFF

HSP-EFF

OCCUPIED

MODETOVR

MODELINK

MODEDMDL

COMPLOCK

HEATLOCK

ECONLOCK

COOL DMD

SA CqTLPT

SASP

CD RESET

RH RESET

FAINSPEED

COMP A

TIMGD A

CAPACITY

MAX CAPC

MIN -CAPC

CAP-LIMIT

SST A

SSP A

SCT A

SCP-A

OFC-1

HEAT DMD

AVLHSTGS

REQHSTGS

MAXHSTGS

HSTGLIMT

FANSPEED

HEAT 1

TIMED ml

HEAT

TIMGD H2

ECONOCMD

ECONOPOS

MIN POS

IAQI-N

IAQ

OA TEMP

ENTHALPY

OAQ

PE 1

PE 2

HR A1

HR CCH

HR IDF

HR OFC 1

HR HTR 1

HR HTR 2

HR RE 1-

HR PE 2

HR ALM

CON WRITE

STATUS

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

68

ITEM

STRT

A1

CCH

IDF

OFC.1

HT.1

HT.2

PE.1

PE.2

ALRM

(ALRMDISP) =CCN

only)

(GENERIC = CCN

only)

(LON_DATA = CCN

only)

APPENDIX A -LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT)

Table 27 -- MODE - RUN STATUS (cont)

EXPANSION

Component Starts

Compressor A1 Starts

Crankcase Heater Starts

indoor Fan Starts

Outdoor Fan 1 Starts

Heat Stage 1 Starts

Heat Stage 2 Starts

Power Exhaust 1 Starts

Power Exhaust 2 Starts

Alarm Relay Starts

Active Alarm 1 Code

Active Alarm 2 Code

Active Alarm 3 Code

Active Alarm 4 Code

Active Alarm 5 Code

Reset All Current Alarms

Reset Alarm History

nviSpaceTemp

nviSetPoint

nvoSpaceTemp

nvoUnitStatus.mode

nvoUnitStatus.heat_out_p

nvoUnitStatus.heat out s

nvoUnitStatus.cool out

nvoUnitStatus.econ out

nvoUnitStatus.fan out

nvoUnitStatus.in alarm

nviSetPtOffset

CCN

RANGE UNITS TABLE/SUB-TABLE

XXXXXX

XXXXXX

XXXXXX

XXXXXX

XXXXXX

XXXXXX

XXXXXX

XXXXXX

XXXXXX

XXX

XXX

XXX

XXX

XXX

Yes/No

Yes/No

xxx.x

xxx.x

xxx.x

xxxx

xxx.x

xxx.x

xxx.x

xxx.x

xxx

xxx

xxx.x

dF

dF

dF

%

%

%

%

%

^F

ALRMDiSP

GENERIC

LON DATA

CCN POINT

ST A1

ST CCH

ST IDF

ST OFC 1

ST HTR 1

ST HTR 2

ST PE 1

ST PE 2

ST ALM

ALMCODE1

ALMCODE2

ALMCODE3

ALMCODE4

ALMCODE5

ALRESET

ALHISCLR

up to 20 points

NVI SPT

NVl SP

NVO SPT

NVO MODE

NVO HPRI

NVO HSEC

NVO COOL

NVO ECON

NVO FAN

NVO ALRM

NVl SPTO

CCN WRITE

STATUS

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

nviOutsideTemp

nviOutsideRH

nvoEffectSetPt

nvoOutsideTemp

nvoOutsideRH

nviSpaceRH

nviC02

nvoC02

nvoTEMP1

nvoTEMP2

nviPCT1

nvoPCT1

nviDISCRETE1

nviDISCRETE2

nviDiSCRETE3

nvoDISCRETE1

nvoDISCRETE2

nvoDISCRETE3

nciCO2Limit

nciSetPnts.occupied_cool

nciSet Pnts.standby_cool

nciSetPnts.unoccupd_cool

nciSet Pnts.occupied_heat

nciSet Pnts.standby_heat

nciSetPnts.unoccupd_heat

XXX.X

XXXX.X

XXX.X

XXXX.X

XXX.X

XXX.X

XXXXX

XXXXX

XXX.X

XXX.X

XXX.X

XXX.X

Off/On

No/Yes

Off/On

Off/On

No/Yes

Off/On

xxxxx

xxx.x

xxx.x

xxx.x

xxx.x

xxx.x

xxx.x

dF

%

dF

dF

%

%

dF

dF

%

%

dF

dF

dF

dF

dF

dF

NVl OAT

NVl OARH

NVO EFSP

NVO OAT

NVO OARH

NVl SPRH

NVl C02

NVO C02

NVO SAT

NVO RAT

NVl RHSP

NVOSPRH

NVl FSD

NVl OCC

NVl IAQD

NV(_ FSD

NVO OCC

NVO_IAQD

NCI C02

NCI OCSP

NCI SCSP

NCI UCSP

NCI OHSP

NCI SHSP

NCI UHSP

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

69

ITEM

SERVICE TEST

TEST

INDP

ECON

E.CAL

PE.1

PE.2

ALRM

CCH

FANS

IDF

F.SPD

OFC.1

COOL

CTLR

CAPC

F.SPD

H EAT

HT.1

HT.2

ITEM

TEMPERATURES

AIR.T

SAT

OAT

SPT

SPTO

RAT

REET

SSZA

SCZA

ITEM

PRESSURES

SSRA

SCRA

APPENDIX A -LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT)

Table 28 -- MODE -SERVICE TEST

EXPANSION RANGE UNITS DEFAULT

Field Service Test Mode On/Off Off

Test Independent Outputs

Economizer Position Test 0 to 100 % 0

Calibrate Economizer On/Off Off

Power Exhaust 1 Test On/Off Off

Power Exhaust 2 Test On/Off Off

Alarm Relay Test On/Off Off

Crankcase Heat Test On/Off Off

Test Fans

Supply VFD Power Test On/Off Off

Indoor Fan Speed Test 0to 100 % 0

Outdoor Fan Relay Test On/Off Off

Test Cooling

Dig Scroll Ctrl Pwr Test On/Off Off

Compressor Capacity Test 0 to 100 % 0

Cool Test Fan Speed 0 to 100 % 0

Test Heating

Heat Stage 1 Test On/Off Off

Heat Stage 2 Test On/Off Off

CON TABLE/SUB-TABLE

MAINTENANCE DISPLAY

(TEST = display only)

TESTINDP

TESTFANS

TESTCOOL

TESTH EAT

CCN POINT

MAN CTRL

S ECONO

S ECOCAL

SPE1

SPE2

S ALMOUT

S CCH

S IDF

S VSPEED

S OFC 1

S CMPCTL

S VCAP

S VSPDCL

S HEAT 1

S HEAT 2

CON

WRITE

STATUS

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

Table 29 -- MODE -TEMPERATURES

EXPANSION

Air Temperatures

Supply Air Temperature

Outdoor Air Temperature

Space Temperature

Space Temperature Offset

Return Air Temperature

Refrigerant Temperatures

Sat. Suction Temp A

Sat. Condenser Temp A

RANGE UNITS

xxx.x dF

xxx.x dF

xxx.x dF

xxx.x dF

xxx.x dF

xxx.x dF

xxx.x dF

xxx.x dF

CON TABLE/SUB-TABLE

STATUS DISPLAY

UINPUT

CCN POINT

SAT D!SP

OA TEMP

SPACE T

SPTO

RETURN T

SST A

SCT A

CON

WRITE

STATUS

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

Table 30 -- MODE - PRESSURES

EXPANSION

Suction Pressure A

Condenser Pressure A

RANGE UNITS

xxx.x psig

xxx.x psig

CON TABLE/SUB-TABLE

STATUS DISPLAY

UINPUT

CCN POINT

SSP A

SCP A

DISPLAY

WRITE

STATUS

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

DISPLAY

WRITE

STATUS

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

CON

WRITE

STATUS

7O

APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT)

Table 31 -- MODE -SET POINTS

ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS DEFAULT CON POINT

SETPOINTS

OCSP

UCSP

OHSP

UHSP

GAP

STO. R

SASP

RH.SP

RH.DB

C.LO

HT.LO

EH.LO

ELLO

FC.LO

ITEM

INPUTS

GEN.I

FILS

FAN.S

FDWN

ENTH

RM.OC

HUM

CMRA

C.ALM

CS.IN

CS.A1

AIR.Q

IAQ.S

IAQ

OAQ

SRRH

Occupied Cool Setpoint

Unoccupied Cool Setpoint

Occupied Heat Setpoint

Unoccupied Heat Setpoint

Heat- Cool Setpoint Gap

SPT Offset Range (+/-)

Cool Supply Air Setpoint

Space RH Setpoint

Space RH Deadband

Compressor Lockout Temp

Heating Lockout Temp

Econo Cool Hi Temp Limit

Econo Cool Lo Temp Limit

Free Cool Low Temp Limit

55 to 80F

75 to 95F

55 to 80F

40 to 80F

2to 10F

0 to 5F

45 to 75

30 to 95

2 to 20

0 to 100F

40 to 125F

40 to 100F

- 30 to 50F

0 to 70F

dF

dF

dF

dF

^F

^F

dF

%

%

dF

dF

dF

dF

dF

78

85

68

6O

5

5

65

5O

5

0

75

65

0

5O

CON TABLE/SUB-TABLE

SETPOINT CONFIGURATION

SET PNT

Table 32 -- MODE -INPUTS

EXPANSION

General Inputs

Filter Status Switch

Fan Status Switch

Fire Shutdown Switch

Outdoor Enthalpy Switch

Remote Occupancy Switch

Space Humidity Switch

Compressor A Feedback

Scroll Compressor Alarm

Current Sensor Inputs

Compressor A1 Feedback

Air Quality Inputs

IAQ Level (switch)

IAQ Level (sensor)

OAQ Level (sensor)

Space Humidity Sensor

RANGE

Dirty/Clean

On/Off

On/Off

High/Low

On/Off

High/Low

On/Off

On/Off

On/Off

High/Low

xxxx

xxxx

xxx.x

UNITS

ppm

ppm

%

CON TABLE/SUB-TABLE

STATUS DISPLAY

UINPUTS

CCN

POINT

FILTSTAT

FAN STAT

FIREDOWN

ENTHALPY

REM OCC

HUM STAT

COMP A

COMP ALM

CS A1

IAQIN

IAQ

OAQ

SPRH

CON

WRITE

STATUS

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

OCSP

UCSP

OHSP

UHSP

HCSP GAP

SPTO RNG

SASP

SPRH SP

SPRH DB

OATLCOMP

OATLH EAT

OATLECLH

OATLECLL

OATLUEFC

DISPLAY

WRITE

STATUS

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

71

ITEM

OUTPUTS

FANS

IDF

F.SPD

OFC.1

COOL

CTLR

CAPC

CCH

H EAT

HT.1

HT.2

ECON

EC.CP

EC.AP

PE.1

PE.2

ALRM

APPENDIX A -LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT)

Table 33 -- MODE - OUTPUTS

EXPANSION RANGE UNITS

Fan Outputs

Indoor Fan VFD Pwr Relay On/Off

Commanded Fan Speed xxx %

Outdoor Fan 1 Relay On/Off

Cool Outputs

Digital Scroll Ctrl Pwr On/Off

Compressor Capacity xxx %

Crankcase Heat Relay On/Off

Heat Outputs

Heat Stage 1 Relay On/Off

Heat Stage 2 Relay On/Off

Economizer Outputs

Econo Commanded Position 0 to 100 %

Econo Actual Position 0 to 1O0 %

Power Exhaust 1 Relay On/Off

Power Exhaust 2 Relay On/Off

Alarm Relay On/Off

CCN TABLE/SUB-TABLE

STATUS DISPLAY

UOUTPUT

CCN POINT

IDF

FANSPEED

OFC 1

COMPCTLR

CAPACITY

CCH

HEAT 1

HEAT 2

ECONOCMD

ECONOPOS

PE 1

PE 2

ALMOUT

CCN

WRITE

STATUS

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

DISPLAY

WRITE

STATUS

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

72

ITEM

CONFIGURATION

DISP

METR

LANG

PROT

PSWD

TEST

UNIT

S.DLY

OC.FN

IDF.F

FS.MX

FS.MN

FS.VM

FN.SW

FL.SW

FS.SW

RM.SW

RH.S

RH.SW

TCS.C

TCS.H

COOL

MIN.C

FS.CD

MRT.C

MOT.C

RST.C

FOD.C

CS.A1

C.LO

ALM.N

SAT

SASP

SA.MU

SA.MD

SAT.U

SAT.L

SST

SSZO

SSZ1

SSZ2

SSZ3

PSI.D

OFC

1.MXP

2.MNP

2.ON

2.OFF

APPENDIX A -LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT)

Table 34 -- MODE -CONFIGURATION

EXPANSION

Display Configuration

Metric Display

Language Selection

Password Enable

Service Password

Test Display LEDs

Unit Configuration

Startup Delay

Fan On When Occupied

Shut Down on IDF Failure

Supply Fan Maximum

Speed

Supply Fan Minimum

Speed

Vent Mode Fan Speed

Fan Status Switch

Filter Status Switch

Fire Shutdown Switch

Remote Occupancy

Switch

RH Sensor on OAQ Input

Space Humidity Switch

Temp Cmp Strt Cool Factr

Temp Cmp Strt Heat Factr

Cooling Configuration

Min Compressor Capacity

Fan Speed Control

Demand

Compressor Min On Time

Compressor Min Off Time

Runtime to Reset Strikes

Fan-off Delay, Mech Cool

Current Sensing A1

Compressor Lockout

Temp

Alert Each Strike

Supply Air Temperature

Cool Supply Air Setpoint

SASP Maximum Reset Up

SASP Maximum Reset

Down

Minimum SAT Upper Level

Minimum SAT Lower Level

Low Suction Control

Suction OK Temperature

Low Suction - Level 1

Low Suction - Level 2

Low Suction - Level 3

Ckt A Minimum Pressure

Outdoor Fan Control

Fan Levl Max Pressure

Fan Lev2 Min Pressure

Fan Lev2 On Temperature

Fan Lev2 Off Temperature

RANGE UNITS DEFAULT

On/Off Off

0=English 0

1 =Spanish

2=French

3=Portuguese

Enable/Disable Disable

0000 to 9999 1111

On/Off Off

0 to 600

Yes/No

Yes/No

80 to 100

10to 40

40 to 100

0=No Switch

1 =Normal Open

2=Normal Closed

0=No Switch

1 =Normal Open

2=Normal Closed

0=No Switch

1 =Normal Open

2=Normal Closed

0=No Switch

1 =Normal Open

2=Normal Closed

Yes/No

0=No Switch

1 =Normal Open

2=Normal Closed

0 to 60

0 to 60

15to 80

1 to 9.9

120 to 999

300 to 999

120 to 999

0 to 600

Enable/Disable

0 to 100F

Yes//No

45 to 75

0 to 20

-20 to 0

35.0 to 65.0

35.0 to 65.0

10to 50

10to 50

5 to 50

0 to 50

0 to 500

100 to 500

100 to 500

0to 100

0to 100

%

%

^F

mins

mins

%

^F

sec

sec

sec

sec

dF

dF

^F

^F

dF

dF

dF

dF

dF

dF

psig

psig

psig

F

F

30

Yes

Yes

100

2O

5O

0: no FlOP

1: FlOP

0: no FlOP

1: FlOP

0: no FlOP

1: FlOP

0

No

0

7O

3

18O

3OO

3OO

6O

Disable: reserved for

future use

DO NOT ENABLE

0

Yes

65

10

-10

6O

45

18

2O

15

10

2O

450

200

55

45

CON

TABLE/SUB-TABLE

SERVICE

CONFIGURATION

DISPLAY

(display only, not in

table)

UNIT

COOL CFG

CCN POINT

DISPUNIT

LANGUAGE

PASS EBL

PASSWORD

DISPTEST

STARTDLY

OCC FAN

FATALFAN

SPEEDMAX

SPEEDMIN

SPEEDVNT

FANSTCFG

FILSTCFG

SHTDNCFG

REMOCCFG

RH OAQ

HUMSTCFG

TCSTCOOL

TCSTHEAT

MIN CAPC

SPEEDDMD

MIN ON

MIN OFF

MIN ON S

COOL FOD

A1 SENSE

OATLCOMP

ALM NOW

SASP

SASPMAXU

SASPMAXD

SATMIN H

SATMIN L

SSTOK

SSTLEV1

SSTLEV2

SSTLEV3

DELTAP A

LEV1MAXP

LEV2MINP

LEV2ON

LEV2OFF

PAGE

NO.

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

13

13

13

13

14

17

24

25

24

17

18

18

26

26

26

26

26

15

15

15

15

73

ITEM

HEAT

HT.TY

N.HTR

MRT.H

MOT.H

H.DEC

H.INC

FOD.E

FOD.G

HT.LO

SAT

SAT. H

SAM.L

SAM.U

SPT

HT, PD

HZND

H.LAG

ECON

EC.EN

E.CTL

MR25

MR50

MR75

MRMX

EC.MX

M.ANG

EH.LO

EL.LO

DF.DB

UEFC

FC.TM

FC.LO

PE.EN

PE1 .C

PE2.C

IDF.C

EN.SW

APPENDIX A -LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT)

Table 34 -- MODE - CONFIGURATION (cont)

EXPANSION

Heating Configuration

Type of Heat Installed

Number of Heat Stages

Heat Minimum On Time

Heat Minimum Off Time

Heat Stage Decrease

Time

Heat Stage Increase Time

Fan- off Delay, Elect Heat

Fan-off Delay, Gas Heat

Heating Lockout Temp

SUPPLY AIR

TEMPERATURE

SAT Heat Mode Sensing

Maximum SAT Lower

Level

Maximum SAT Upper

Level

SPACE TEMPERATURE

SPT Heat Demand (+)

Level

SPT Heat Demand (-)

Level

Heat Thermal Lag Factor

Economizer Configuration

Economizer Installed

Economizer Control Type

Econ Min at 25%

Fanspeed

Econ Min at 50%

Fanspeed

Econ Min at 75%

Fanspeed

Econ Min at Max

Fanspeed

Econo Oool Max Position

Min Actuator Ctrl Angle

Econo Cool Hi Temp Limit

Econo Oool Lo Temp Limit

Diff Dry Bulb Control

Unoccupied Free Cooling

Free Cool PreOcc Time

Free Cool Low Temp Limit

Power Exhaust installed

Power Exhaust Stage1

CFM

Power Exhaust Stage2

CFM

Indoor Fan Max Speed

CFM

Enthalpy Switch

RANGE UNITS DEFAULT

0=No Heat

1=Gas

2=Electric

1 to2

0 (50 series with no

electric heat)

1 (48 series)

2 (50 series with

electric heat)

1 (50 series <15kW)

2 (48 series, 50

series > = 15kW)

12O

12O

3OO

60 to 999 sec

60 to 999 sec

120 to 999 sec

120 to 999 sec 450

10 to 600 sec 30

45 to 600 sec 45

40 to 125F dF 75

Enable/Disable Disable

85 to 200 dF 140

85 to 200 dF 160

CCN

TABLE/SUB-TABLE

HEAT CFG

CCN POINT

HEATTYPE

NUM HEAT

HMIN ON

HMIN OFF

HSTAGDEC

0.5to 5 ^F 1

-5to -0.5 ^F -1

0 to 5 min 1

Yes/No No: no FlOP

Yes: FlOP

1 =Dig/Position 1

2=Dig/Command

3=Analog Ctrl

0to 100 % 0

0to 100 % 0

0to 100 % 0

0 to 100 % 30

0to 100 % 100

75 to 90 88

40 to 100F dF 65

- 30 to 50F dF 0

Disable/Enable Enable

0=Disabled 2

1 =Unoccupied

2= Preoccupancy

1 to 9999 min 120

-30 to 70F dF 50

Yes/No No: no FlOP

Yes: FlOP

100 to 15000 cfm 600

100 to 15000 cfm 0

500 to 15000 cfm 1600 (05)

2000 (06)

0=No Switch 0: no FlOP

1 =Normal Open 1: FlOP

2=Normal Closed

ECON CFG

HSTAGINC

ELEC FOD

GAS FOD

OATLHEAT

SAT HEAT

SATMAX L

SATMAX H

HDEM POS

HDEM NEG

HEAT LAG

ECONO

ECON CTL

MINP 25

MINP 50

MINP 75

MINP MAX

ECONOMAX

MINANGLE

OATLECLH

OATLECLL

DIFFBULB

UEFC CFG

UEFCTIME

OATLUEFC

PE ENABL

PE1CFM

PE2 CFM

IDF CFM

ENTHLCFG

PAGE

NO.

2O

22

22

22

22

21

22

20

20

21

21

21

21

21

21

8

10

19

19

19

19

27

15

15

15

16

16

16

16

16

16

59

74

ITEM

AIR.Q

IA.CF

IA.FN

II.CF

II.FN

AQ.MN

OVR.P

OA.CF

OAQ.L

AQD.L

AQD.H

DF.ON

DF.OF

1.4M

1.20M

O.4M

O.20M

H.4M

H.20M

ALM.O

A.SPC

A.SRT

A.OAT

A.CS

A.CMP

A.CKT

A.SSP

A.SCT

A.FAN

A.FIL

A.ECO

PID

EC.P

EC.I

EC.D

EC.DT

E.DBD

CRP

CRI

CRD

CRDT

LK.P

LK.I

LK.D

LK.DT

APPENDIX A -LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT)

Table 34 -- MODE - CONFIGURATION (cont)

EXPANSION

Air Quality Config.

IAQ Analog Input Config

IAQ Analog Fan Config

IAQ Switch Input Config

IAQ Switch Fan Config

Econo Min IAQ Position

IAQ Override Position

OAQ Analog Input Config

OAQ Lockout Limit

AQ Differential Low

AQ Differential High

Fan On AQ Differential

Fan Off AQ Differential

IAQ Sensor Value at 4mA

IAQ Sensor Value at 20mA

OAQ Sensor Value at 4mA

OAQ Sensor Value at

20mA

RH Sensor Value at 4mA

RH Sensor Value at 20mA

Alarm Relay Config.

SPT/SPRH Sensor Failure

SAT/RAT Sensor Failure

OAT Thermistor Failure

Current Sensor Failure

Compressor Failure

Refrig Circuit Failure

SSP Transducer Failure

SCT Thermistor Failure

Indoor Fan Failure

Dirty Filter

Economizer Failure

PID Configurations

Economizer PID - kP

Economizer PID - kl

Economizer PID - kD

Economizer PID - rate

Economizer PID

Deadband

Capacity PID - kP

Capacity PID - kl

Capacity PID - kD

Capacity PID - rate

Linkage Staging PID - kP

Linkage Staging PID - kl

Linkage Staging PID - kD

Linkage Staging PID -

rate

RANGE UNITS DEFAULT

% 10

% 100

0

0: no FlOP

1: FlOP

0

0

6OO

100

7OO

6OO

2OO

0

2000

0

2000

0=No IAQ

1 = DCV

2=Override IAQ

3=Ctrl Min Pos

0 = Neve r

1 =Occupied

2=Always

0=No IAQ

1 = DCV N/O

2 = DCV N/C

3=Override N/O

4=Override N/C

0 = Neve r

1 =Occupied

2=Always

0to 100

0to 100

0=No OAQ

1 = DCV

2=Lockout OAQ

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0 to 50 % 0

60 to 100 % 100

Yes/No Yes

Yes/No Yes

Yes/No Yes

Yes/No No

Yes/No Yes

Yes/No Yes

Yes/No Yes

Yes/No Yes

Yes/No Yes

Yes/No Yes

Yes/No Yes

0.0 to 99.9 2.5

0.0 to 99.9 0.1

0.0 to 99.9 1

10.0 to 180.0 sec 15

0 to 25 % 3

CON

TABLE/SUB-TABLE

IAQ CFG

ALM CFG

CCN POINT

IAQANCFG

IAQANFAN

IAQINCFG

IAQINFAN

0 to 99.9 1.5

0 to 99.9 0.1

0 to 99.9 1

1 to 30 secs 5

0.0 to 99.9 10

0.0 to 99.9 5

0.0 to 99.9 5

10.0 to 180.0 secs 30

PID CFG

IAQMINP

IAQOVPOS

OAQANCFG

OAQLOCK

DAQ LOW

DAQ HIGH

DAQFNON

DAQFNOFF

IAQ 4MA

IAQ_20MA

OAQ_4MA

OAQ 20MA

RH 4MA

RH 20MA

SPACE AL

SATRATAL

OAT AL

CS AL

COMP AL

CKT AL

SSP AL

SCT AL

FAN AL

FILT AL

ECON AL

ECONO P

ECONO I

ECONO D

ECONO DT

ECONBAND

VCAP P

VCAP I

VCAP D

VCAP DT

LINK P

LINK I

LINK D

LINK DT

PAGE

NO.

59

14

17

17

17

17

17

17

19

19

17

17

16

16

17

17

75

ITEM

(GENERIC = CCN only)

TRIM

SPT.C

SPT.T

SAT.C

SAT.T

RAT.C

RAT.T

CCN

CCN.A

CCN.B

BAUD

BROD

B.TIM

B.OAT

B.GS

B.ACK

SCH.O

SCH.N

HOL.G

OV.TL

OV. EX

OV.SP

LDSH

S.GRP

R.MXC

S.MXC

R.MXH

S.MXH

APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT)

EXPANSION

POINT 01 Definition

POINT 02 Definition

POINT 03 Definition

POINT 04 Definition

POINT 05 Definition

POINT 06 Definition

POINT 07 Definition

POINT 08 Definition

POINT 09 Definition

POINT 10 Definition

POINT 11 Definition

POINT 12 Definition

POINT 13 Definition

POINT 14 Definition

POINT 15 Definition

POINT 16 Definition

POINT 17 Definition

POINT 18 Definition

POINT 19 Definition

POINT 20 Definition

Sensor Calibration

Space Temp Calibration

Space Temp Trim

Supply Air Temp Calib.

Supply Air Temp Trim

Return Air Temp Calib.

Return Air Temp Trim

CCN Configuration

CCN Element Number

CCN Bus Number

CCN Baud Rate

CCN Broadcast Config.

CCN Time/Date Broadcast

CCN OAT Broadcast

Global Schedule Broadcst

CCN Broadcast Ack'er

CCN Schedule Overrides

Schedule Number

Accept Global Holidays

Override Time Limit

Timed Override Hours

SPT Override Enabled

CCN Schedule Overrides

Loadshed Group Number

Redline Max Capacity

Loadshed Max Capacity

Redline Max Heat Stages

Loadshed Max Heat

Stages

Table 34 -- MODE - CONFIGURATION (cont)

RANGE UNITS DEFAULT

8- char ASCII

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

-30to 130 dF

-30 to 30 ^ F

-30to 130 dF

-30 to 30 ^ F

-30to 130 dF

-30 to 30 ^ F

0

0

0

1to 239

0to 239

2400,4800,9600,

19200,38400

1

0

3

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

No

No

No

No

0 = Always

Occupied

1-64 =

Local Schedule

65-99

= Global Schedule

Yes/No

0to 4

0to 4

Yes/No

hours

hours

No

4

0

Yes

Oto 16

Oto 100

Oto 100

Oto 2

Oto 2

%

%

0

100

100

2

2

CCN

TABLE/SUB-TABLE

GENERICS

(CCN TRIM - see

Maintenance

Display)

CONFIGURATION

48 50 PD

BRODEFS

SCHEDOVR

LOADSHED

CCN POINT

Point 01

Point 02

Point 03

Point 04

Point 05

Point 06

Point 07

Point 08

Point 09

Point 10

Point 11

Point 12

Point 13

Point 14

Point 15

Point 16

Point 17

Point 18

Point 19

Point 20

CCNADD

CCNBUS

CCNBAUDD

CCNBC

OATBC

GSBC

CCNBCACK

SCHEDNUM

HOLIDAYT

OTL

OVR EXT

TIME-OVER

SHED NUM

MAXCREDL

MAXCSHED

MAXHREDL

MAXHSHED

PAGE

NO.

5

38

38

38

38

38

37

8

8

8

23

23

23

23

23

23

23

23

23

24

24

24

76

ITEM

TIME CLOCK

TIME

TIME

DATE

MNTH

DOM

YEAR

DAY

DST

STR.M

STR.W

STR.D

M.ADD

STRM

STRW

STRD

M.SUB

SCH.L

PER.x

OCC.x

UNC.x

MON.x

TUE.x

WED.x

THU.x

FRI.x

SAT.x

SUN.x

HOL.x

(repeat up to x=8

Periods)

(OCCFECS = CCN only)

HOL.L

HOL.x

MON.x

DAY.x

LEN.x

(repeat up to x=9

Holidays)

ITEM

(ALARMDEF = CCN only)

(CTLRID = CCN only)

APPENDIX A -LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT)

EXPANSION

Time of Day

Hour and Minute

Current Date

Month of Year

Day of Month

Year

Day of Week

Daylight Savings Config.

Start Month

Start Week

Start Day

Minutes to Add

Stop Month

Stop Week

Stop Day

Minutes to Subtract

Occupancy Schedule

Occupancy Period x

Occupied From

Occupied To

Monday in Period

Tuesday in Period

Wednesday in Period

Thursday in Period

Friday in Period

Saturday in Period

Sunday in Period

Holiday in Period

Timed Override Hours

Period x DOW

(MTWTFSSH)

Occupied From

Occupied To

Holiday Schedule

Holiday x

Holiday Start Month

Holiday Start Day

Holiday Duration (days)

Table 35 -- MODE -TIME CLOCK

RANGE UNITS

xx.xx hh.mm

January, February, [] &,

December

1 to31

xxxx

Monday, Tuesday, [] &,

Sunday

January, February, [] &,

December

1 to5

1 to7

0 to 90

January, February, [] &,

December

1 to5

1 to7

0 to 90

OO.OO to 23.59

OO.OO to 23.60

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

hh.mm

hh.mm

x

xxxxxxxx

00.00 to 24.00

00.00 to 24.00

hours

hh.mm

hh.mm

1 to 12 = January to

December

1 to31

1 to 99

DEFAULT

2

7

6O

11

1

7

6O

00.00

00.00

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

00000000

00.00

00.00

CCN

TABLE/SUB-TABLE

CONFIGURATION

TIME

BRODEFS

(continued)

(SCH.L = Display only)

OCCDEFCS

HOLIDAY

HOLDYxxS

CCN POINT

TIME

MOY

DOM

YOCDISP

DOWD!SP

STARTM

STARTW

STARTD

MINADD

STOPM

STO PW

STOPD

MINSUB

PERxOCC

PERxUNC

PERxMON

PERxTUE

PERxWED

PERxTHU

PERxFRI

PERxSAT

PERxSUN

PERxHOL

OVR- EXT

DOWx

OCCTODx

UNOCTODx

(repeat up to

x=8 Periods)

HOLMONxx

HOLDAYxx

HOLLENxx

(repeat up to

xx=30

Holidays)

EXPANSION

Alarm Routing Control

Equipment Priority

Comm Failure Retry Time

Re-Alarm Time

Alarm System Name

Device Name:

Description:

Location:

Software Part Number:

Model Number:

Serial Number:

Reference Number:

Table 36 -- CCN ONLY TABLES

RANGE UNITS

00000000 to 11111111

Oto 7

1 to 240

1 to 255

up to 8 alphanum

min

min

48 50 PD

text string

text string

CESR 131459 - XX- XX

DEFAULT

11000000

4

10

18O

48 50 PD

CCN

TABLE/SUB-TABLE

ALARMDEF

CTLR- ID

CCN POINT

ALRM CNT

EQP TYPE

RETRY TM

RE-ALARM

ALRM NAM

77

ITEM

OPERATING MODES

MODE

SYS

HVAC

HV.DN

EFF.C

EFF.H

OCC

T.OVR

LINK

D.LMT

C.LOC

H.LOC

E.LOC

COOL

COOL

OK.CL

MS.TG

OK.EC

OK.MC

C.LOC

C.LO

IDF

F.SPD

REQ.C

MIN.C

MAX.C

LMT.C

CAPC

CTLR

CMRA

ST.A

F.LEV

SAT

SAT

SA.DM

SAT. U

SAT. L

SPT

SPT

TRND

DMD.C

APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT)

Table 37 1 MODE - OPERATING MODES

EXPANSION

Control Modes

Unit operation disabled

Unit operation enabled

Service test enabled

HVAC Operation Disabled

Ventilation (fan- only)

Cooling

Unoccupied Free Cooling

Heating

Remote HVAC Mode

Disable

Cool Setpoint in Effect

Heat Setpoint in Effect

Currently Occupied

Timed Override in Effect

Linkage Active

Demand Limit In Effect

Compressor OAT Lockout

Heat OAT Lockout

Econo Cool OAT Lockout

Cool Mode Diagnostic

In Cooling Mode?

OKto Select Cool Mode?

Mode Select Timeguard

OK to Use Economizer?

OK to Use Compressor?

Compressor OAT Lockout

CCN

RANGE UNITS TABLE/SUB-TABLE

Yes/No

XXX.X

XXX.X

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

xxx

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

MAINTENANCE

DISPLAY

MODES

COOLDIAG

CCN POINT

SYS MODE TEXT1

SYS MODE TEXT2

(table only)

SYS MODE TEXT3

(table only)

HVACMODE TEXT

1

_4VACMODE TEXT

2 (table only)

_4VACMODE TEXT

3 (table only)

HVACDOWN

CSP EFF

HSP EFF

OCCUPIED

MODETOVR

MODELINK

MODEDMDL

COMPLOCK

HEATLOCK

ECONLOCK

IN COOL

OKTOCOOL

COOLMSTG

ECONCOOL

MECHCOOL

COMPLOCK

CCN

WRITE

STATUS

forcible

forcible

Compressor Lockout Temp

Indoor Fan State

Commanded Fan Speed

Requested Cooling

Capacity

Min Compressor Capacity

Max Compressor Capacity

Max Capacity In Effect

Compressor Capacity

Digital Scroll Ctrl Pwr

Compressor A Feedback

Circuit A Strikes

Outdoor Fan Level

Supply Air Temperature

Supply Air Temperature

Supply Air Temp Demand

Minimum SAT Upper Level

Minimum SAT Lower Level

Space Temperature

Space Temperature

Spacetemp Trend (F/min)

Cooling Demand

xxx

On/Off

xxx

xxx

xxx

xxx

xxx

xxx

On/Off

On/Off

x

x

xxx.x

xxx.x

xx.x

xx.x

xxx.x

xxx.x

xxx.x

dF

%

%

%

%

dF

^F

dF

dF

dF

^F

OATLCOMP

IDFSTATE

FANSPEED

REQ CAPC

MIN CAPC

MAX CAPC

CAPLIMIT

CAPACITY

COMPCTLR

COMP A

ASTRIKES

FANLEV

SAT DISP

SAT DMD

SATMIN H

SATMIN L

SPACE T

SPTTREND

COOL DMD

forcible

DISPLAY

WRITE

STATUS

forcible

78

ITEM

H EAT

HEAT

OK.HT

MS.TG

H.LOC

HT.LO

IDF

F.SPD

AVL.H

REQ.H

LMT.H

ACT.H

HT.1

HT.2

SAT

SAT. H

SAT

SAM.L

SAM.U

SPT

SPT

DMD.H

TRND

HT.PD

HZND

H.LAG

ECON

EC.EN

OCC

IDF

F.SPD

COOL

E.LOC

EH.LO

EL.LO

FC.LO

EN.LO

EC.MX

AQ.DV

AQ.MN

AQ.OV

OVR.P

AQ.LO

OAQ.L

LROV

EC.CP

EC.AP

EC.MP

C.ANG

E.CAL

DMD.L

D.LMT

LMT.C

LMT.H

REDL

SHED

MAX.C

MAX.H

(Display TRIM - see

Configuration)

APPENDIX A -LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT)

Table 37 -- MODE - OPERATING MODES (cont)

EXPANSION

Heat Mode Diagnostic

In Heating Mode?

OKto Select Heat Mode?

Mode Select Timeguard

Heat OAT Lockout

Heating Lockout Temp

indoor Fan State

Commanded Fan Speed

Available Heating Stages

Requested Heating Stages

Max Heat Stage In Effect

Actual Heating Stages

Heat Stage 1 Relay

Heat Stage 2 Relay

Supply Air Temperature

SAT Heat Mode Sensing

Supply Air Temperature

Maximum SAT Lower Level

Maximum SAT Upper Level

Space Temperature

Space Temperature

Heating Demand

Spacetemp Trend (F/min)

SPT Heat Demand (+)

Level

SPT Heat Demand (-)

Level

Heat Thermal Lag Factor

CCN

RANGE UNITS TABLE/SUB-TABLE

Yes/No

Yes/No

xxx

Yes/No

xxx

On/Off

xxx

x

x

x

x

On/Off

On/Off

Enable/Disable

xxx.x

xxx

xxx

xxx.x

xxx.x

xxx.x

xx.x

secs

dF

dF

dF

dF

dF

dF

^F

^F

min

HEATDiAG

CCN POINT

IN HEAT

OKTOHEAT

HEATMSTG

HEATLOCK

OATLH EAT

IDFSTATE

FANSPEED

AVLHSTGS

REQHSTGS

HSTGLIMT

ACTHSTGS

HEAT 1

HEAT 2

SAT HEAT

SAT DISP

SATMAX L

SATMAX H

SPACE T

HEAT DMD

SPTTREND

HDEM POS

HDEM NEG

HEAT LAG

CCN

WRITE

STATUS

forcible

Economizer Diagnostic

Economizer Installed

Currently Occupied

Indoor Fan State

Commanded Fan Speed

In Cooling Mode?

Econo Cool OAT Lockout

Econo Cool Hi Temp Limit

Econo Cool Lo Temp Limit

Free Cool Low Temp Limit

Econo Cool Enth Lockout

Econo Cool Max Position

IAQ DCV Mode

Econo Min IAQ Position

IAQ Override Mode

IAQ Override Position

OAQ Lockout Mode

OAQ Lockout Limit

Lo Refrig Press Override

Econo Commanded

Position

Econo Actual Position

Min Position in Effect

Actuator Control Angle

Economizer Calibrating

Demand Limiting

Demand Limit In Effect

Max Capacity In Effect

Max Heat Stage In Effect

Redline Activated

Loadshed Activated

Max Compressor Capacity

Max Allowed Heat Stages

Sensor Calibration

Space Temp Calibration

Space Temp Trim

Supply Air Temp Calib.

Supply Air Temp Trim

Return Air Temp Calib.

Return Air Temp Trim

Yes/No

Yes/No

On/Off

NNN

Yes/No

Yes/No

xxx

xx

xx

Yes/No

xxx

Yes/No

xxx

Yes/No

xxx

Yes/No

xxxx

Yes/No

xxx

xxx

xxx

Yes/No

Yes/No

xxx

x

Yes/No

Yes/No

x

x

-30to 130

- 30 to 30

-30to 130

- 30 to 30

-30to 130

- 30 to 30

dF

dF

dF

%

%

%

%

%

%

dF

^F

dF

^F

dF

^F

ECONDiAG

DMDL

TRIM

ECONO

OCCUPIED

IDFSTATE

FANSPEED

IN COOL

ECONLOCK

OATLECLH

OATLECLL

OATLUEFC

ENTHLOCK

ECONOMAX

IN iAQDV

IAQMINP

IN_iAQOV

IAQOVPOS

IN_OAQLO

OAQLOCK

IN LPOV

ECONOCMD

ECONOPOS

MIN POS

CTLANGLE

ECOiNCAL

MODEDMDL

CAPLIMIT

HSTGLIMT

MODEREDL

MODESHED

MAX CAPC

MAXHSTGS

SPT CAL

SPT OFF

SAT CAL

SAT OFF

RAT CAL

RAT OFF

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

forcible

DISPLAY

WRITE

STATUS

forcible

forcible

forcible

79

APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT)

Table 37 -- MODE - OPERATING MODES (cont)

ITEM

(OCCDEFM =CCN only)

(LINKDATA =CCN only)

EXPANSION

Occupancy Supervisory

Current Mode (1 =Occup)

Current Occup Period #

Time-Override in Effect

Time- Override Duration

Current Occupied Time

Current Unoccupied Time

Next Occupied Day

Next Occupied Time

Next Unoccupied Day

Next Unoccupied Time

Previous Unoccupied Day

Previous Unoccupied Time

CCN - Linkage

Supervisory Element #

Supervisory Bus

Supervisory Block Number

Average Occup. Heat Stp.

Average Occup. Cool Stp.

Average Unocc. Heat Stp.

Average Unocc. Cool Stp.

Average Zone Temperature

Average Occup. Zone Temp

Linkage System Occupied?

Next Occupied Day

Next Occupied Time

Next Unoccupied Day

Next Unoccupied Time

Last Unoccupied Day

Last Unoccupied Time

CCN

RANGE UNITS TABLE/SUB-TABLE

0,1

0to 8

Yes/No

0to 4

xx.xx

xx.xx

hours

hh:mm

hh:mm

hh:mm

hh:mm

hh.mm

xxx

xxx

xxx

xxxx.x dF

xxxx.x dF

xxxx.x dF

xxxx.x dF

xxxx.x dF

xxxx.x dF

Yes/No

"Mon", "Tue", 3-cha

&, "Sun" r text

xx:xx hh:mm

"Mon", "Tue", 3-cha

&, "Sun" r text

xx:xx hh:mm

"Mon", "Tue", 3-cha

&, "Sun" r text

xx:xx hh:mm

OCCDEFM

LINKDATA

CCN POINT

MODE

PER NO

OVERLAST

OVR HRS

STRTTIME

ENDTIME

NXTOCDAY

NXTOCTIM

NXTUNDAY

NXTUNTIM

PRVUNDAY

PRVUNTIM

SUPE-ADR

SUPE-BUS

BLOCKNUM

AOHS

AOCS

AUHS

AUCS

AZT

AOZT

LOCC

LNEXTOCD

LNEXTOCC

LNEXTUOD

LNEXTUNC

LLASTUOD

LLASTUNC

CCN

WRITE

STATUS

forcible

forcible

forcible

DISPLAY

WRITE

STATUS

ITEM

ALARMS

R.CUR

R.H!S

CURR

alarm#

(repeat up to 25

alarms)

HIST

alarm#

(repeat up to 20

Alarms)

Table 38 -- MODE -ALARMS

EXPANSION

Reset All Current Alarms

Reset Alarm History

Currently Active Alarms

text string

Alarm History

alarm#- mm/dd/yy- hh.mm

-text string

RANGE DEFAULT

Yes/No No

Yes/No No

CCN

TABLE/SUB-TABLE

MAINTENANCE

DISPLAY

ALARMS

ALARM HISTORY

CCN POINT

ALRESET

ALH!SCLR

ALARM01C -

ALARM25C

CCN WRITE

STATUS

forcible

forcible

DISPLAY

WRITE

STATUS

forcible

forcible

8O

APPENDIX B - VFD INFORMATION

On 48/50PD units, the supply fan speed is controlled by a 3-phase

VFD. The VFD is located in the supply fan section behind an

indoor fan scroll. The VFD speed is controlled directly by the

ComfortLink TM controls through a 0-10Vdc signal based on a

space temperature sensor. The VFD has a display, which can be

used for service diagnostics, but setup of the control is to be done

through the scrolling marquee display.

The VFD is powered during normal operation to prevent

condensation from forming on the boards during the off mode and

is stopped by driving the speed to 0 (by sending a 0Vdc signal to

the VFD). The units use ABB VFDs. The interface wiring for the

VFDs is shown in the figure below. The VFD connects to

ComfortLink through a 0-10Vdc output on the AUXI board.

Terminal designations are shown in the Terminal Designation table.

Configurations are shown in the VFD Configurations table.

Table 39 -- VFD TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS

TERMINAL FUNCTION

U1

V1

W1 Three-Phase main circuit input power supply

U2

V2 Three-Phase AC output to motor, 0V to maximum input

W2 voltage level

X1-11 (GND)

Xl - 12 (COMMON) Factory-supplied jumper

Xl - 10 (24VDC)

Xl - 13 (DI- 1) Run (factory-supplied jumper)

Xl -10 (24VDC) Start Enable 1 (factory-supplied jumper). When opened,

Xl -16 (DI-4) the drive goes to emergency stop

X1-2 (AI- 1)

X1-3 (AGND) Factory wired for 0-10Vdc remote input

TERMINAL Xl

O ' Z "_" Z O ....

o0 _ Co _ 04 _ _ E 5

< + CO O

£3

ZS] ZZ

I

m

0-10Vdc signal from Comfort Link

Fig. 40 - VFD Wiring

(08674

81

APPENDIX B- VFD INFORMATION (CONT)

Table 40 -- VFD CONFIGURATIONS

Parameter Group

APPLICATION CRITICAL DRIVE PARAMETERS FOR ABB ACH550 DRIVES

Value NOTE

Parameter

Number

9901

9902

9904

9905

9906

9907

9908

9909

1001

1002

1003

1301

1302

1401

1402

1403

1601

1608

1701

1702

1703

1704

1705

2003

2007

2008

2101

2102

2202

2203

2601

2605

2606

3006

HK30WA001 - 208/230V I

(0) English

(1) HVAC Default

(3) Scalar : Freq

23O

Description

Language

Application Macro

Motor Control Mode

Motor Nominal Voltage

Motor Nominal Current

Motor Nominal Frequency

Motor Nominal Speed

Motor Nominal Power

EXT1 Commands

EXT2 Commands

Direction

Minimum AI - 1

Maximum AI - 1

Relay Output 1

Relay Output 2

Relay Output 3

Run Enable

Start Enable 1

Override Set

Override Freq

Override Speed

Over Pass Code

Override

Maximum Current

Minimum Frequency

Maximum Frequency

Start Function

Stop Function

Accelerate Time

Decelerate Time

Flux Optimization

Volt/Freq Ratio

Switching Frequency

Motor Thermal Time

HK30WA008- 460V

ABB Drive default

PD Product specific

setting

ABB Drive default

UNITS

Volts

Amps

Hz

RPM

HP

%

%

Hz

RPM

Amps

Hz

Hz

Seconds

Seconds

kHz

Seconds

PD Product specific

46O setting

START-UP PD Product specific

DATA 7.0 3.5 setting

60 ABB Drive default

PD Product specific

1725 setting

PD Product specific

2.4 setting

(1) DI - 1 Start/Stop ABB Drive default

START/STOP/DIR (1) DI - 1 Start/Stop ABB Drive default

PD Product specific

(1) Forward setting

20 ABB Drive default

ANALOG INPUTS 100 ABB Drive default

Carrier default settings

(7) Started from PPS

RELAY OUTPUTS (2) Run ABB Drive default

(3) Fault (-1) ABB Drive default

SYSTEM (0) Not Set ABB Drive default

CONTROL (4) DI - 4 ABB Drive default

Carrier default settings

(3) DI - 3 from PPS

Carrier default settings

60 from PPS

Carrier default settings

OVER RIDE 1750 from PPS

Carrier default settings

0 from PPS

Carrier default settings

On from PPS

PD Product specific

8.0 4.0 setting

LIMITS 0 ABB Drive default

60 ABB Drive default

PD Product specific

(6) Ramp setting

START/STOP PD Product specific

(2) Ramp setting

30 ABB Drive default

ACCEL/DECEL 30 ABB Drive default

PD Product specific

(1) On setting

Carrier default settings

MOTOR (2) Squared from PPS

Carrier default settings

8 from PPS

FAULT Carrier default settings

FUNCTIONS 1050 from PPS

All Other Parameter Settings are ABB Drive Default Settings

82

APPENDIX B - VFD

VFD Operation

The VFD keypad is shown in Fig. 41. The function of SOFT

KEYS 1 and 2 change depending on what is displayed on the

screen. The function of SOFT KEY 1 matches the word in the

lower left-hand box on the display screen. The function of SOFT

KEY 2 matches the word in the lower right-hand box on the

display screen. If the box is empty, then the SOFT KEY does not

have a function on that specific screen. The UP and DOWN keys

are used to navigate through the menus. The OFF key is used to

turn off the VFD. The AUTO key is used to change control of the

drive to automatic control. The HAND key is used to change

control of the drive to local (hand held) control. The HELP button

is used to access the help screens.

For the VFD to operate on the 48/50PD units, the drive nmst be set

in AUTO mode. The word "AUTO" will appear in the upper left

hand corner of the VFD display. Press the AUTO button to set the

drive in AUTO mode.

INFORMATION (CONT)

IMPORTANT: The current parameter value appears above the

highlight parameter. To view the default parameter value, press the

UP and DOWN keys simultaneously. To restore the default factory

settings, select the application macro "HVAC Default."

VFD Modes

The VFD has several different modes for configuring, operating,

and diagnosing the VFD. The modes are:

• Standard Display mode -- shows drive status information and

operates the drive

• Parameters mode -- edits parameter values individually

• Start-up Assistant mode-- guides the start up and

configuration

• Changed Parameters mode -- shows all changed parameters

• Drive Parameter Backup mode -- stores or uploads the

parameters

• Clock Set mode -- sets the time and date for the drive

AUTO

OFF

{ALWAYS AVAILABLE}

(08675

Fig. 41 - VFD Keypad

Start Up with Assistant

Initial start-up has been performed at the factory. Use of the start

up assistant will override factory VFD configurations. See below

to check that all parameters listed in VFD Configurations table are

correctly configured on the VFD.

Start Up by Changing Parameters Individually

Initial start-up is performed at the factory. To start up the VFD

with by changing individual parameters, perform the following

procedure:

1. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be

displayed.

2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight PARAMETERS

on the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2).

3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight the desired

parameter group and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2).

4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight the desired

parameter and press EDIT (SOFT KEY 2).

5. Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the value of the

parameter.

6. Press SAVE (SOFT KEY 2) to store the modified value.

Press CANCEL (SOFT KEY 1) to keep the previous value.

Any modifications that are not saved will not be changed.

7. Choose another parameter or press EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) to

return to the listing of parameter groups. Continue until all

the parameters have been configured and then press EXIT

(SOFT KEY 1) to return to the mare menu.

• I/O Settings mode -- checks and edits the I/O settings

Standard Display Mode

Use the standard display mode to read information on the drive

status and operate the drive. To reach the standard display mode,

press EXIT until the LCD display shows status information as

described below. See Fig. 42.

The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information

of the drive. The HAND icon indicates that the drive control is

local from the control panel. The AUTO icon indicates that the

drive is in remote control mode, such as the basic I/O (X1) or field

bus.

The arrow icon indicates the drive and motor rotation status. A

rotating arrow (clockwise or counterclockwise) indicates that the

drive is running and at set point and the shaft direction is forward

or reverse. A rotating blinking arrow indicates that the drive is

running but not at set point. A stationary arrow indicates that the

drive is stopped. For Carrier rooftop units, the correct rotation is

counterclockwise.

The upper right corner shows the frequency set point that the drive

will maintain.

Using parameter group 34, the middle of the LCD display can be

configured to display 3 parameter values. The default display

shows parameters 0103 (OUTPUT FREQ) in percentages, 0104

(CURRENT) in amperes, and 0120 (AI1) in milliamperes.

The bottom corners of the LCD display show the functions

currently assigned to the two soft keys. The lower middle displays

the current time (if configured to show the time).

The first time the drive is powered up, it is in the OFF mode. To

switch to local hand-held control and control the drive using the

control panel, press and hold the HAND button. Pressing the

HAND button switches the drive to hand control while keeping the

drive running. Press the AUTO button to switch to remote input

control. To start the drive press the HAND or AUTO buttons, to

stop the drive press the OFF button.

AUTO "_, 15.8Hz

3@.8Hz

3,7A

838 HA

I 00:00 ImEHU

Fig. 42 -Standard Display Example

(08676

83

APPENDIX B - VFD INFORMATION (CONT)

To adjust the speed in HAND mode, press the UP or DOWN

buttons (the reference changes immediately). The reference can be

modified in the local control (HAND) mode, and can be

parameterized (using Group 11 reference select) to also allow

modification in the remote control mode.

Parameters Mode

The Parameters mode is used to change the parameters on the

drive. To change parameters, perform the following procedure:

1. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be

displayed.

2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight PARAMETERS

on the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2).

3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight the desired

parameter group and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2).

4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight the desired

parameter and press EDIT (SOFT KEY 2).

5. Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the value of the

parameter.

6. Press SAVE (SOFT KEY 2) to store the modified value.

Press CANCEL (SOFT KEY 1) to keep the previous value.

Any modifications that are not saved will not be changed.

7. Choose another parameter or press EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) to

return to the listing of parameter groups. Continue until all

the parameters have been configured and then press EXIT

(SOFT KEY 1) to return to the main menu.

IMPORTANT: The current parameter value appears above the

highlight parameter. To view the default parameter value, press the

UP and DOWN keys sinmltaneously. To restore the default factory

settings, select the Carrier application macro.

Start-Up Assistant Mode

To use the Start-Up Assistant, perform the following procedure:

1. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be

displayed.

2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight ASSISTANTS

on the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2).

3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight Commission

Drive and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2).

4. The Start-Up Assistant will display the parameters that need

to be configured. Select the desired values and press SAVE

(SOFT KEY 2) after every change. The process will

continue until all the parameters are set. The assistant checks

to make sure that entered values are in range.

The assistant is divided into separate tasks. The user can activate

the tasks one after the other or independently. The tasks are

typically done in this order: Application, References 1 and 2,

Start/Stop Control, Protections, Constant Speeds, PID Control,

Low Noise Setup, Panel Display, Timed Functions, and Outputs.

Changed Parameters Mode

The ('hanged Parameters mode is used to view and edit recently

changed parameters on the drive. To view the changed parameters,

perform the following procedure:

1. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be

displayed.

2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight CHANGED PAR

on the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). A

list of the recently changed parameters will be displayed.

3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight the desired

parameter group and press EDIT (SOFT KEY 2) to change

the parameter if desired.

4. Press EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) to exit the Changed Parameters

mode.

Drive Parameter Backup Mode

The drive parameter back up mode is used to export the parameters

from one drive to another. The parameters can be uploaded from a

VFD to the removable control panel. The control panel can then be

transferred to another drive and the parameters downloaded into

memory.

Depending on the motor and application, there are two options

available. The first option is to download all parameters. This

copies both application and motor parameters to the drive from the

control panel. This is recommended when using the same

application for drives of the same size. This can also be used to

create a backup of the parameters group for the drive.

The second option downloads only the application parameters to

the drive. This is recommended when using the same application

for drives of different sizes. Parameters 9905, 9906, 9907, 9908,

9909, 1605, 1607, 5201, and group 51 parameters and internal

motor parameters are not copied.

Upload All Parameters

To upload and store parameters in the control panel from the VFD,

perform the following procedure:

1. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be

displayed.

2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight PAR BACKUP on

the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2).

3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight UPLOAD TO

PANEL and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2).

4. The text "Copying Parameters" will be displayed with a

progress indicator. To stop the process, select ABORT

(SOFT KEY 1).

5. When the upload is complete, the text "Parameter upload

successful" will be displayed.

6. The display will then return to the PAR BACKUP menu.

Select EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) to return to the main menu.

7. The control panel can now be disconnected from the drive.

Download All Parameters

To download all parameters from the control panel to the VFD,

perform the following procedure:

1. Install the control panel with the correct parameters onto the

VFD.

2. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be

displayed.

3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight PAR BACKUP on

the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2).

4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight DOWNLOAD TO

DRIVE ALL and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2).

5. The text "Restoring Parameters" will be displayed with a

progress indicator. To stop the process, select ABORT

(SOFT KEY 1).

6. When the download is complete, the text "Parameter

download successful" will be displayed.

7. The display will then return to the PAR BACKUP menu.

Select EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) to return to the main menu.

8. The control panel can now be disconnected from the drive.

84

Download Application Parameters

To download application parameters only to the control panel from

the VFD, perform the following procedure:

1. Install the control panel with the correct parameters onto the

VFD.

2. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be

displayed.

3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight PAR BACKUP on

the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2).

4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight DOWNLOAD

APPLICATION and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2).

5. The text "Downloading Parameters (partial)" will be

displayed with a progress indicator. To stop the process,

select ABORT (SOFT KEY 1).

6. When the download is complete, the text "Parameter

download successful" will be displayed.

7. The display will then return to the PAR BACKUP menu.

Select EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) to return to the main menu.

8. The control panel can now be disconnected from the drive.

Clock Set Mode

The clock set mode is used for setting the date and time for the

internal clock of the VFD. In order to use the timer functions of the

VFD control, the internal clock must be set. The date is used to

determine weekdays and is visible in the fault logs.

To set the clock, perform the following procedure:

1. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be

displayed.

2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight CLOCK SET on

the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). The

clock set parameter list will be displayed.

3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight CLOCK

VISIBILITY and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). This

parameter is used to display or hide the clock on the screen.

Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the parameter setting.

Press OK (SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration and

return to the Clock Set menu.

4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight SET TIME and

press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys to

change the hours and minutes. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2) to

save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu.

5. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight TIME FORMAT

and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys

to change the parameter setting. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2)

to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu.

6. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight SET DATE and

press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys to

change the day, month, and year. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2)

to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu.

7. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight DATE FORMAT

and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys

to change the parameter setting. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2)

to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu.

8. Press EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) twice to return to the main

menu.

I/O Settings Mode

The I/O Settings mode is used for viewing and editing the I/O

settings.

To configure the I/O settings, perform the following procedure:

1. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be

displayed.

2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight I/O SETTINGS on

the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). The

I/O Settings parameter list will be displayed.

3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight the desired I/O

setting and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2).

4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to select the parameter to view.

Press OK (SOFT KEY 2).

5. Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the parameter setting.

Press SAVE (SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration. Press

CANCEL (SOFT KEY 1) to keep the previous value. Any

modifications that are not saved will not be changed.

6. Press EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) twice to return to the main

menu.

VFD Diagnostics

The drive detects error situations and reports them using:

• Green andred LEDs on the body of the drive (located under the

keypad)

• Status LED on the control panel

• Control panel display

• The Fault Word and Alarm Word parameter bits (parameters

0305 to 0309)

The form of the display depends on the severity of the error. The

user can specify the severity for many errors by directing the drive

to ignore the error situation, report the situation as an alarm, or

report the situation as a fault.

Faults (Red LED Lit)

The VFD signals that it has detected asevere error, or fault, by:

• Enabling the red LED on the drive (LED is either steady or

flashing)

• Setting an appropriatebit in aFault Word parameter (0305 to

0307)

• Overriding the control panel display with the display of a fault

code

• Stopping the motor (if it was on)

• Sets an @propriate bit in Fault Word parameter 0305- 0307.

The fault code on the control panel display is temporary. Pressing

the MENU, ENTER, UP button or DOWN buttons removes the

fault message. The message reappears after a few seconds if the

control panel is not touched and the fault is still active.

Alarms (Green LED Flashing)

For less severe errors, called alarms, the diagnostic display is

advisory. For these situations, the drive is simply reporting that it

had detected something unusual. In these situations, the drive:

• Flashes the green LED on the drive (does not apply to alarms

that arise from control panel operation errors)

• Sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter (0308 or

0309)

• Overrides the control panel display with the display of an alarm

code and/or name

Alarm messages dis@pear from the control panel display after a

few seconds. The message returns periodically as long as the alarm

condition exists.

Correcting Faults

The recommended corrective action for faults is shown in the Fault

Listing Table 41. The VFD can also be reset to remove the fault. If

an external source for a start command is selected and is active, the

VFD may start immediately after fault reset.

To reset a fault indicated by a flashing red LED, turn off the power

for 5minutes. To reset a fault indicated by a red LED (not

flashing), press RESET from the control panel or turn off the

power for 5minutes. Depending on the value of parameter 1604

(FAULT RESET SELECT), digital input or serial communication

could also be used to reset the drive. When the fault has been

corrected, the motor can be started.

85

History

For reference, the last three fault codes are stored into parameters

0401, 0412, 0413. For the most recent fault (identified by

parameter 0401), the drive stores additional data (in parameters

0402 through 0411) to aid in troubleshooting a problem. For

example, a parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time of the

fault. To clear the fault history (all of Group 04, Fault History

parameters), follow these steps:

1. In the control panel, Parameters mode, select parameter

0401.

2. Press EDIT.

3. Press the UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously.

4. Press SAVE.

Correcting Alarms

To correct alarms, first determine if the Alarm requires any

corrective action (action is not always required). Use Table 42 to

find and address the root cause of the problem.

If diagnostics troubleshooting has determined that the drive is

defective during the warranty period, contact ABB Automation

Inc., at 1-800-435-7365, option 4, option 3. A qualified

technician will review the problem with the caller and make a

determination regarding how to proceed. This may involve

dispatching a designated service station (DSS) representative from

an authorized station, dispatching a replacement unit, or advising

return for repair.

VFD Maintenance

If installed in an appropriate environment, the VFD requires very

little maintenance.

Table 43 lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by

Carrier.

Heat Sink

The heat sink fins accumulate dust from the cooling air. Since a

dusty sink is less efficient at cooling the drive, overtemperature

faults become more likely. In a normal environment check the heat

sink annually, in a dusty environment check more often.

Check the heat sink as follows (when necessary):

1. Remove power from drive.

2. Remove the cooling fan.

3. Blow clean compressed air (not hunfid) from bottom to top

and simultaneously use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to

trap the dust. If there a risk of the dust entering adjoining

equipment, perform the cleaning in another room.

4. Replace the cooling fan.

5. Restore power.

86

APPENDIX B- VFD INFORMATION (CONT)

Table 41 -- FAULT CODES

FAULT FAULT NAME IN PANEL DESCRIPTION AND RECOMMENDED CORRECTIVE ACTION

CODE

1 OVERCURRENT Output current is excessive. Check for excessive motor load, insufficient acceleration time (parameters 2202

ACCELER TIME 1, default 30 seconds), or faulty motor, motor cables or connections.

2 Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive. Check for static or transient over voltages in the input power supply,

DC OVERVOLT insufficient deceleration time (parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1, default 30 seconds), or undersized brake chopper

(if present).

3DEV OVERTEMP Drive heat sink is overheated. Temperature is at or above 115°C (239°F). Check for fan failure, obstructions in the air

flow, dirt or dust coating on the heat sink, excessive ambient temperature, or excessive motor load.

4 SHORT CIRC Fault current. Check for short-circuit in the motor cable(s) or motor or supply disturbances.

5 OVERLOAD Inverter overload condition. The drive output current exceeds the ratings.

5 DC OVERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient. Check for missing phase in the input power supply, blown fuse, or

under voltage on main circuit.

7 All LOSS Analog input 1 loss. Analog input value is less than All FLT LIMIT (3021). Check source and connection for analog

input and parameter settings for All FLT LIMIT (3021) and 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.

8 AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 loss. Analog input value is less than AI2 FLT LIMIT (3022). Check source and connection for analog

input and parameter settings for AI2 FLT LIMIT (3022) and 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.

9 MOT OVERTEMP Motor is too hot, as estimated by the drive. Check for overloaded motor. Adjust the parameters used for the estimate

(3005 through 3009). Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters.

10 Panel communication is lost and either drive is in local control mode (the control panel displays LOC), or drive is in

remote control mode (REM) and is parameterized to accept start/stop, direction or reference from the control panel.

PANEL LOSS To correct check the communication lines and connections. Check parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERROR,

parameters in Group 10: Command Inputs and Group 11 :Reference Select (if drive operation is REM).

11 ID RUN FAIL The motor ID run was not completed successfully. Check motor connections.

12 MOTOR STALL Motor or process stall. Motor is operating in the stall region. Check for excessive load or insufficient motor power.

Check parameters 3010 through 3012.

13 RESERVED Not used.

14 EXT FAULT 1 Digital input defined to report first external fault is active. See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1.

15 EXT FAULT 2 Digital input defined to report second external fault is active. See parameter 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2.

15 EARTH FAULT The load on the input power system is out of balance. Check for faults in the motor or motor cable. Verify that motor

cable does not exceed maximum specified length.

17 UNDERLOAD Motor load is lower than expected. Check for disconnected load. Check parameters 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNCTION

through 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE.

18 THERM FAIL Internal fault. The thermistor measuring the internal temperature of the drive is open or shorted. Contact Carrier.

19 OPEX LINK Internal fault. A communication-related problem has been detected between the OMIO and OINT boards. Contact

Carrier.

20 OPEX PWR Internal fault. Low voltage condition detected on the OINT board. Contact Carrier.

21 CURR MEAS Internal fault. Current measurement is out of range. Contact Carrier.

22 SUPPLY PHASE Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high. Check for missing main phase or blown fuse.

23 RESERVED Not used.

24 Motor speed is greater than 120% of the larger (in magnitude) of 2001 MINIMUM SPEED or 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED

OVERSPEED parameters. Check parameter settings for 2001 and 2002. Check adequacy of motor braking torque. Check

applicability of torque control. Check brake chopper and resistor.

25 RESERVED Not used.

26 DRIVE ID Internal fault. Configuration block drive ID is not valid.

27 CONFIG FILE Internal configuration file has an error. Contact Carrier.

28 Field bus communication has timed out. Check fault setup (3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT

SERIAL 1 ERR TIME). Check communication settings (Group 51 or 53 as appropriate). Check for poor connections and/or noise on

line.

29 EFB CON FILE Error in reading the configuration file for the field bus adapter.

30 FORCE TRIP Fault trip forced by the field bus. See the field bus reference literature.

31 EFB 1 Fault code reserved for the EFB protocol application. The meaning is protocol dependent.

32 EFB 2 Fault code reserved for the EFB protocol application. The meaning is protocol dependent.

33 EFB 3 Fault code reserved for the EFB protocol application. The meaning is protocol dependent.

34 MOTOR PHASE Fault in the motor circuit. One of the motor phases is lost. Check for motor fault, motor cable fault, thermal relay fault,

or internal fault.

35 OUTP WIRING Error in power wiring suspected. Check that input power wired to drive output. Check for ground faults.

101-105 SYSTEM ERROR Error internal to the drive. Contact Carrier and report the error number.

201-205 SYSTEM ERROR Error internal to the drive. Contact Carrier and report the error number.

87

APPENDIX B- VFD INFORMATION (CONT)

Table 41 -- FAULT CODES (cont)

FAULT FAULT NAME IN PANEL DESCRIPTION AND RECOMMENDED CORRECTIVE ACTION

CODE

1000

PAR HZRPM

Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for any of the following:

2001 MINIMUM SPEED >2002 MAXIMUM SPEED

2007 MINIMUM FREQ > 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ

2001 MINIMUM SPEED /9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside of the range: -128/+ 128

2002 MAXIMUM SPEED /9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside of the range: -128/+ 128

2007 MINIMUM FREQ /9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside of the range: - 128/+ 128

2008 MAXIMUM FREQ /9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside of the range: - 128/+ 128

1001 PAR PFA REFNG Parameter values are inconsistent. Check that 2007 MINIMUM FREQ is negative, when 8123 PFA ENABLE is active.

1002 Parameter values are inconsistent. The number of programmed PFA relays does not match with Interlock

PAR PFA IOCNF configuration, when 8123 PFA ENABLE is active. Check consistency of RELAY OUTPUT parameters 1401 through

1403, and 1410 through 1412. Check 8117 NR OF AUX MOTORS, 8118 AUTOCHANGE INTERV, and 8120

INTERLOCKS.

1003 PAR AI SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent. Check that parameter 1301 AI 1 MIN > 1302 AI 1 MAX and that parameter 1304 AI

2MIN > 1305AI 2 MAX.

1004 PAR AO SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent. Check that parameter 1504 AO 1 MIN > 1505 AO 1 MAX and that parameter 1510

AO2MIN > 1511AO2MAX.

1005 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent: Improper motor nominal kVA or motor nominal power. Check the

following parameters:

PAR PCU 2 1.1 < (9906 MOTOR NOM CURR * 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT * 1.73 /PN) < 2.6

Where: PN = 1000 * 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER (if units are kW) or PN = 746

• 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER (if units are HP, e.g., in US)

1006 PAR EXT RO Parameter values are inconsistent. Check the extension relay module for connection and 1410 through 1412 RELAY

OUTPUTS 4 through 6 have non-zero values.

1007 PAR FBUS Parameter values are inconsistent. Check that a parameter is set for field bus control (e.g., 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS =

10 (COMM)), but 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 0.

1008 PAR PFA MODE Parameter values are inconsistent. The 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE must = 3 (SCALAR SPEED) when 8123 PFA

ENABLE activated.

1009 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent or improper motor nominal frequency or speed. Check for both

of the following:

PAR PCU 1 1 < (60 * 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ/9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED < 16

0.8 < 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED /(120 * 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ /Motor poles) < 0.992

1010 OVERRIDE/PFA Override mode is enabled and PFA is activated at the same time. This cannot be done because PFA interlocks cannot

CONFLICT be observed in the override mode.

88

APPENDIX B- VFD INFORMATION (CONT)

Table 42 -- ALARM CODES

ALARM ALARM NAME DESCRIPTION AND RECOMMENDED CORRECTIVE ACTION

CODE IN PANEL

2001 - Reserved

2002 - Reserved

2003 - Reserved

2004 DIR LOCK The change in direction being attempted is not allowed. Do not attempt to change the direction of motor rotation, or

Change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow direction change (if reverse operation is safe).

Field bus communication has timed out. Check fault setup (3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT

2005 I/O COMM TIME). Check communication settings (Group 51 or 53 as appropriate). Check for poor connections and/or noise on

line.

2006 All LOSS Analog input 1 is lost, or value is less than the minimum setting, Check input source and connections. Check the

parameter that sets the minimum (3021) and the parameter that sets the Alarm/Fault operation (3001).

2007 AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 is lost, or value is less than the minimum setting, Check input source and connections. Check

parameter that sets the minimum (3022) and the parameter that sets the Alarm/Fault operation (3001).

Panel communication is lost and either the VFD is in local control mode (the control panel displays HAND), or the

VFD is in remote control mode (AUTO) and is parameterized to accept start/stop, direction or reference from the

2008 PANEL LOSS control panel, To correct, check the communication lines and connections, Parameter 3002 PANEL LOSS, and

parameters in groups 10 COMMAND INPUTS and 11 REFERENCE SELECT (if drive operation is REM).

2009 - Reserved

Motor is hot, based on either the VFD estimate or on temperature feedback, This alarm warns that a Motor Overload

2010 MOT OVERTEMP fault trip may be near, Check for overloaded motor. Adjust the parameters used for the estimate (3005 through 3009).

Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters.

Motor load is lower than expected. This alarm warns that a Motor Underload fault trip may be near. Check that the

2011 UNDERLOAD motor and drive ratings match (motor is NOT undersized for the drive). Check the settings on parameters 3013 to

3015.

2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in the stall region. This alarm warns that a Motor Stall fault trip may be near.

This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform an automatic fault reset, which may start the motor. To

2013* AUTORESET control automatic reset, use parameter group 31 (AUTOMATIC RESET).

This alarm warns that the PFA autochange function is active. To control PFA, use parameter group 81 (PFA) and the

2014 AUTOCHANGE Pump Alternation macro.

This alarm warns that the PFA interlocks are active, which means that the drive cannot start any motor (when

2015 PFA INTERLOCK Autochange is used), or a speed regulated motor (when Autochange is not used).

2016 - Reserved

2017" OFF BUTTON This alarm indicates that the OFF button has been pressed.

This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is active, which means that the motor could accelerate when the PID

2018 PID SLEEP sleep function ends. To control PID sleep, use parameters 4022 through 4026 or 4122 through 4126.

2019 ID RUN The VFD is performing an ID run.

2020 OVERRIDE Override mode is activated.

START ENABLE 1 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 1 signal is missing. To control Start Enable 1 function, use parameter 1608. To

2021 MISSING correct, check the digital input configuration and the communication settings.

START ENABLE 2 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 2 signal is missing. To control Start Enable 2 function, use parameter1609. To

2022 MISSING correct, check the digital input configuration and the communication settings.

2023 EMERGENCY STOP Emergency stop is activated.

This alarm is not indicated by a relay output, even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions, parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT = 5 (ALARM) or 16

FLT/ALARM).

Table 43 -- MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

Heat sink temperature check and Every 6 to 12 months (depending

cleaning on the dustiness of the

environment)

Main cooling fan replacement Every five years

HVAC Control panel battery change Every ten years

89

APPENDIX B- VFD INFORMATION (CONT)

Main Fan Replacement

The main cooling fan of the VFD has alife span of about 60,000

operating hours at maximum rated operating temperature and drive

load. The expected life span doubles for each 18 F drop in the fan

temperature (fan temperature is a function of ambient temperatures

and drive loads).

Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan

bearings and the gradual rise in the heat sink temperature in spite of

heat sink cleaning. If the drive is operated in a critical part of a

process, fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms 2

start appearing. Replacement fans are available from Carrier.

To replace the main fan for frame sizes RI through R2, perform the

following (see Main Fan Replacement figure):

1. Remove power from drive.

2. Remove drive cover.

3. For frame sizes RI and R2, press together the retaining clips

on the fan cover and lift.

4. Disconnect the fan cable.

5. Install the new fan by reversing Steps 2 to 4.

6. Restore power.

Fig. 43 - Main Fan Replacement

(Frame Sizes R1-R2)

(08681

Control Panel Cleaning

Use asoft damp cloth to clean the control panel. Avoid harsh

cleaners which could scratch the display window.

Battery Replacement

A battery is only used in assistant control panels that have the clock

function available and enabled. The battery keeps the clock

operating in memory during power interruptions. The expected life

for the battery is greater than ten years. To remove the battery, use

a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel.

Replace the battery with type CR2032.

90

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

LEGEND

Bhp - BrakeHorsepower

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

LEGEND

Bhp - BrakeHorsepower

APPENDIX C - START-UP DATA

Rpm

5O4

527

551

576

6OO

626

651

677

7O3

Table 44 -- Fan Performance -48PDD05 Vertical Units

0.2 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.4

Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm

0.16 613 0.23 710

0.19 632 0.27 725

0.22 652 0.31 741

0.26 673 0.35 759

0.30 694 0.40 777

0.35 716 0.45 797

0.40 739 0.51 817

0.46 762 0.57 838

0.52 785 0.64 859

0.6

Bhp

0.31

0.35

0.40

0.44

0.50

0.55

0.62

0.69

0.76

Rpm

798

810

823

838

854

871

889

9O8

927

0.8

Bhp

0.40

0.44

0.49

0.54

0.60

0.66

0.73

0.80

0.88

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

1.2 1.4

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm

957 0.59 1030 0.70 1098

964 0.64 1035 0.75 1102

973 0.70 1042 0.81 1107

983 0.76 1050 0.87 1114

994 0.82 1060 0.94 1122

1007 0.89 1071 1.02 1132

1021 0.97 1083 1.10 1143

1037 1.05 1097 1.18 1155

1053 1.14 1111 1.27 1168

NOTES:

1.6

Bhp Rpm

0.80 1163

0.86 1166

0.92 1170

0.99 1176

1.06 1183

1.14 1191

1.23 1200

1.32 1211

1.41 1223

i. Maxinmm continuous BHP is 2.0.

2. See General Fan Performance Notes.

1.8

Bhp

0.91

0.98

1.04

1.12

1.19

1.27

1.36

1.45

1.55

1.0

Rpm Bhp

881 0.49

890 0.54

900 0.59

912 0.65

926 0.71

941 0.78

957 0.85

974 0.93

992 1.01

2.

Rpm Bhp

1225 1.03

1227 1.10

1231 1.17

1235 1.24

1241 1.32

1248 1.41

1256 1.50

1266 1.60

1276 1.70

Table 45 -- Fan Performance - 48PDE05 Vertical Units

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.2 0.4

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm

509 0.16 618 0.24 714

533 0.19 637 0.27 730

557 0.23 658 0.31 746

582 0.27 679 0.36 764

608 0.31 701 0.40 783

634 0.36 723 0.46 803

660 0.41 747 0.52 824

686 0.47 770 0.58 846

713 0.54 795 0.66 868

0.6

Bhp

0.32

0.36

0.40

0.45

0.50

0.56

0.63

0.70

0.78

0.8

Rpm Bhp

802 0.41

814 0.45

828 0.50

843 0.55

860 0.61

877 0.67

896 0.74

915 0.82

935 0.90

1.0

Rpm Bhp

884 0.50

894 0.55

905 0.60

917 0.66

931 0.72

947 0.79

963 0.86

981 0.94

999 1.02

1.2 1.4

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm

961 0.60 1033 0.70 1101

968 0.65 1039 0.76 1106

977 0.70 1046 0.82 1111

987 0.77 1054 0.88 1118

999 0.83 1065 0.95 1127

1013 0.90 1076 1.03 1137

1027 0.98 1089 1.11 1148

1043 1.06 1103 1.20 1161

1060 1.16 1118 1.29 1175

NOTES:

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)1.8 2.01.6

Bhp Rpm

0.81 1166

0.87 1169

0.93 1174

1.00 1180

1.07 1187

1.15 1196

1.24 1206

1.33 1217

1.43 1229

i. Maxinmm continuous BHP is 2.0.

2. See General Fan Performance Notes.

Bhp Rpm

0.92 1228

0.98 1230

1.05 1234

1.12 1239

1.20 1245

1.28 1253

1.37 1261

1.47 1271

1.57 1282

Bhp

1.03

1.10

1.17

1.25

1.33

1.42

1.51

1.61

1.72

91

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

LEGEND

Bhp - BrakeHorsepower

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

LEGEND

Bhp - BrakeHorsepower

Table 46 -- Fan Performance -48PDF05 Vertical Units

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.2 0.4

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm

520 0.17 628 0.24 723

545 0.20 648 0.28 739

570 0.24 668 0.32 756

596 0.28 691 0.37 775

623 0.32 714 0.42 795

650 0.37 737 0.48 816

677 0.43 762 0.54 838

705 0.50 787 0.61 861

734 0.57 813 0.68 884

0.6

Bhp

0.33

0.37

0.41

0.46

0.52

0.58

0.65

0.72

0.80

0.8

Rpm Bhp

811 0.41

823 0.46

837 0.51

853 0.56

870 0.62

889 0.69

909 0.76

929 0.84

951 0.93

1.0

Rpm Bhp

892 0.51

902 0.56

913 0.61

927 0.67

942 0.73

958 0.80

976 0.88

994 0.97

1014 1.06

1.2 1.4

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm

968 0.61 1040 0.71 1108

976 0.66 1046 0.77 1112

985 0.72 1054 0.83 1119

996 0.78 1063 0.90 1127

1009 0.85 1074 0.97 1136

1024 0.92 1087 1.05 1147

1039 1.00 1100 1.13 1159

1056 1.09 1116 1.22 1173

1074 1.19 1132 1.32 1188

NOTES:

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)1.8 2.01.6

Bhp Rpm

0.82 1172

0.88 1176

0.95 1181

1.02 1188

1.09 1196

1.17 1205

1.26 1216

1.36 1229

1.46 1242

i. Maxinnml continuous BHP is 2.0.

2. See General Fan Performance Notes.

Bhp Rpm

0.93 1233

1.00 1237

1.07 1241

1.14 1247

1.22 1254

1.31 1262

1.40 1272

1.50 1283

1.61 1295

Bhp

1.04

1.11

1.19

1.27

1.35

1.44

1.54

1.64

1.75

Rpm

593

62O

646

673

7OO

728

755

783

811

84O

868

Table 47 -- Fan Performance -48PDD06 Vertical Units

0.2 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.4

Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm

0.27 688 0.37 773

0.32 711 0.42 793

0.37 734 0.47 813

0.43 758 0.53 835

0.49 783 0.60 857

0.56 807 0.68 879

0.63 833 0.76 903

0.71 858 0.84 926

0.80 884 0.94 950

0.90 910 1.04 975

1.00 937 1.15 1000

0.6

Bhp

0.46

0.52

0.58

0.64

0.72

0.80

0.88

0.97

1.07

1.18

1.30

Rpm

851

868

886

905

925

946

968

990

1012

1035

1059

0.8

Bhp

0.56

0.62

0.69

0.76

0.84

0.92

1.01

1.11

1.21

1.33

1.45

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

1.2 1.4

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm

995 0.78 1061 0.89 1125

1007 0.85 1072 0.96 1134

1021 0.92 1084 1.04 1145

1036 1.00 1098 1.13 1157

1053 1.08 1112 1.22 1170

1070 1.18 1128 1.31 1184

1088 1.28 1145 1.42 1199

1107 1.38 1162 1.53 1216

1127 1.50 1181 1.65 1233

1147 1.62 1200 1.77 1251

1168 1.75 1220 1.91 1270

NOTES:

1.6

Bhp

1.01

1.09

1.17

1.26

1.35

1.45 1238

1.56 1253

1.68 1268

1.80 1284

1.93 1300

2.07 1318

i. Maxinnml continuous BHP is 2.0.

2. See General Fan Performance Notes.

1.8

Rpm

1186

1194

1203

1214

1226

Bhp

1.14

1.22

1.30

1.39

1.49

1.60

1.71

1.83

1.95

2.09

2.23

1.0

Rpm Bhp

925 0.67

939 0.73

955 0.80

972 0.88

990 0.96

1009 1.05

1029 1.14

1050 1.24

1071 1.35

1092 1.47

1115 1.60

2.0

Rpm Bhp

1245 1.26

1252 1.35

1260 1.44

1269 1.53

1280 1.63

1291 1.74

1304 1.86

1318 1.98

1333 2.11

1349 2.25

1365 2.40

92

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

LEGEND

Bhp - BrakeHorsepower

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

AIRFLOW

(CFM)

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

LEGEND

Bhp - BrakeHorsepower

Rpm

607

634

662

690

719

748

777

807

837

867

897

Table 48 -- Fan Performance -48PDE06 Vertical Units

0.2

Bhp

0.29

0.33

0.39

0.45

0.51

0.59

0.67

0.75

0.85

0.95

1.06

Rpm

7OO

724

748

773

799

825

852

879

9O7

935

963

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE

0.4 0.6 (in. wg)

Bhp

0.38

0.43

0.49

0.55

0.63

0.70

0.79

0.88

0.98

1.09

1.21

Rpm

784

8O4

826

848

872

896

92O

946

971

998

1024

Bhp

0.47

0.53

0.60

0.67

0.74

0.83

0.92

1.01

1.12

1.24

1.36

Rpm

861

879

898

918

94O

962

985

1008

1032

1057

1082

0.8

Bhp

0.57

0.64

0.71

0.78

0.86

0.95

1.05

1.15

1.26

1.38

1.51

Rpm

1004

1017

1032

1048

1066

1084

1104

1124

1145

1167

1189

1.2

Bhp

0.79

0.86

0.94

1.02

1.11

1.21

1.31

1.43

1.55

1.68

1.82

Rpm

1070

1081

1094

1109

1125

1142

1160

1179

1198

1219

1240

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

1.4 1.6

Bhp

0.91

0.98

1.06

1.15

1.24

1.35

1.45

1.57

1.70

1.83

1.97

Rpm

1133

1143

1155

1168

1182

1197

1214

1231

1250

1269

1290

NOTES:

Bhp Rpm

1.03 1194

1.11 1203

1.19 1213

1.28 1224

1.38 1237

1.49 1251

1.60 1267

1.72 1283

1.85 1300

1.99 1318

2.14 1337

i. Maxinnml continuous BHP is 2.0.

2. See General Fan Performance Notes.

1.8

Bhp

1.15

1.24

1.32

1.42

1.52

1.63

1.75

1.87

2.01

2.15

2.30

Rpm

62O

648

677

7O7

737

767

798

829

861

893

925

Rpm

1013

1027

1043

1060

1078

1098

1119

1140

1163

1186

1210

0.2

Bhp

0.30

0.35

0.40

0.47

0.54

0.61

0.70

0.79

0.89

1.00

1.12

1.2

Bhp

0.81

0.88

0.96

1.05

1.14

1.24

1.35

1.47

1.60

1.73

1.88

Table 49 -- Fan Performance -48PDF06 Vertical Units

Rpm

711

736

762

788

815

843

871

9OO

929

959

989

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE

0.4 0.6

Bhp

0.39

0.45

0.51

0.58

0.65

0.73

0.82

0.92

1.03

1.15

1.27

Rpm

794

816

838

862

887

912

938

965

992

1020

1048

Bhp

0.49

0.55

0.61

0.69

0.77

0.85

0.95

1.05

1.17

1.29

1.42

(in. wg)

0.8

Rpm

871

89O

910

931

954

977

1001

1026

1052

1078

1105

Rpm

1078

1091

1105

1120

1137

1155

1174

1195

1216

1238

1261

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

1.4 1.6

Bhp

0.92

1.00

1.08

1.18

1.27

1.38

1.49

1.62

1.75

1.89

2.04

Rpm

1141

1152

1165

1179

1194

1210

1228

1247

1267

1288

1309

NOTES:

Bhp Rpm

1.05 1202

1.13 1211

1.21 1222

1.31 1235

1.41 1249

1.52 1264

1.64 1280

1.77 1298

1.90 1317

2.05 1336

2.20 1357

i. Maxinnml continuous BHP is 2.0.

2. See General Fan Performance Notes.

1.8

Bhp

0.59

0.65

0.72

0.80

0.89

0.98

1.08

1.19

1.31

1.43

1.57

Bhp

1.17

1.25

1.35

1.44

1.55

1.67

1.79

1.92

2.06

2.21

2.37

1.0

Rpm Bhp

934 0.68

950 0.75

967 0.82

985 0.90

1004 0.98

1024 1.08

1045 1.18

1067 1.29

1090 1.40

1113 1.53

1137 1.66

2.

Rpm Bhp

1253 1.28

1260 1.37

1269 1.46

1279 1.56

1291 1.66

1304 1.78

1318 1.90

1333 2.03

1349 2.17

1366 2.31

1.0

Rpm Bhp

944 0.70

960 0.76

978 0.84

997 0.92

1017 1.01

1039 1.11

1061 1.21

1084 1.33

1108 1.45

1133 1.58

1158 1.72

2.0

Rpm Bhp

1260 1.30

1269 1.39

1278 1.48

1290 1.59

1302 1.70

1316 1.81

1331 1.94

1348 2.08

1365 2.22

1384 2.37

93

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

Table 50 -- Fan Performance - 48PDD05 Horizontal Units

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.2 0.4

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm

436 0.12 559 0.19 661

456 0.14 574 0.22 673

477 0.17 592 0.25 687

500 0.20 611 0.29 703

523 0.24 631 0.33 721

548 0.28 652 0.38 739

573 0.32 674 0.43 759

600 0.37 697 0.48 779

627 0.43 720 0.55 801

0.6

Bhp

0.27

0.30

0.34

0.38

0.43

0.48

0.54

0.60

0.67

Rpm

753

762

774

787

801

818

835

854

873

0.8 1.0

Bhp Rpm Bhp

0.35 839 0.45

0.39 845 0.49

0.43 853 0.53

0.48 864 0.58

0.53 877 0.63

0.58 891 0.69

0.64 906 0.76

0.71 923 0.83

0.79 941 0.91

AIRFLOW 1.2

(Cfm) Rpm Bhp

1200 918 0.54

1300 922 0.58

1400 929 0.63

1500 937 0.69

1600 947 0.74

1700 959 0.81

1800 973 0.88

1900 988 0.95

2000 1004 1.04

LEGEND

Bhp - Brake Horsepower

High Range Motor/Drive Required

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

1.4 1.6

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm

993 0.64 1063 0.75 1130

995 0.69 1064 0.80 1130

1000 0.74 1067 0.85 1132

1006 0.80 1072 0.91 1136

1015 0.86 1079 0.98 1141

1025 0.93 1088 1.05 1148

1037 1.00 1098 1.13 1157

1050 1.08 1110 1.21 1168

1065 1.17 1123 1.30 1179

NOTES:

i. Maxinmnl continuous BHP is 2.0.

2. See General Fan Performance Notes.

1.8

Bhp

0.86

0.91

0.97

1.03

1.10

1.18

1.26

1.35

1.44

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

Table 51 -- Fan Performance -48PDE05 Horizontal Units

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.2 0.4

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm

443 0.12 564 0.20 666

463 0.15 580 0.22 678

485 0.17 598 0.26 693

508 0.21 617 0.30 709

532 0.24 638 0.34 727

558 0.28 660 0.39 746

584 0.33 682 0.44 766

611 0.38 706 0.50 788

639 0.44 731 0.56 810

0.6

Bhp

0.27

0.31

0.34

0.39

0.43

0.49

0.55

0.61

0.68

Rpm

758

767

778

792

8O7

824

842

861

882

0.8

2.0

Rpm Bhp

1193 0.97

1193 1.03

1194 1.09

1196 1.16

1201 1.23

1207 1.31

1214 1.39

1223 1.48

1234 1.58

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

AIRFLOW 1.2 1.4 1.6

(Cfm) Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm

1200 922 0.55 996 0.65 1066 0.75 1133

1300 926 0.59 999 0.69 1068 0.80 1133

1400 933 0.64 1004 0.75 1071 0.86 1136

1500 942 0.69 1011 0.80 1077 0.92 1140

1600 952 0.75 1020 0.87 1084 0.99 1146

1700 965 0.82 1030 0.94 1093 1.06 1153

1800 979 0.89 1043 1.01 1104 1.14 1163

1900 995 0.97 1057 1.09 1116 1.22 1174

2000 1012 1.05 1072 1.18 1130 1.32 1186

LEGEND NOTES:

Bhp -BrakeHorsepower i. Maxinmnl continuous BHP is 2.0.

2. See General Fan Per_rmanee Notes.

High Range Motor/Drive Required

1.8

1.0

Bhp Rpm Bhp

0.36 842 0.45

0.40 849 0.49

0.44 858 0.54

0.48 869 0.59

0.54 882 0.64

0.59 896 0.70

0.66 912 0.77

0.72 930 0.84

0.80 948 0.92

Bhp

0.86

0.92

0.98

1.04

1.11

1.19

1.27

1.36

1.46

2.0

Rpm Bhp

1196 0.97

1196 1.03

1197 1.10

1200 1.17

1205 1.24

1211 1.32

1220 1.41

1229 1.50

1240 1.60

94

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

Table 52 -- Fan Performance -48PDF05 Horizontal Units

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.2 0.4

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm

456 0.13 574 0.20 675

477 0.16 591 0.23 688

500 0.18 610 0.27 703

524 0.22 630 0.31 720

550 0.26 652 0.35 739

576 0.30 675 0.40 759

604 0.35 699 0.46 781

633 0.41 724 0.52 804

662 0.47 750 0.59 828

0.6

Bhp

0.28

0.32

0.36

0.40

0.45

0.50

0.57

0.63

0.71

Rpm

766

776

788

8O2

819

836

856

876

898

0.8 1.0

Bhp Rpm Bhp

0.37 850 0.46

0.41 857 0.50

0.45 867 0.55

0.50 879 0.60

0.55 893 0.66

0.61 908 0.72

0.68 925 0.79

0.75 944 0.87

0.83 964 0.95

AIRFLOW 1.2

(Cfm) Rpm Bhp

1200 929 0.56

1300 934 0.60

1400 941 0.65

1500 951 0.71

1600 963 0.77

1700 976 0.84

1800 991 0.91

1900 1008 0.99

2000 1026 1.08

LEGEND

Bhp - Brake Horsepower

1High Range Motor/Drive Required

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

1.4 1.6

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm

1003 0.66 1073 0.76 1139

1006 0.71 1075 0.82 1140

1012 0.76 1079 0.87 1143

1020 0.82 1085 0.94 1148

1029 0.89 1093 1.01 1155

1041 0.96 1103 1.08 1163

1054 1.04 1115 1.16 1174

1070 1.12 1129 1.25 1186

1086 1.21 1144 1.35 1199

NOTES:

i. Maxinmm continuous BHP is 2.0.

2. See General Fan Performance Notes.

1.8

Bhp

0.87

0.93

0.99

1.06

1.13

1.21

1.30

1.39

1.49

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

Table 53 -- Fan Performance -48PDD06 Horizontal Units

Rpm

521

546

572

599

627

655

684

714

744

775

8O6

0.2

Bhp

0.22

0.25

0.30

0.35

0.40

0.46

0.53

0.61

0.69

0.78

0.88

Rpm

628

649

671

695

719

745

771

797

824

852

88O

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.4 0.6

Bhp

0.31

0.35

0.40

0.45

0.51

0.58

0.66

0.74

0.83

0.92

1.03

Rpm

718

737

757

777

799

822

846

871

896

922

948

0.8

Bhp Rpm

0.40 F]800

0.45 F]816

0.50 F]834

0.56 F]852

0.63 F]872

0.70 F]893

0.78 _915

0.87 _938

0.96 _961

1.06 _985

1.18 1010

Bhp

0.49

0.55

0.61

0.67

0.74

0.82

0.91

1.00

1.10

1.21

1.32

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

LEGEND

Bhp - BrakeHorsepower

Rpm

949

961

974

988

1004

1022

1040

1060

1081

1102

1124

1.2

Bhp

0.70

0.77

0.83

0.91

0.99

1.07

1.17

1.27

1.38

1.50

1.62

Rpm

1018

1027

1039

1052

1066

1082

1099

1117

1136

1156

1177

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC

1.4 1.6 PRESSURE (in. wg)

Bhp

0.82

0.88

0.95

1.03

1.11

1.20

1.30

1.41

1.52

1.65

1.78

Rpm

1083

1091

1101

1112

1125

1139

1155

1172

1190

1209

1228

NOTES:

Bhp

0.93

1.00

1.08

1.16

1.25

1.34

1.44

1.55

1.67

1.80

1.94

1.8

Rpm

1146

1153

1161

1171

1182

1195

1209

1225

1242

1259

1278

i. Maxinmm continuous BHP is 2.0.

2. See General Fan Performance Notes.

Bhp

1.05

1.13

1.21

1.29

1.38

1.48

1.59

1.70

1.82

1.96

2.10

2.

Rpm Bhp

1202 0.98

1202 1.05

1204 1.11

1208 1.18

1214 1.26

1221 1.34

1230 1.43

1241 1.53

1253 1.63

1.0

Rpm Bhp

877 0.60

890 0.65

906 0.72

922 0.79

940 0.86

959 0.94

979 1.03

1001 1.13

1022 1.24

1045 1.35

1069 1.47

2.0

Rpm Bhp

1207 1.18

1212 1.26

1219 1.34

1227 1.43

1238 1.52

1249 1.62

1262 1.73

1277 1.85

1292 1.98

1309 2.12

1326 2.26

95

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

LEGEND

Bhp - BrakeHorsepower

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

LEGEND

Bhp - BrakeHorsepower

Rpm

536

563

590

619

648

678

709

740

772

8O4

837

Rpm

958

971

985

1001

1018

1036

1056

1077

1099

1122

1146

0.2

Bhp

0.23

0.27

0.31

0.37

0.43

0.49

0.56

0.65

0.73

0.83

0.94

1.2

Bhp

0.72

0.78

0.85

0.93

1.01

1.10

1.20

1.31

1.43

1.55

1.69

Table 54 -- Fan Performance - 48PDE06 Horizontal Units

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.4

Rpm Bhp Rpm

640 0.32 729

663 0.36 749

686 0.42 770

711 0.47 792

737 0.54 816

764 0.61 840

792 0.69 865

820 0.78 891

849 0.87 918

879 0.97 946

909 1.09 974

0.6

Bhp

0.41

0.46

0.52

0.58

0.65

0.73

0.81

0.91

1.01

1.12

1.24

Rpm

811

828

846

866

887

9O9

933

957

982

1008

1034

0.8

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

1.4

Rpm Bhp

1027 0.83

1037 0.90

1049 0.97

1063 1.05

1079 1.14

1096 1.24

1114 1.34

1134 1.45

1154 1.57

1176 1.70

1198 1.84

Rpm

1092

1101

1111

1124

1138

1153

1170

1188

1207

1228

1249

NOTES:

1.6

Bhp Rpm

0.95 1154

1.02 1162

1.10 1171

1.18 1182

1.27 1194

1.37 1208

1.48 1224

1.60 1241

1.72 1259

1.86 1278

2.00 1298

i. Maxinnml continuous BHP is 2.0.

2. See General Fan Performance Notes.

1.8

Bhp

0.51

0.56

0.62

0.69

0.77

0.85

0.94

1.04

1.14

1.26

1.38

Bhp

1.07

1.15

1.23

1.32

1.41

1.51

1.63

1.75

1.88

2.02

2.16

Rpm

551

579

6O8

638

668

7OO

732

765

799

833

867

Rpm

968

981

996

1013

1031

1051

1072

1094

1118

1142

1168

0.2

Bhp

0.24

0.28

0.33

0.39

0.45

0.52

0.60

0.68

0.78

0.88

1.00

1.2

Bhp

0.73

0.80

0.87

0.95

1.04

1.14

1.24

1.35

1.48

1.61

1.75

Table 55 -- Fan Performance - 48PDF06 Horizontal Units

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.4

Rpm Bhp Rpm

653 0.33 741

676 0.38 761

701 0.43 783

727 0.49 807

755 0.56 831

783 0.64 857

812 0.72 884

842 0.81 912

873 0.92 940

904 1.03 969

936 1.15 999

0.6

Bhp

0.42

0.48

0.54

0.60

0.68

0.76

0.85

0.95

1.05

1.17

1.30

Rpm

821

839

858

879

9O2

925

95O

976

1002

1030

1058

0.8

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

1.4

Rpm Bhp

1035 0.85

1047 0.92

1060 0.99

1075 1.08

1092 1.17

1110 1.27

1129 1.38

1150 1.50

1172 1.62

1195 1.76

1219 1.91

Rpm

1100

1110

1121

1135

1150

1166

1185

1204

1225

1246

1269

NOTES:

1.6

Bhp Rpm

0.97 1162

1.04 1171

1.12 1181

1.21 1193

1.30 1206

1.41 1221

1.52 1238

1.64 1256

1.77 1275

1.92 1296

2.07 1317

i. Maxinnml continuous BHP is 2.0.

2. See General Fan Performance Notes.

1.8

Bhp

0.52

0.58

0.64

0.71

0.79

0.88

0.97

1.08

1.19

1.31

1.44

Bhp

1.09

1.16

1.25

1.34

1.44

1.55

1.67

1.79

1.93

2.07

2.23

1.0

Rpm Bhp

887 0.61

901 0.67

917 0.74

935 0.81

954 0.89

975 0.98

996 1.07

1019 1.17

1042 1.28

1066 1.40

1092 1.53

2.0

Rpm Bhp

1214 1.20

1221 1.28

1228 1.36

1238 1.45

1249 1.55

1262 1.66

1276 1.78

1292 1.90

1309 2.03

1327 2.18

1346 2.33

1.0

Rpm Bhp

896 0.62

912 0.69

929 0.76

948 0.83

968 0.91

990 1.01

1013 1.11

1037 1.21

1062 1.33

1087 1.46

1114 1.60

2.0

Rpm Bhp

1222 1.21

1229 1.29

1238 1.38

1248 1.48

1261 1.58

1275 1.69

1290 1.82

1307 1.95

1325 2.09

1344 2.24

1365 2.40

96

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

LEGEND

Bhp - BrakeHorsepower

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

LEGEND

Bhp - BrakeHorsepower

Rpm

492

513

534

557

58O

6O3

627

651

675

0.2

Table 56 -- Fan Performance -50PD05 Vertical Units

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

0.15 604 0.22 701 0.31 790 0.39 873 0.49

0.18 620 0.26 714 0.34 800 0.43 880 0.53

0.21 638 0.29 729 0.38 812 0.48 889 0.58

0.24 657 0.33 745 0.43 825 0.53 900 0.63

0.28 677 0.38 762 0.48 839 0.58 912 0.69

0.33 697 0.43 779 0.53 855 0.64 926 0.75

0.38 718 0.48 798 0.59 871 0.70 940 0.82

0.43 739 0.54 817 0.65 889 0.77 956 0.89

0.49 761 0.61 837 0.72 907 0.85 972 0.97

Rpm

95O

955

962

971

981

993

1005

1019

1034

1.2 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0

Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

0.58 1023 0.69 1092 0.79 1157 0.90 1219 1.02

0.63 1027 0.74 1094 0.85 1158 0.96 1220 1.08

0.68 1032 0.79 1098 0.91 1161 1.03 1222 1.15 1

0.74 1039 0.85 1103 0.97 1165 1.09 1225 1.22

0.80 1047 0.92 1110 1.04 1171 1.17 1229 1.30

0.87 1057 0.99 1118 1.11 1178 1.24 1235 1.38

0.94 1068 1.06 1128 1.19 1186 1.33 1242 1.46

1.02 1080 1.14 1139 1.28 1196 1.41 1251 1.56

1.10 1094 1.23 1151 1.37 1206 1.51 1260 1.65

NOTES:

i. Maximum continuous BHP is 2.0.

2. See General Fan Performance Notes.

Rpm

568

592

616

641

665

690

716

742

768

794

820

0.2

Table 57 -- Fan Performance -50PD06 Vertical Units

Bhp

0.25

0.29

0.34

0.39

0.45

0.51

0.57

0.65

0.73

0.81

0.91

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.4

Rpm Bhp Rpm

667 0.34 753

687 0.39 771

708 0.44 789

730 0.50 809

752 0.56 829

775 0.63 850

798 0.70 871

821 0.78 892

845 0.86 915

869 0.96 937

894 1.05 960

0.6

Bhp

0.44

0.49

0.54

0.61

0.67

0.75

0.82

0.91

1.00

1.10

1.20

0.8

Rpm Bhp

833 0.54

848 0.59

864 0.65

881 0.72

900 0.79

918 0.87

938 0.95

958 1.04

979 1.14

1000 1.24

1021 1.35

Rpm

978

989

1001

1015

1029

1045

1061

1078

1096

1115

1134

1.2

Bhp

0.75

0.81

0.88

0.96

1.04

1.12

1.21

1.31

1.42

1.53

1.65

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

1.4

Rpm Bhp

1046 0.87

1055 0.93

1065 1.00

1077 1.08

1090 1.16

1104 1.26

1119 1.35

1135 1.45

1151 1.57

1169 1.68

1187 1.81

Rpm

1110

1117

1126

1136

1148

1161

1174

1189

1204

1221

1238

NOTES:

1.6

Bhp Rpm

0.98 1172

1.05 1178

1.13 1185

1.21 1194

1.30 1204

1.39 1216

1.49 1228

1.60 1241

1.71 1256

1.84 1271

1.97 1287

i. Maxinnml continuous BHP is 2.0.

2. See General Fan Performance Notes.

1.8

Bhp

1.11

1.18

1.26

1.35

1.44

1.53

1.64

1.75

1.87

1.99

2.13

1.0

Rpm Bhp

908 0.64

920 0.70

934 0.76

950 0.83

966 0.91

983 0.99

1001 1.08

1020 1.18

1039 1.28

1059 1.38

1079 1.50

2.0

Rpm Bhp

1231 1.23

1236 1.31

1242 1.39

1250 1.48

1259 1.58

1269 1.68

1280 1.79

1293 1.90

1306 2.02

1320 2.15

1335 2.29

97

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1200

1300

1400

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

Rpm

422

439

457

477

498

521

545

569

595

Table 58 -- Fan Performance - 50PD05 Horizontal Units

0.2

Bhp

0.11

0.13

0.16

0.19

0.22

0.25

0.29

0.34

0.39

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

548 0.19 652 0.26 745 0.35 831 0.44

561 0.21 662 0.29 752 0.38 835 0.47

577 0.24 674 0.33 761 0.42 842 0.51

593 0.27 688 0.37 773 0.46 851 0.56

611 0.31 704 0.41 786 0.51 862 0.61

630 0.35 720 0.46 801 0.56 875 0.67

650 0.40 738 0.51 817 0.62 889 0.73

672 0.45 757 0.57 834 0.68 904 0.80

694 0.51 777 0.63 852 0.75 921 0.87

AIRFLOW 1.2

(Cfm) Rpm Bhp Rpm

1200 911 0.53 _986

1300 913 0.57 _986

1400 918 0.62 _989

1500 925 0.67 _995

1600 934 0.72 1002

1700 944 0.78 1010

1800 956 0.85 1021

1900 970 0.92 1033

2000 985 1.00 1047

LEGEND

Bhp - BrakeHorsepower

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

1.4 1.6 1.8

Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

0.63 1056 0.74 1123 0.85

0.68 1056 0.78 1122 0.90

0.72 1058 0.84 1123 0.95

0.78 1061 0.89 1125 1.01

0.84 1067 0.95 1129 1.08

0.90 1074 1.02 1135 1.15

0.97 1083 1.09 1143 1.23

1.04 1094 1.17 1152 1.31

1.13 1106 1.26 1162 1.40

NOTES:

i. Maxinmnl continuous BHP is 2.0.

2. See General Fan Perfornlanee Notes.

High Range Motor/Drive Required

2.0

Rpm Bhp

1187 0.96

1185 1.01

1185 1.07

1186 1.14

1189 1.21

1194 1.28

1200 1.36

1208 1.45

1217 1.54

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

Table 59 -- Fan Performance -50PD06 Horizontal Units

Rpm

491

513

537

561

586

613

64O

667

695

724

753

0.2

Bhp

0.19

0.23

0.27

0.31

0.36

0.41

0.47

0.54

0.61

0.69

0.78

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)

0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp

604 0.28 697 0.37 781 0.47 859 0.57

623 0.32 714 0.42 795 0.52 871 0.62

643 0.37 731 0.47 810 0.57 884 0.68

664 0.42 750 0.52 827 0.63 899 0.75

686 0.47 770 0.58 845 0.70 915 0.82

709 0.53 790 0.65 864 0.77 932 0.89

732 0.60 812 0.72 884 0.85 950 0.97

757 0.67 834 0.80 904 0.93 969 1.06

782 0.75 857 0.89 926 1.02 989 1.16

807 0.84 881 0.98 948 1.12 1010 1.26

833 0.93 905 1.08 971 1.23 1032 1.38

AIRFLOW

(Cfm)

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

LEGEND

Bhp - BrakeHorsepower

Low Range Motor/Drive

Rpm

932

942

953

966

98O

996

1012

1030

1049

1068

1089

1.2

Bhp

0.68

0.73

0.80

0.86

0.94

1.02

1.11

1.20

1.30

1.41

1.53

Required

AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE

1.4 1.6

Rpm Bhp

1002 0.79

1009 0.85

1019 0.91

1030 0.99

1043 1.06

1057 1.15

1072 1.24

1088 1.34

1106 1.44

1124 1.56

1143 1.68

(in. wg)

1.8

Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm

1068 0.91 1132 1.03 1192

1074 0.97 1136 1.09 1196

1082 1.04 1143 1.17 1201

1092 1.11 1151 1.24 1208

1103 1.19 1161 1.33 1217

1115 1.28 1172 1.42 1227

1129 1.38 1184 1.52 1238

1144 1.48 1198 1.63 1251

1160 1.59 1213 1.74 1265

1178 1.71 1229 1.86 1279

1196 1.84 1246 1.99 1295

NOTES:

i. Maxinmnl continuous BHP is 2.0.

2. See General Fan Perfornlanee Notes.

2.0

Bhp

1.15

1.22

1.30

1.38

1.47

1.56

1.67

1.78

1.89

2.02

2.16

98

GENERAL NOTES FOR FAN PERFORMANCE DATA TABLES

1, Static pressure losses from accessories and options

(economizer, etc.) must be added to external static pressure

before entering Fan Performance table, Refer to

Accessory/FIOP Static Pressure information,

2. Interpolation is permissible, Do not extrapolate.

3, Fan performance tables are based on wet coils, clean filters,

and casing losses, Gas heat losses are included for 48 series

units,

4. Extensive motor and drive testing on these units ensures

that the full horsepower range of the motor can be utilized

with confidence, Using the fan motors up to the bhp rating

shown will not result in nuisance tripping or premature

motor failure, Unit warranty will not be affected,

5. Use of a field-supplied motor may affect wire size.

Recalculate the unit power supply MCA and MOCP if

required. Contact your Carrier representative for details.

6. Use the following formula to calculate input watts:

Input Watts = Bhp x (746/Motor Eft)

99

APPENDIX D - ADDITIONAL START-UP DATA

UNIT

50PD

05

06

Table 60 -- Air Quantity Limits (50PD Units)

COOLING (cfm) HEATING (cfm)

OPTIONAL ELECTRIC HEAT

1200 2000 1200 2000

1500 2500 1500 2500

Table 61 -- Air Quantity Limits (48PD Units)

UNIT COOLING (cfm) HEATING (cfm)

48PD Min Max Min Max

05 (Low Heat) 1200 2000 600 1680

05 (Med Heat) 1200 2000 940 2810

05 (High Heat) 1200 2000 1130 2820

08 (Low Heat) 1500 2500 940 2810

08 (Med Heat) 1500 2500 1130 2820

08 (High Heat) 1500 2500 1510 2520

Table 62 -- Evaporator Fan Motor Specifications -48/50PD

48/50PD DRIVE VOLTAGE/PHASE

05 & 06 Low & High 208/230-3ph

460-3ph

NOTES:

1. Extensive motor and electrical testing ensures that the motors can be utilized

with confidence up to the maximum applied bhp, watts, and amps. Using the fan

motor up to the maximum ratings shown will not result in nuisance tripping or

premature motor failure. Unit warranty will not be affected.

2. Convert bhp to watts using the following formula:

bhp (746)

watts = motor efficiency

EFFICIENCY MAX BHP MAX AMPS

0.80 2.0 6.4

0.80 2.0 3.2

3. The EPAC_ (Energy Policy Act of 1992) regulates energy requirements for

specific types of indoor-fan motors. Motors regulated by EPAC_ include any

general purpose, T-frame (three-digit, 143 and larger), single-speed, foot

mounted, polyphase, squirrel cage induction motors of NEMA (National Electrical

Manufacturers Association) design A and B, manufactured for use in the United

States. Ranging from 1 to 200 Hp, these continuous-duty motors operate on 230

and 460 volt, 60 Hz power. If a motor does not fit into these specifications, the

motor does not have to be replaced by an EPAC_-compliant energy-efficient motor.

Variable-speed motors are exempt from EPACW compliance requirements.

Therefore, the indoor-fan motors for Carrier 48/50PG03-14 units are exempt from

these requirements.

Table 63 -- Fan Rpm at Motor Pulley Settings* -48/50PD

UNIT MOTOR PULLEY TURNS OPEN

48/50PD DRIVE 0 1/2 1 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 41/2 5

Low 910 878 847 815 784 753 721 690 659 627 596

05 High 1173 1139 1104 1070 1035 1001 966 932 897 863 828

08 Low 978 949 920 891 863 834 805 776 748 719 690

Hiclh 1261 1227 1194 1161 1128 1095 1062 1028 995 962 929

*Approximate fan rpm shown, based on 1725 rpm motor.

NOTE: Factory speed setting is at 5 turns open.

Table 64 -- Accessory/FlOP Pressure Drop (in. wg) - 48/50PD

AIRFLOW ELECTRIC ECONOMIZER ECONOMIZER

(CFM) HEAT (Vertical) (Horizontal)

800 0.01 0.01 0.03

800 0.01 0.01 0.05

1000 0.02 0.02 0.07

1200 0.02 0.03 O.10

1400 0.03 0.04 O.14

1600 0.04 0.08 O.17

1800 0.05 0.07 0.22

2000 0.07 0.09 0.28

2200 0.08 0.11 0.31

2400 0.10 0.13 0.37

2600 0.11 0.15 0.43

2800 0.13 0.18 0.49

3000 0.15 0.21 0.56

100

ModelNumber:

SerialNumber:

Date:

Technician:

ControlType:

SetPoints:

CONTROL SET POINT AND CONFIGURATION LOG

Software Versions:

MBB: CESR131320--

ECB: CESRI31249--

MAR@ CESRI31171--

INDICATE UNIT SETTINGS BELOW

Thermostat/T55 Space Temp./T-56 Space Temp./T-58 Space Temp.

Cooling Occupied: Unoccupied:

Heating Occupied: Unoccupied:

ITEM

CONFIGURATION

DISP

METR

LANG

PROT

PSWD

TEST

UNIT

S.DLY

OC.FN

IDF.F

FS.MX

FS.MN

FS.VM

FN.SW

FL.SW

FS.SW

RM.SW

RH.S

RH.SW

TCS.C

TCS.H

COOL

MIN.C

FS.CD

MRT.C

MOT.C

RST.C

FOD.C

CS.A1

C.LO

ALM.N

SAT

SASP

SA.MU

SA.MD

SAT.U

SAT.L

SST

SST.O

SST.1

SST.2

SST.3

PSI.D

OFC

1.MXP

2.MNP

2.ON

2.OFF

Table 65 -- MODE -CONFIGURATION

EXPANSION

Display Configuration

Metric Display

Language Selection

Password Enable

Service Password

Test Display LEDs

Unit Configuration

Startup Delay

Fan On When Occupied

Shut Down on IDF Failure

Supply Fan Maximum

Speed

Supply Fan Minimum Speed

Vent Mode Fan Speed

Fan Status Switch

Filter Status Switch

Fire Shutdown Switch

Remote Occupancy Switch

RH Sensor on QAQ Input

Space Humidity Switch

Temp Cmp Strt Cool Factr

Temp Crop Strt Heat Factr

Cooling Configuration

Min Compressor Capacity

Fan Speed Control Demand

Compressor Min On Time

Compressor Min Off Time

Runtime to Reset Strikes

Fan-off Delay, Mech Cool

Current Sensing A1

Compressor Lockout Temp

Alert Each Strike

Supply Air Temperature

Cool Supply Air Setpoint

SASP Maximum Reset Up

SASP Maximum Reset

RANGE UNITS DEFAULT

On/Off Off

0=English 0

1=Spanish

2=French

3 = Portuguese

Enable/Disable Disable

0000 to 9999 1111

On/Off Off

0 to 600 sec 30

Yes/No Yes

Yes/No Yes

80 to 100 % 100

10 to 40 %

40to 100 ^F

O=No Switch

1=Normal Open

2=Normal Closed

O=No Switch

1=Normal Open

2=Normal Closed

O=No Switch

1=Normal Open

2=Normal Closed

O=No Switch O

1=Normal Open

2=Normal Closed

Yes/No No

0=No Switch 0

1=Normal Open

2=Normal Closed

0 to 60 mins 0

0 to 60 mins 0

2O

5O

0: no FlOP

1: FlOP

0: no FlOP

1: FlOP

0: no FlOP

1: FlOP

15 to 80 % 70

1 to 9,9 ^ F 3

120 to 999 sec 180

300 to 999 sec 300

120 to 999 sec 300

0 to 600 sec 60

Enable/Disable Disable: reserved for

future use

DO NOT ENABLE

0 to 100F dF 0

Yes//No Yes

45 to 75 dF 65

0 to 20 ^ F 10

-20 to 0 ^ F -10

CCN

TABLE/SUB-TABLE

SERVICE

CONFIGURATION

DISPLAY

(display only, not in

table)

UNIT

COOL CFG

CCN POINT

DISPUNIT

LANGUAGE

PASS EBL

PASSWORD

DISPTEST

STARTDLY

OCC FAN

FATALFAN

SPEEDMAX

SPEEDMIN

SPEEDVNT

FANSTCFG

FILSTCFG

SHTDNCFG

REMOCCFG

RH OAQ

HUMSTCFG

TCSTCOOL

TCSTHEAT

MIN CAPC

SPEEDDMD

MIN ON

MIN OFF

MIN ON S

COOL FOD

A1 SENSE

OATLCOMP

ALM NOW

SASP

SASPMAXU

SASPMAXD

Down

Minimum SAT Upper Level

Minimum SAT Lower Level

Low Suction Control

Suction OK Temperature

Low Suction - Level 1

Low Suction - Level 2

Low Suction - Level 3

Ckt A Minimum Pressure

Outdoor Fan Control

Fan Levl Max Pressure

Fan Lev2 Min Pressure

Fan Lev2 On Temperature

Fan Lev2 Off Temperature

35.0 to 65.0 dF 60

35.0 to 65.0 dF 45

10 to 50 dF 18

10 to 50 d F 20

5 to 50 dF 15

0 to 50 dF 10

0 to 500 psig 20

100 to 500 psig 450

100 to 500 psig 200

0 to t00 F 55

0 to 100 F 45

SATMIN H

SATMIN L

SSTOK

SSTLEV1

SSTLEV2

SSTLEV3

DELTAP A

LEVlMAXP

LEV2MINP

LEV2ON

LEV2OFF

ENTRY

101

ITEM

HEAT

HT.TY

N.HTR

MRT.H

MOT.H

H.DEC

H.INC

FOD.E

FOD.G

HT.LO

SAT

SAT. H

SAM.L

SAM.U

SPT

HT, PD

HZND

H.LAG

ECON

EC.EN

E.CTL

MR25

MR50

MR75

MRMX

EC.MX

M.ANG

EH.LO

EL.LO

DF.DB

UEFC

FC.TM

FC.LO

PE.EN

PE1 .C

PE2.C

IDF.C

EN.SW

Table 65 -- MODE -CONFIGURATION (cont)

EXPANSION

Heating Configuration

Type of Heat Installed

Number of Heat Stages

Heat Minimum On Time

Heat Minimum Off Time

Heat Stage Decrease

Time

Heat Stage Increase Time

Fan- off Delay, Elect Heat

Fan-off Delay, Gas Heat

Heating Lockout Temp

SUPPLY AIR

TEMPERATURE

SAT Heat Mode Sensing

Maximum SAT Lower

Level

Maximum SAT Upper

Level

SPACE TEMPERATURE

SPT Heat Demand (+)

Level

SPT Heat Demand (-)

Level

Heat Thermal Lag Factor

Economizer Configuration

Economizer Installed

Economizer Control Type

Econ Min at 25%

Fanspeed

Econ Min at 50%

Fanspeed

Econ Min at 75%

Fanspeed

Econ Min at Max

Fanspeed

Econo Cool Max Position

Min Actuator Ctrl Angle

Econo Cool Hi Temp Limit

Econo Cool Lo Temp Limit

Diff Dry Bulb Control

Unoccupied Free Cooling

Free Cool PreOcc Time

Free Cool Low Temp Limit

Power Exhaust installed

Power Exhaust Stage1

CFM

Power Exhaust Stage2

CFM

Indoor Fan Max Speed

CFM

Enthalpy Switch

RANGE UNITS DEFAULT

0=No Heat

1 =Gas

2=Electric

1 to2

0 (50 series with no

electric heat)

1 (48 series)

2 (50 series with

electric heat)

1 (50 series <15kW)

2 (48 series, 50

series > = 15kW)

12O

12O

3OO

60 to 999 sec

60 to 999 sec

120 to 999 sec

120 to 999 sec 450

10 to 600 sec 30

45 to 600 sec 45

40 to 125F dF 75

Enable/Disable Disable

85 to 200 dF 140

85 to 200 dF 160

CCN

TABLE/SUB-TABLE

HEAT CFG

CCN POINT

HEATTYPE

NUM HEAT

HMIN ON

HMIN OFF

HSTAGDEC

HSTAGINC

ELEC FOD

GAS FOD

OATLHEAT

SAT HEAT

SATMAX L

SATMAX H

HDEM POS

HDEM NEG

HEAT LAG

ECONO

ECON CTL

MINP 25

MINP 50

0.5to 5 ^F 1

-5to -0.5 ^F -1

0 to 5 min 1

Yes/No No: no FlOP

Yes: FlOP

1 =Dig/Position 1

2=Dig/Command

3=Analog Ctrl

0to 100 % 0

0to 100 % 0

0to 100 % 0

0 to 100 % 30

0to 100 % 100

75 to 90 88

40 to 100F dF 65

- 30 to 50F dF 0

Disable/Enable Enable

0=Disabled 2

1 =Unoccupied

2= Preoccupancy

1 to 9999 min 120

-30 to 70F dF 50

Yes/No No: no FlOP

Yes: FlOP

100 to 15000 cfm 600

100 to 15000 cfm 0

500 to 15000 cfm 1600 (05)

2000 (06)

0=No Switch 0: no FlOP

1 =Normal Open 1: FlOP

2=Normal Closed

ECON CFG

MINP 75

MINP MAX

ECONOMAX

MINANGLE

OATLECLH

OATLECLL

DIFFBULB

UEFC CFG

UEFCTIME

OATLUEFC

PE ENABL

PE1 CFM

PE2 CFM

IDF CFM

ENTHLCFG

ENTRY

102

ITEM

AIR.Q

IA.CF

IA.FN

II.CF

II.FN

AQ.MN

OVR.P

OA.CF

OAQ.L

AQD.L

AQD.H

DF.ON

DF.OF

1.4M

1.20M

O.4M

O.20M

H.4M

H.20M

ALM.O

A.SPC

A.SRT

A.OAT

A.CS

A.CMP

A.CKT

A.SSP

A.SCT

A.FAN

A.FIL

A.ECO

PID

EC.P

EC.I

EC.D

EC.DT

E.DBD

CRP

CRI

CRD

CRDT

LK.P

LK.I

LK.D

LK.DT

Table 65 -- MODE -CONFIGURATION (cont)

EXPANSION

Air Quality Config.

IAQ Analog Input Config

IAQ Analog Fan Config

IAQ Switch Input Config

IAQ Switch Fan Config

Econo Min IAQ Position

IAQ Override Position

OAQ Analog Input Config

OAQ Lockout Limit

AQ Differential Low

AQ Differential High

Fan On AQ Differential

Fan Off AQ Differential

IAQ Sensor Value at 4mA

IAQ Sensor Value at 20mA

OAQ Sensor Value at 4mA

OAQ Sensor Value at

20mA

RH Sensor Value at 4mA

RH Sensor Value at 20mA

Alarm Relay Config.

SPT/SPRH Sensor Failure

SAT/RAT Sensor Failure

OAT Thermistor Failure

Current Sensor Failure

Compressor Failure

Refrig Circuit Failure

SSP Transducer Failure

SCT Thermistor Failure

Indoor Fan Failure

Dirty Filter

Economizer Failure

PID Configurations

Economizer PID - kP

Economizer PID - kl

Economizer PID - kD

Economizer PID - rate

Economizer PID

Deadband

Capacity PID - kP

Capacity PID - kl

Capacity PID - kD

Capacity PID - rate

Linkage Staging PID - kP

Linkage Staging PID - kl

Linkage Staging PID - kD

Linkage Staging PID -

rate

RANGE UNITS DEFAULT

% 10

% 100

0

0: no FlOP

1: FlOP

0

0

6OO

100

7OO

6OO

2OO

0

2000

0

2000

0=No IAQ

1 = DCV

2=Override IAQ

3=Ctrl Min Pos

0 = Neve r

1 =Occupied

2=Always

0=No IAQ

1 = DCV N/O

2 = DCV N/C

3=Override N/O

4=Override N/C

0 = Neve r

1 =Occupied

2=Always

0to 100

0to 100

0=No OAQ

1 = DCV

2=Lockout OAQ

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0 to 50 % 0

60 to 100 % 100

Yes/No Yes

Yes/No Yes

Yes/No Yes

Yes/No No

Yes/No Yes

Yes/No Yes

Yes/No Yes

Yes/No Yes

Yes/No Yes

Yes/No Yes

Yes/No Yes

0.0 to 99.9 2.5

0.0 to 99.9 0.1

0.0 to 99.9 1

10.0 to 180.0 sec 15

0 to 25 % 3

CON

TABLE/SUB-TABLE

IAQ CFG

ALM CFG

CCN POINT

IAQANCFG

IAQANFAN

IAQINCFG

0 to 99.9 1.5

0 to 99.9 0.1

0 to 99.9 1

1 to 30 secs 5

0.0 to 99.9 10

0.0 to 99.9 5

0.0 to 99.9 5

10.0 to 180.0 secs 30

PID CFG

IAQINFAN

IAQMINP

IAQOVPOS

OAQANCFG

OAQLOCK

DAQ LOW

DAQ HIGH

DAQFNON

DAQFNOFF

IAQ 4MA

IAQ_20MA

OAQ_4MA

OAQ 20MA

RH 4MA

RH 20MA

SPACE AL

SATRATAL

OAT AL

CS AL

COMP AL

CKT AL

SSP AL

SCT AL

FAN AL

FILT AL

ECON AL

ECONO P

ECONO I

ECONO D

ECONO DT

ECONBAND

VCAP P

VCAP I

VCAP D

VCAP DT

LINK P

LINK I

LINK D

LINK DT

ENTRY

103

ITEM

(GENERIC = CCN only)

TRIM

SPT.C

SPT.T

SAT.C

SAT.T

RAT.C

RAT.T

CCN

CCN.A

CCN.B

BAUD

BROD

B.TIM

B.OAT

B.GS

B.ACK

SCH.O

SCH.N

HOL.G

OV.TL

OV. EX

OV.SP

LDSH

S.GRP

R.MXC

S.MXC

R.MXH

S.MXH

Table 65 -- MODE - CONFIGURATION (cont)

EXPANSION

POINT 01 Definition

POINT 02 Definition

POINT 03 Definition

POINT 04 Definition

POINT 05 Definition

POINT 06 Definition

POINT 07 Definition

POINT 08 Definition

POINT 09 Definition

POINT 10 Definition

POINT 11 Definition

POINT 12 Definition

POINT 13 Definition

POINT 14 Definition

POINT 15 Definition

POINT 16 Definition

POINT 17 Definition

POINT 18 Definition

POINT 19 Definition

POINT 20 Definition

Sensor Calibration

Space Temp Calibration

Space Temp Trim

Supply Air Temp Calib.

Supply Air Temp Trim

Return Air Temp Calib.

Return Air Temp Trim

CCN Configuration

CCN Element Number

CCN Bus Number

CCN Baud Rate

CCN Broadcast Config.

CCN Time/Date Broadcast

CCN OAT Broadcast

Global Schedule Broadcst

CCN Broadcast Ack'er

CCN Schedule Overrides

Schedule Number

Accept Global Holidays

Override Time Limit

Timed Override Hours

SPT Override Enabled

CCN Schedule Overrides

Loadshed Group Number

Redline Max Capacity

Loadshed Max Capacity

Redline Max Heat Stages

Loadshed Max Heat

Stages

CCN

RANGE UNITS DEFAULT CCN POINT

TABLE/SUB-TABLE

GENERICS

8-char ASCII Point 01

8- char ASCII

8- char ASCII

8- char ASCII

8- char ASCII

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

8- char ASCii

-30to 130

- 30 to 30

-30to 130

- 30 to 30

-30to 130

- 30 to 30

1 to 239

0 to 239

2400, 4800, 9600,

19200, 38400

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

Yes/No

O = Always

Occupied

1-64 =

Local Schedule

65-99

= Global Schedule

Yes/No

Oto 4

Oto 4

Yes/No

Oto 16

Oto 100

Oto 100

Oto 2

Oto 2

dF

^F

dF

^F

dF

^F

hours

hours

0

0

0

1

0

3

No

No

No

No

No

4

O

Yes

(CCN TRIM - see

Maintenance

Display)

CONFIGURATION

48 50 PD

BRODEFS

SCHEDOVR

Point 02

Point 03

Point 04

%

%

0

1O0

1O0

2

2

LOADSHED

Point 05

Point 06

Point 07

Point 08

Point 09

Point 10

Point 11

Point 12

Point 13

Point 14

Point 15

Point 16

Point 17

Point 18

Point 19

Point 20

CCNADD

CCNBUS

CCNBAUDD

CCNBC

OATBC

GSBC

CCNBCACK

SCHEDNUM

HOLIDAYT

OTL

OVR EXT

TIME-OVER

SHED NUM

MAXCREDL

MAXCSHED

MAXHREDL

MAXHSHED

ENTRY

104

UNIT START-UP CHECKLIST

MODEL NO.: SERIAL NO:

DATE: TECHNICIAN:

I. PRE-START-UP:

[] VERIFY THAT ALL PACKAGING MATERIALS HAVE BEEN REMOVED FROM UNIT

[] VERIFY INSTALLATION OF OUTDOOR AIR HOOD

[] VERIFY INSTALLATION OF FLUE EXHAUST AND INLET HOOD (48PD ONLY)

[] VERIFY THAT CONDENSATE CONNECTION IS INSTALLED PER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

[] VERIFY THAT ALL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND TERMINALS ARE TIGHT

[] VERIFY GAS PRESSURE TO UNIT GAS VALVE IS WITHIN SPECIFIED RANGE (48PD ONLY)

[] CHECK GAS PIPING FOR LEAKS (48PD ONLY)

[] CHECK THAT INDOOR-AIR FILTERS ARE CLEAN AND IN PLACE

[] CHECK THAT OUTDOOR AIR INLET SCREENS ARE IN PLACE

[] VERIFY THAT UNIT IS LEVEL

[] CHECK FAN WHEELS AND PROPELLER FOR LOCATION IN HOUSING/ORIFICE AND VERIFY SETSCREW IS TIGHT

[] VERIFY THAT FAN SHEAVES ARE ALIGNED AND BELTS ARE PROPERLY TENSIONED

[] VERIFY THAT SCROLL COMPRESSORS ARE ROTATING IN THE CORRECT DIRECTION

[] VERIFY INSTALLATION OF SPACE SENSOR

[] VERIFY CONFIGURATION VALUES FOR ELECTRONIC CONTROLS (REFER TO CONTROL SET UP CHECKLIST)

[] VERIFY THAT CRANKCASE HEATERS HAVE BEEN ENERGIZED FOR AT LEAST 24 HOURS

[] VERIFY THAT THE VFD IS IN AUTO MODE

II. START-UP

ELECTRICAL

SUPPLY VOLTAGE L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

COMPRESSOR AMP_-COMPRESSOR A1

--COMPRESSOR B1

--COMPRESSOR C1

ELECTRIC HEAT AMPS (IF EQUIPPED)

SUPPLY FAN AMPS

TEMPERATURES

OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE

RETURN-AIR TEMPERATURE

COOLING SUPPLY AIR

GAS HEAT SUPPLY AIR (48PG)

ELECTRIC HEAT SUPPLY AIR (50PG)

PRESSURES

GAS INLET PRESSURE

GAS MANIFOLD PRESSURE

REFRIGERANT SUCTION

REFRIGERANT DISCHARGE

L1 L2 L3

L1 L2 L3

L1 L2 L3

L1 L2 L3

L1 L2 L3

F DB (Dry Bulb)

FDB

F

F

F

IN. WG

STAGE NO. 1 IN. WG

CIRCUIT A PSIG

CIRCUIT B PSIG

CIRCUIT C PSIG

CIRCUIT A PSIG

CIRCUIT B PSIG

F WB (Wet Bulb)

STAGE NO. 2

CIRCUIT C PSIG

[] VERIFY REFRIGERANT CHARGE USING CHARGING CHARTS

GENERAL

[] ECONOMIZER MINIMUM VENT AND CHANGEOVER SETTINGS TO JOB REQUIREMENTS

IN. WG

105

Copyright 2009 Carrier Corp. * 73 i0 W. Morris St. * hldianapolis. IN 46231 Printed in U.S.A. Edition Date: 3/09

Manufacturer reserves the right to change_ at any time_ specifications and designs without notice and without obligations.

Catalog No:48-50PD-01T

Replaces: NEW

106